Application Guidelines / Operating Instructions

Application guidelines / Operating instructions
Dedrive Compact frequency inverters (0.75 to 55 kW)

Valid for software version 4.2.4/050-6 and DIC-4-xxx-E-0000-01 hardware
43205844_xml.eps
220808 en 21471644 720 IS 922

Manufacturer
Demag Cranes & Components GmbH

Drives
P.O. Box 67
D -58286 Wetter
Phone: +49 (0) 2335 92-0
Telefax +49 (0) 2335 92-7298
www.drives.demagcranes.com
E-mail: drives@demagcranes.com
Accompanying documents
Part no.
General documents
DE EN FR ES
Operating instructions
Brief operating instructions 214 707 44 214 708 44 214 709 44 214 710 44
Demag Dedrive Compact
frequency inverters (0.75 to
55 kW)
Application guidelines / Op‐ 214 715 44 214 716 44 214 717 44 214 718 44
erating instructions Demag
Dedrive Compact frequen‐
cy inverters (0.75 to 55 kW)
Operating instructions 214 769 44 214 770 44 214 771 44 214 772 44
Communication module
CM – PDP (Profibus-DP)
Operating instructions 214 773 44 214 774 44 214 775 44 214 776 44
Communication module
CM – CAN (CANopen)
Operating instructions Ex‐ 214 777 44 214 778 44 214 779 44 214 780 44
pansion module EM-SYS
(system bus)
pansion modul EM - I/O - 02
(digital inputs/outputs)
pansion module EM - ENC
- 02 (rotary encoder)
Operating instructions for Z 214 227 44 214 228 44 214 229 44 214 230 44
motor range
Operating instructions En‐ 214 371 44 214 372 44 214 373 44 214 374 44
coders for Z motors
CD
CD ROM "Product docu‐ 213 136 44
mentation Dedrive Com‐
pact" with, e.g. application
guidelines/operating in‐
structions and operating in‐
structions of option mod‐
ules
Tab. 1
21471644/220808
2
Table of contents
0 Foreword ................................................................................................................................................................... 11
0.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 11
0.2 Copyright ................................................................................................................................................................... 11
0.3 Customer service ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
0.4 Liability for Defects .................................................................................................................................................... 11
0.5 Limitations of liability ................................................................................................................................................. 12
0.6 Definitions.................................................................................................................................................................. 12
1 Safety ........................................................................................................................................................................ 13
1.1 Symbols/signal words................................................................................................................................................ 13
1.2 Appropriate use ......................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.3 Prohibited practises, improper use ............................................................................................................................ 14
1.4 Safety instructions ..................................................................................................................................................... 14
1.5 Transportation and storage ....................................................................................................................................... 15
1.6 Handling and installing .............................................................................................................................................. 15
1.7 Connection of the electrical equipment ..................................................................................................................... 15
1.8 Operation................................................................................................................................................................... 15
1.9 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................................. 16
2 Scope of delivery ....................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2 DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency inverters ....................................................................................................................... 17
2.3 DIC-4-014 to 040 frequency inverters ...................................................................................................................... 18
2.4 DIC-4-045 to 110 frequency inverters ...................................................................................................................... 19
3 Technical data ........................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.4 Operating diagrams ................................................................................................................................................... 23
3.4.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 23
3.4.2 Site altitude................................................................................................................................................................ 23
3.4.3 Coolant temperature.................................................................................................................................................. 24
3.4.4 Line voltage ............................................................................................................................................................... 24
4 Mechanical installation .............................................................................................................................................. 25
4.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 25
4.5 Fitting CM-xxx and EM-xxx hardware modules ......................................................................................................... 30
4.5.1 General fitting instructions ......................................................................................................................................... 30
4.5.2 Instructions for fitting the EM expansion module....................................................................................................... 30
4.5.3 Instructions for fitting the CM communication module............................................................................................... 30
5 Electrical installation .................................................................................................................................................. 32
5.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.2 EMC notes................................................................................................................................................................. 33
5.3 Block diagram............................................................................................................................................................ 34
21471644/220808
5.4 Line connection ......................................................................................................................................................... 35

5.4.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 35
5.4.2 DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency inverters ....................................................................................................................... 36
3
5.4.3 DIC4-014 to 040 frequency inverters ........................................................................................................................ 37
5.5 Motor connection ....................................................................................................................................................... 39
5.5.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 39
5.6 Control terminals ....................................................................................................................................................... 45
5.6.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 45
5.6.2 Relay output S3OUT ................................................................................................................................................. 46
5.6.3 Control terminals – connection diagram .................................................................................................................... 46
5.6.4 Configurations 1xx and 4xx - without encoder .......................................................................................................... 47
5.6.5 Configurations 2xx - with encoder ............................................................................................................................. 48
5.7 Hardware modules .................................................................................................................................................... 49
5.7.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 49
6 KP500 control unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 51
6.1 Key assignment and displays .................................................................................................................................... 51
6.2 Menu structure .......................................................................................................................................................... 52
6.3 Main menu................................................................................................................................................................. 53
6.4 Actual value menu (VAL)........................................................................................................................................... 54
6.5 Parameter menu (PARA) .......................................................................................................................................... 55
6.6 Copy menu (CPY) ..................................................................................................................................................... 56
6.6.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 56
6.6.2 Reading the memory infomation ............................................................................................................................... 56
6.6.3 Menu structure .......................................................................................................................................................... 57
6.6.4 Selecting the source .................................................................................................................................................. 57
6.6.5 Selecting the destination ........................................................................................................................................... 58
6.6.6 Copy operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 58
6.6.7 Error messages ......................................................................................................................................................... 59
6.7 Control menu (CTRL) ................................................................................................................................................ 59
6.8 Controlling the motor via the operating unit............................................................................................................... 60
7 Putting into operation in practice ............................................................................................................................... 62
7.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 62
7.2 Switching on the power supply .................................................................................................................................. 62
7.3 Set-up by means of the operating unit ...................................................................................................................... 62
7.3.1 General on set-up...................................................................................................................................................... 62
7.3.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................. 63
7.3.3 Data set ..................................................................................................................................................................... 64
7.3.4 Motor data ................................................................................................................................................................. 64
7.3.5 Rotary encoder data .................................................................................................................................................. 65
7.3.6 Plausibility check ....................................................................................................................................................... 65
7.3.7 Parameter identification............................................................................................................................................. 66
7.3.8 Reference values ...................................................................................................................................................... 67
7.4 Checking the direction of rotation .............................................................................................................................. 69
7.5 Set-up by means of the communication interface ..................................................................................................... 69
21471644/220808
8 Programming parameters with the Parcom Compact software................................................................................. 71

8.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 71
8.2 Window layout ........................................................................................................................................................... 71
4
9 Inverter data .............................................................................................................................................................. 72
9.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 72
9.2 Serial number ............................................................................................................................................................ 72
9.3 Optional modules ...................................................................................................................................................... 72
9.4 Frequency inverter software version ......................................................................................................................... 72
9.5 Set password............................................................................................................................................................. 72
9.6 Control Level ............................................................................................................................................................. 73
9.7 User Name ................................................................................................................................................................ 73
9.8 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................. 73
9.8.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 73
9.8.2 Configuration 110 – V/f without encoder ................................................................................................................... 73
9.8.3 Configuration 111 – V/f with technology controller .................................................................................................... 73
9.8.4 Configuration 210 – FOR speed control with encoder............................................................................................... 73
9.8.5 Configuration 230 – FOR N or M controlled .............................................................................................................. 73
9.8.6 Configuration 410 – FOR speed control without encoder.......................................................................................... 74
9.8.7 Configuration 430 – FOR N or M controlled without encoder .................................................................................... 74
9.9 Language .................................................................................................................................................................. 74
9.10 Programming ............................................................................................................................................................. 74
10 Motor data ................................................................................................................................................................. 75
10.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 75
10.2 Rated motor parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 75
10.3 Additional motor data ................................................................................................................................................ 75
10.3.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 75
10.3.2 Stator resistance ....................................................................................................................................................... 75
10.3.3 Leakage factor........................................................................................................................................................... 75
10.3.4 Magnetising current ................................................................................................................................................... 76
10.3.5 Rotor time constant correction factor ........................................................................................................................ 76
10.4 Rotary encoder .......................................................................................................................................................... 77
10.4.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 77
10.4.2 Operation mode encoder 1........................................................................................................................................ 77
10.4.3 Operation mode encoder 2........................................................................................................................................ 77
10.4.4 Division marks encoder 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 78
10.4.5 Filter time constant encoder 1 ................................................................................................................................... 79
10.5 System data .............................................................................................................................................................. 79
11 Operating behaviour .................................................................................................................................................. 80
11.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
11.2 Starting behaviour ..................................................................................................................................................... 80
11.2.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
11.2.2 Start-up behaviour of the V/f characteristic ............................................................................................................... 80
11.2.2.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
11.2.2.2 DC magnetisation ...................................................................................................................................................... 81
11.2.2.3 Starting current .......................................................................................................................................................... 81
11.2.2.4 Frequency limit .......................................................................................................................................................... 81
11.2.3 Starting behaviour of the FOR................................................................................................................................... 81
11.3 Stopping behaviour ................................................................................................................................................... 82
11.4 Auto-Start .................................................................................................................................................................. 82
11.5 Search Run ............................................................................................................................................................... 83
21471644/220808
11.6 Positioning ................................................................................................................................................................. 84

11.6.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 84
11.6.2 Reference positioning................................................................................................................................................ 84
11.6.3 Axle positioning ......................................................................................................................................................... 87 5
11.7 Brake control ............................................................................................................................................................. 89
11.7.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 89
11.7.2 Start delay ................................................................................................................................................................. 89
11.7.3 DC pre-magnetisation time........................................................................................................................................ 90
11.7.4 DC post-magnetization time ...................................................................................................................................... 90
11.7.5 Brake release delay................................................................................................................................................... 90
11.7.6 Brake application time ............................................................................................................................................... 91
11.8 Load spectrum calculation......................................................................................................................................... 93
11.8.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 93
11.8.2 Load spectrum calculation mode............................................................................................................................... 93
11.8.3 Theoretical duration of service .................................................................................................................................. 94
11.8.4 Lifting correction factor .............................................................................................................................................. 94
11.8.5 Lowering correction factor ......................................................................................................................................... 94
11.8.6 Duration of service specification................................................................................................................................ 95
11.8.7 Actual duration of service .......................................................................................................................................... 95
11.8.8 Remaining service life ............................................................................................................................................... 95
11.8.9 Relative torque .......................................................................................................................................................... 96
11.8.10 Ramp factor ............................................................................................................................................................... 96
11.9 Limit switch functions ................................................................................................................................................ 96
11.9.1 Reference value limitation ......................................................................................................................................... 96
11.9.2 Setpoint val. limit 1+ and setpoint val. limit 1- ........................................................................................................... 97
11.9.3 Setpoint val. limit 2+ and Setpoint val. limit 2-........................................................................................................... 97
11.9.4 Limit switch monitoring frequency ............................................................................................................................. 97
11.9.5 Limit switch status ..................................................................................................................................................... 98
12 Error and warning behaviour ..................................................................................................................................... 99
12.1 General...................................................................................................................................................................... 99
12.2 Overload Ixt ............................................................................................................................................................... 99
12.3 Temperature .............................................................................................................................................................. 99
12.4 Controller status ........................................................................................................................................................ 99
12.5 IDC compensation limit ........................................................................................................................................... 100
12.6 Frequency switch-off limit ........................................................................................................................................ 100
12.7 Motor temperature ................................................................................................................................................... 100
12.8 Phase failure ........................................................................................................................................................... 101
12.9 Automatic error acknowledgement .......................................................................................................................... 101
12.10 Frequency monitoring.............................................................................................................................................. 101
12.11 Max. frequency deviation ........................................................................................................................................ 102
13 Reference values .................................................................................................................................................... 103
13.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 103
13.2 Frequency Limits ..................................................................................................................................................... 103
13.3 Percentage Limits.................................................................................................................................................... 103
13.4 Reference frequency channel ................................................................................................................................. 103
13.4.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 103
13.4.2 Table of switch positions ......................................................................................................................................... 104
13.4.3 Block diagram.......................................................................................................................................................... 105
13.5 Reference percentage channel ............................................................................................................................... 106
13.5.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 106
13.5.2 Table of switch positions ......................................................................................................................................... 106
21471644/220808
13.5.3 Block diagram.......................................................................................................................................................... 107

13.6 Fixed reference values ............................................................................................................................................ 108
13.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 108
6 13.6.2 SOST reference value steps ................................................................................................................................... 108
13.6.3 JOG frequency ........................................................................................................................................................ 109
13.6.4 Fixed percentage values ......................................................................................................................................... 109
13.7 Frequency Ramps ................................................................................................................................................... 110
13.8 Percentage ramps ................................................................................................................................................... 113
13.9 Blocking frequencies ............................................................................................................................................... 113
13.10 SOSP reference value memory............................................................................................................................... 114
13.10.1 Operating principle: General information................................................................................................................. 114
13.10.2 SOSP parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 115
13.10.3 Reference value memory diagram .......................................................................................................................... 115
13.11 Keypad motor potentiometer ................................................................................................................................... 116
13.12 Repetition frequency input....................................................................................................................................... 116
13.13 ProHub function....................................................................................................................................................... 116
13.13.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 116
13.13.2 ProHub function operation mode............................................................................................................................. 118
13.13.3 Field weakening enable........................................................................................................................................... 118
13.13.4 Field weakening start .............................................................................................................................................. 118
13.13.5 Lifting correction value ............................................................................................................................................ 118
13.13.6 Lowering correction value ....................................................................................................................................... 118
13.13.7 Start of measurement .............................................................................................................................................. 119
13.13.8 Field weakening factor ............................................................................................................................................ 119
13.13.9 Current measuring value ......................................................................................................................................... 119
13.13.10 Valid maximum frequency ....................................................................................................................................... 119
13.14 Additional setpoint value ......................................................................................................................................... 119
13.14.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 119
13.14.2 Additional setpoint value operation mode ............................................................................................................... 120
13.14.3 Additional control ..................................................................................................................................................... 120
13.14.4 Additional setpoint value frequency limits ............................................................................................................... 120
13.14.5 Additional setpoint value frequency ramps.............................................................................................................. 120
13.14.6 Additional setpoint value bus operation................................................................................................................... 121
13.14.7 Additional fixed frequencies .................................................................................................................................... 121
14 Control inputs and outputs ...................................................................................................................................... 122
14.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 122
14.2 Multi-function input MFI1 ......................................................................................................................................... 122
14.2.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 122
14.2.2 Analog input MFI1A ................................................................................................................................................. 122
14.2.2.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 122
14.2.2.2 Characteristic curve................................................................................................................................................. 122
14.2.2.3 Scaling..................................................................................................................................................................... 124
14.2.2.4 Tolerance range and hysteresis .............................................................................................................................. 125
14.2.2.5 Error and warning behaviour ................................................................................................................................... 127
14.3 Multi-function output MFO1 ..................................................................................................................................... 127
14.3.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 127
14.3.2 Operation mode analog MFO1A ............................................................................................................................. 127
14.3.2.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 127
14.3.2.2 Output characteristic ............................................................................................................................................... 129
14.3.3 Operation mode repetition frequency MFO1F ......................................................................................................... 129
14.4 Digital outputs.......................................................................................................................................................... 130
14.4.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 130
14.4.2 Setting Frequency ................................................................................................................................................... 131
21471644/220808
14.4.3 Reference value reached ........................................................................................................................................ 131

14.4.4 Flux-Forming finished .............................................................................................................................................. 131
14.4.5 Release brake ......................................................................................................................................................... 132
14.4.6 Current limitation ..................................................................................................................................................... 132
7
14.4.7 Comparator ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
14.4.8 Warning mask ......................................................................................................................................................... 133
14.5 Digital inputs ............................................................................................................................................................ 135
14.5.1 Assignment.............................................................................................................................................................. 135
14.5.2 Starting command ................................................................................................................................................... 136
14.5.3 Data set change-over .............................................................................................................................................. 136
14.5.4 SOST reference value step change-over ................................................................................................................ 137
14.5.5 Fixed percentage value change-over ...................................................................................................................... 137
14.5.6 SOSP reference value memory function ................................................................................................................. 137
14.5.7 Motor thermal contact.............................................................................................................................................. 137
14.5.8 Timers ..................................................................................................................................................................... 138
14.5.9 Additional fixed frequency selection ........................................................................................................................ 138
14.5.10 Additional setpoint value release............................................................................................................................. 138
14.5.11 Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation ........................................................................................................................... 138
14.5.11.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 138
14.5.11.2 Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1+ and
fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1- ........................................................................................................................ 138
14.5.11.3 Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 2 ........................................................................................................................ 139
14.5.11.4 Operating limit switches .......................................................................................................................................... 139
14.5.12 Error acknowledgment ............................................................................................................................................ 139
14.5.13 n-/M-control change-over ........................................................................................................................................ 139
14.5.14 Percent motor potentiometer ................................................................................................................................... 140
14.6 Timer function.......................................................................................................................................................... 140
14.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 140
14.6.2 Timer time constant ................................................................................................................................................. 140
14.7 Logic function .......................................................................................................................................................... 142
15 V/f characteristic ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
15.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 144
15.2 Dynamic voltage pre-control.................................................................................................................................... 145
16 Control functions ..................................................................................................................................................... 146
16.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 146
16.2 Intelligent current limits............................................................................................................................................ 146
16.3 Voltage controller .................................................................................................................................................... 147
16.3.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 147
16.3.2 Operation mode overvoltage controller ................................................................................................................... 147
16.3.3 Operation mode mains support ............................................................................................................................... 148
16.4 Control functions of the V/f characteristic ................................................................................................................ 150
16.4.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 150
16.4.2 Slip compensation ................................................................................................................................................... 150
16.4.3 Current limit controller ............................................................................................................................................. 151
16.4.4 Technology controller .............................................................................................................................................. 152
16.4.4.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 152
16.4.4.2 Operation mode standard........................................................................................................................................ 153
16.4.4.3 Operation mode level 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 153
16.4.4.4 Operation mode level 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 153
16.4.4.5 Operation mode speed control ................................................................................................................................ 154
16.4.4.6 Operation mode indirect volumetric flow control ..................................................................................................... 154
16.5 Functions of field-oriented regulation ...................................................................................................................... 155
16.5.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 155
16.5.2 Current controller..................................................................................................................................................... 155
21471644/220808
16.5.3 Torque controller ..................................................................................................................................................... 156

16.5.4 Limit value sources.................................................................................................................................................. 156
16.5.5 Speed controller ...................................................................................................................................................... 156
8
16.5.5.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 156
16.5.5.2 Limitation of the speed controller ............................................................................................................................ 158
16.5.5.3 Limit value sources.................................................................................................................................................. 158
16.5.6 Acceleration pre-control .......................................................................................................................................... 159
16.5.7 Field controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 159
16.5.7.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 159
16.5.7.2 Limitation of the field controller................................................................................................................................ 160
16.5.7.3 KB de-magnetization time ....................................................................................................................................... 160
16.5.8 Modulation controller ............................................................................................................................................... 161
16.5.8.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 161
16.5.8.2 Limitation of the modulation controller..................................................................................................................... 161
17 Special functions ..................................................................................................................................................... 162

17.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 162
17.2 Pulse width modulation ........................................................................................................................................... 162
17.3 Fan .......................................................................................................................................................................... 162
17.4 Brake chopper ......................................................................................................................................................... 163
17.5 Motor chopper ......................................................................................................................................................... 163
17.6 Motor protective switch............................................................................................................................................ 164
17.7 Bus controller .......................................................................................................................................................... 166
17.8 Temperature adjustment ......................................................................................................................................... 166
17.9 Rotary encoder monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 167
18 Actual Values .......................................................................................................................................................... 169
18.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 169
18.2 Actual frequency inverter values ............................................................................................................................. 169
18.3 Actual machine values ............................................................................................................................................ 169
18.4 Actual system values............................................................................................................................................... 170
18.5 Actual value memory ............................................................................................................................................... 170
19 Error protocol........................................................................................................................................................... 172
19.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 172
19.2 Error list ................................................................................................................................................................... 172
19.2.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 172
19.2.2 Error messages ....................................................................................................................................................... 172
19.3 Error environment.................................................................................................................................................... 174
20 Operation and error diagnosis................................................................................................................................. 176
20.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 176
20.2 Status display .......................................................................................................................................................... 176
20.3 Status of the digital signals...................................................................................................................................... 177
20.4 Controller status ...................................................................................................................................................... 177
20.5 Warning status ........................................................................................................................................................ 178
21 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................................................... 180
21.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 180
21.2 Actual value menu (VAL)......................................................................................................................................... 180
21.3 Parameter menu (PARA) ........................................................................................................................................ 184
22 Accessories for Dedrive Compact frequency inverters ........................................................................................... 202
22.1 Size 1 DIC - 4 - 002 to 004 ...................................................................................................................................... 202
21471644/220808
22.2 Size 2 DIC - 4 - 006 to 009 ...................................................................................................................................... 203

22.3 Size 3 DIC - 4 - 014 to 017 ...................................................................................................................................... 204
22.4 Size 4 DIC - 4 - 025 to 040 ...................................................................................................................................... 205 9
22.5 Size 5 DIC - 4 - 045 to 060 ...................................................................................................................................... 206
22.6 Size 6 DIC - 4 - 075 to 110 ...................................................................................................................................... 207
22.7 Braking resistors...................................................................................................................................................... 208
22.7.1 Assignment and electrical data ............................................................................................................................... 208
22.7.1.1 Resistors for standard travel applications ............................................................................................................... 208
22.7.1.2 Resistors for special travel applications .................................................................................................................. 209
22.7.1.3 Resistors for lifting applications ............................................................................................................................... 210
22.7.2 Mechanical data and dimensions ............................................................................................................................ 211
22.7.2.1 Compact resistors type PWR .................................................................................................................................. 211
22.7.2.2 Cemented tube resistors type FZ.G ........................................................................................................................ 212
22.7.2.3 Steel-grid resistors type FGF... ............................................................................................................................... 213
22.7.2.4 Steel-grid resistors type FA... .................................................................................................................................. 214
22.7.3 Overload relay for the braking resistor .................................................................................................................... 215
22.8 Line reactors and line filters .................................................................................................................................... 216
22.8.1 Assignment.............................................................................................................................................................. 216
22.8.1.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 216
22.8.1.2 Limit value class B................................................................................................................................................... 217
22.8.1.3 Limit value class A group 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 218
22.8.1.4 Limit value class A group 2 ..................................................................................................................................... 219
22.8.1.5 Comparison of the limit values ................................................................................................................................ 220
22.8.2 Line reactor technical data ...................................................................................................................................... 220
22.8.2.1 Line reactor electrical data ...................................................................................................................................... 220
22.8.2.2 Mechanical data and dimensions of line reactors ................................................................................................... 221
22.8.3 Line filter technical data........................................................................................................................................... 221
22.8.3.1 Electrical data .......................................................................................................................................................... 221
22.8.3.2 Mechanical data and dimensions of line filters ........................................................................................................ 222
22.9 Output filters (du/dt)................................................................................................................................................. 225
22.9.1 Assignment and electrical data ............................................................................................................................... 225
22.9.2 Mechanical data and dimensions ............................................................................................................................ 227
22.9.3 Motor cable lengths ................................................................................................................................................. 229
23 Project engineering ................................................................................................................................................. 230
23.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 230
23.2 Selecting the motor according to the drive requirement .......................................................................................... 230
23.3 Speed range of the selected motor ......................................................................................................................... 231
23.4 Field weakening operation ...................................................................................................................................... 232
23.5 Static torque for speed values of approx. "0 rpm" ................................................................................................... 232
24 Block wiring diagram ............................................................................................................................................... 233
24.1 Circuit diagram ........................................................................................................................................................ 233
24.2 Pulse generator connection to the Dedrive Compact DIC-4-xxx ............................................................................. 234
24.2.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 234
24.2.2 Selection of the pulse generator and interface electronics...................................................................................... 234
24.2.2.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 234
24.2.2.2 EG integral pulse generator with 30 pulses per revolution...................................................................................... 234
24.2.2.3 EGS integral pulse generator with 30 pulses per revolution ................................................................................... 234
24.2.2.4 AG external pulse generator with 1024 pulses per revolution ................................................................................. 235
24.2.3 Electrical connection/terminal assignment .............................................................................................................. 236
24.2.4 S1 protective electronics on the Dedrive Compact ................................................................................................. 237
21471644/220808
10
0 Foreword
0.1 General
You have purchased a Demag product. This equipment was manufactured in accordance with state-of-the-art en‐
gineering principles.
These operating instructions are designed to provide the operator with appropriate instructions for safe and correct
operation and to facilitate maintenance.
Every individual given the task of transporting, installing, commissioning, operating, maintaining and repairing our
frequency inverters and their additional equipment must have read and understood
● the operating instructions
● the safety regulations
● the safety instructions in the individual chapters and sections.
gelesen und verstanden haben.
The operating instructions must be available to the operating personnel at all times in order to prevent operating
errors and to ensure smooth and trouble-free operation of our products.
0.2 Copyright
These operating instructions must be treated confidentially. They should only be used by authorized personnel. They
may only be entrusted or made available to third parties with the prior written consent of Demag. All documents are
protected within the sense of copyright law.
No part of this documentation may be reproduced, utilized or transmitted without specific prior consent.
Infringements are an offence resulting in obligatory compensatory damages. All industrial rights reserved.
0.3 Customer service

For technical information on Demag products and their systematic application, please refer to one of our after-sales
service centres, the relevant representative or to our main office in Wetter.
0.4 Liability for Defects

These operating instructions must be read carefully before installing and putting the product into operation.
We assume no liability for damage and malfunctions resulting from failure to comply with the operating instructions.
Liability claims for defects must be made by quoting the order number immediately on detecting the defect.
Any liability claims for defects are void in the event of:
● inappropriate use,
● faulty devices or equipment connected or attached to the system which are not part of our scope of supplies and
services,
● use of non-genuine spare parts and accessories,
● refurbishment or modification of the product unless approved in writing by Demag.
Wearing parts are not subject to liability for defects.

21471644/220808
11
0.5 Limitations of liability
All technical information, data and instructions for operation contained in these operating instructions were up-to-
date on going to print and are compiled on the basis of our experience and to the best of our knowledge.
We reserve the right to incorporate technical modifications within the scope of further development of the frequency
inverters which are the subject of these operating instructions. Therefore, no claims can be derived from the infor‐
mation, illustrations and descriptions contained in these operating instructions. The descriptions and illustrations
contained in these operating instructions do not necessarily correspond to the scope of delivery or any subsequent
spare part delivery, either; the drawings and illustrations are not to scale. Only documentation belonging to the actual
order is valid.
We assume no liability for damage and malfunctions caused as a result of operating errors, non-compliance with
these operating instructions or inappropriate repairs and maintenance.
We expressly point out that only genuine Demag spare parts and accessories approved by us may be used. Ac‐
cordingly, this also applies to other manufacturers' parts supplied by us. For safety reasons, the fitting and use of
spare parts or accessories which have not been approved and unauthorized modification and conversion of the
product are not permitted and exempt Demag Cranes & Components from any liability for damages resulting there‐
from.
With the exclusion of any further claims, our liability for defects and liability obligations for any defects pertaining to
the products supplied or faults in the documentation delivered or any negligence on our part are exclusively based
on the stipulations of the original contract. Any further claims, in particular any and all claims for damages, are
excluded with the exception of legal claims in accordance with product liability legislation.
0.6 Definitions
Owner
Owners (employer, company) are defined as persons who own the product and who use it appropriately or allow it
to be operated by suitable persons.
Operating personnel
Operating personnel are defined as persons assigned by the owner of the product to operate the product.
Specialist personnel
Specialist personnel are defined as persons assigned by the owner to carry out specific tasks, such as installation,
setting-up, maintenance and fault elimination.
Qualified electrician
Qualified electricians are defined as persons who, owing to their technical training, knowledge and experience of
the product and electrical installations as well as knowledge of the relevant standards, codes of practice and regu‐
lations, are able to assess the tasks given to them and to identify and eliminate potential hazards.
Trained person
Trained persons are defined as persons who have been instructed and trained for the tasks assigned to them and
on the possible hazards resulting from incorrect handling and who have been informed about the required protective
devices, protective measures, relevant regulations, codes of practice, accident prevention regulations and operating
conditions and who have proven their qualifications.
Experienced technician
Experienced technicians are defined as persons, who, owing to their technical training and experience, have suffi‐
cient knowledge of the product and are familiar with the relevant national industrial safety regulations, codes of
practice, accident prevention regulations, directives and generally accepted engineering standards (e.g. EC Direc‐
tives, German VDE and VBG regulations) enabling them to judge the safe operating condition of frequency inverters.
21471644/220808
12
1 Safety
1.1 Symbols/signal words

Important safety information and instructions are marked by corresponding symbols and signal words.
The safety instructions must be followed. Exercise particular caution to ensure that accidents, injuries and damage
are avoided in such cases.
The relevant local accident prevention regulations for the application and general safety instructions must also be
complied with.
The following symbols and instructions warn against possible personal injuries or damage to property and are in‐
tended to assist you in your work.
DANGER
This symbol indicates an immediate hazard which can result in serious injury or death.
– Follow these instructions at all times and be particularly careful and cautious.
WARNING
This symbol indicates a possibly hazardous situation which might result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates a possibly hazardous situation which might result in medium to light injury or damage.
Operating hazard for the installation

● This symbol indicates information on the appropriate use of machinery.
● This symbol in the operating instructions indicates all warnings which, if not complied with, may result in mal‐
functions or damage.
1.2 Appropriate use

Frequency inverters are electrical drive components which are intended to be incorporated into electrical installations
or machines. Frequency inverters are available to a limited extent and only intended for professional use in the sense
of the standard EN 61800-3. The unit must not be put into operation (i.e. designated/intended operation must not
commence) until it has been established that the machinery complies with the provisions of EC Directive 98/37/EEC
(Machinery Directive) and with the provisions of EN 60204. The frequency inverters are marked with the CE symbol
and thus meet the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and comply with the standard EN 50178 /
DIN VDE 0160.
The user is responsible for compliance with EMC directive 89/336/EEC.
With the UL approval symbol according to UL508c the requirements of the CSA standard C22.2-No. 14-95 are also
met. Refer to the rating plate and documentation for the technical data and information on connecting these units
as well as on the ambient conditions; these conditions and data must not be exceeded.
21471644/220808
13
1.3 Prohibited practises, improper use
Refer to the rating plate and documentation for the technical data and information on connecting these units; these
conditions and data must not be exceeded.
Under certain conditions, operation of frequency inverters is prohibited as this could result in malfunctions, equipment
failure or hazard to life and limb, e.g. in the case of:
● Acidic, corrosive air as coolant
● Operation outside the permitted temperature range
● Operation beyond the normal air pressure
● Operation under conditions of high humidity or splashwater
● Manipulation of electrical modules
Safety devices must not be rendered inoperable or modified or used in any way other than that for which they have
been designed.
1.4 Safety instructions
WARNING
Non-compliance with the safety instructions

There is danger to life and limb in the case of non-compliance.
The relevant national accident prevention regulations and the general safety conditions must always be observed
when our products are operated in order to avoid accidents and damage to machinery. If the safety instructions given
in these operating instructions are not observed in any way, personal injury or even death can result.
DANGER
Electric shock, live components

Contact with live components can result in danger to life and limb.
Only carry out maintenance and installation work,
– if the frequency inverter is at zero voltage,
– if the frequency inverter is secured against accidental restoration of the power supply,
– if all cables, motor terminals and capacitors are at zero potential (establish with a voltmeter),
– with insulated tools.
To ensure that the inverters are switched off independently of the mains supply, a circuit interrupter or a line contactor
must be installed between the power supply and inverter.
Control, power supply and motor leads must be laid separately.
DANGER

Always verify the safe isolation from the power supply before starting work on the frequency inverter. If the light
emitting diodes go out or fail, this does not indicate that the frequency inverter is de-energized.
According to current legislation, the owner of an installation must fulfil certain obligations with a view to protecting
personnel. These are:
● Ensuring proper instruction of personnel
● Ensuring that the operating instructions are available for reference at the point of application of the equipment
21471644/220808
● Compliance with additional instructions including supervisory and reporting obligations, making allowance for
particular operational aspects, e.g. with respect to work organization, operational sequences, personnel employed
14
● Review of personnel to ensure that they are aware of the safety requirements and hazards involved in the work
and the associated operating instructions
● Ensuring that frequency inverters are operated only when in perfect operating condition and that all relevant safety
requirements have been allowed for.
● Immediate shut-down of the frequency inverter as soon as a defect or irregularity is established.
Commissioning the frequency inverter
Do this only
● if you have read the operating instructions – particularly the warnings ⇒ "Putting into operation in practice",
Page 62 and the owner has instructed you in all details.
● if these operating instructions are available for reference at the place where the frequency inverter is in operation.
● if you are qualified specialist personnel.
● if you are not under the influence of drugs, alcohol or medication that can adversely affect your ability to react,
● if the general accident prevention, operating and installation regulations (e.g. DIN-VDE 0100/0113/prEN50178)
have been observed.
1.5 Transportation and storage

Operating hazard for the installation in the case of inappropriate transportation or storage!
● Transportation and storage must be carried out appropriately in the original packaging.
● The frequency inverter must be stored in dry places protected against dust and moisture with only minor tem‐
perature fluctuations.
● Observe the climatic conditions according to EN 50178 and the symbols on the packing.
● The duration of storage without the unit being connected to the permissible rated voltage must not exceed the
period of one year.
1.6 Handling and installing

The frequency inverter must be used according to the documentation, regulations and standards. Ensure careful
handling and avoid mechanical overloading. Do not deform components during transport and handling and do not
change insulation distances. Do not touch any electronic components and contacts. The units contain electrostatic
sensitive components, which may get damaged easily by inappropriate handling. Damaged or destroyed compo‐
nents must nor be put into operation, since they may constitute a danger for your health and compliance with
applicable standards is not ensured.
1.7 Connection of the electrical equipment

Observe the relevant standards BGV A2 (VBG 4), VDE 0100 and other national regulations when working on the
frequency inverter. The instructions of the documentation for the electrical installation and the relevant regulations
must be complied with. The manufacturer of the industrial installation or machine is responsible for compliance with
and inspection of the limit values specified by the EMC product standard 61800-3 for variable-speed electrical drives.
The documentation contains information for installation in compliance with the EMC. The cables connected to the
frequency inverter must not be subjected to an insulation test at a high test voltage without using special circuits.
1.8 Operation
Before commissioning and starting intended operation all covers must be fitted and the terminals must be checked.
21471644/220808
Additional monitoring and safety equipment must be checked according to EN 60204 and the relevant safety regu‐
lations (e.g. Technical Equipment Act, accident prevention regulations etc.). Before starting work on the frequency
inverter, it must be de-energized without touching live contacts, since the capacitors may be charged. Observe the
instructions and labelling of the frequency inverter.
15
1.9 Maintenance
Unauthorized opening and inappropriate intervention may result in personal injury or material damage. Repair work
on the frequency inverter must only be performed by the manufacturer or by authorized personnel.
21471644/220808
16
2 Scope of delivery
2.1 General
Due to the modular hardware components frequency inverters can easily be integrated into the automation concept.
The scope of delivery described can be supplemented with optional components and adapted to customer-specific
requirements. The plug-in connection terminals ensure reliable functioning and efficient installation.
2.2 DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency inverters
A H B C D
X1
X10
X210A
X210B
X2
F E G 42392244_xml.eps
Fig. 1 Scope of delivery for DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency inverters
A Frequency inverter F Terminal strip X2 (Phoenix ZEC 1.5/...ST7.5)

B Terminal strip X1 (Phoenix ZEC 1.5/...ST7.5) Plug-in terminal for braking resistor and motor con‐
Plug-in terminals for the mains connection and DC nection
link G Control terminals X210A / X210B (Wieland
C Terminal strip X10 (Phoenix ZEC 1.5/3ST5.0) DST85 / RM3.5)
Plug-in terminals for the relay output Plug-in terminal to connect the control signals
D Standard fasteners for mounting on a wall panel H CD-ROM documentation
E Brief operating instructions
Immediately check the goods received for quality, quantity and type. Notice of obvious defects as e.g. external
damage to the packing or unit, must be given to the sender within seven days for assurance reasons.
21471644/220808
17
A H B C
X10
X210A
X210B
D E
42392344_xml.eps
Fig. 2 Scope of delivery for DIC4-014 to 040 frequency inverters
A Frequency inverter D Brief operating instructions

B Terminal strip X10 (Phoenix ZEC 1.5/3ST5.0) E Control terminals X210A / X210B (Wieland
Plug-in terminals for the relay output DST85 / RM3.5)
C Standard brackets with fastening screws (M4x20, Plug-in terminal to connect the control signals
M4x60) for wall-mounting H CD-ROM documentation
21471644/220808
18
A C B
X10
X210B
X210A
42392444_xml.eps
Fig. 3 Scope of delivery for DIC-4-045 to 110 frequency inverters
A Frequency inverter D Brief operating instructions

B Terminal strip X10 (Phoenix ZEC 1.5/3ST5.0) E Control terminals X210A / X210B (Wieland
Plug-in terminals for the relay output DST85 / RM3.5)
C Standard mounting frame for wall-mounting with Plug-in terminal to connect the control signals
screws for mounting the frame on the inverter
(M5x16 , M5x20 , M5x70)
21471644/220808
19
3 Technical data

The following data are related to the rated point of the frequency inverter. The nominal working point of the frequency
inverter is defined for a permissible mains voltage of 400 V and a modulation frequency of 2 kHz.
Size 1 2
Current code DIC-4-... 002 003 004 006 007 009
Motor-side output
Output current I A 2,4 3,2 3,8 5,8 7,3 9,0
Output voltage U V 3 x 0 ... Line voltage
Overload capability at - - 1.5 for 60s; 2.0 for 10s
2 kHz and 4 kHz (cycle 10 min.)
Protection - - Short-circuit/earth-fault-proof
Output frequency f Hz 0 ... 300 depending on the modulation frequency
Modulation frequency f kHz 2 ... 16
Output braking resistor
Min. braking resistance R Ω 462 300 220 148 110 92
Line-side input
Line current 1) 3ph/PE I A 2,4 2,8 2) 3,3 2) 5,8 6,4 2) 7,8 2)

Line voltage U V 3 x 380 to 480 + 10% / -15%
Line frequency f Hz 50 / 60 ±10%
Fuses 3ph/PE I A 6 10
Mechanical
Dimensions: HxWxD mm 190x60x180 250x60x180
⇒ "DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency
inverters", Page 25
Weight (approx.) m kg 1,3 1,7
Type of enclosure - - IP20 (EN60529)
Connecting terminals A mm2 0,2 ... 1,5
Ambient Conditions
Power loss P W 46 58 68 87 108 130
Coolant temperature Tn °C 0 ... 40 (3K3 DIN IEC 721-3-3)
Storage temperature TL °C -25 ... 55
Transport temperature TT °C -25 ... 70
Rel. humidity - % 15 ... 85, non-condensing

Tab. 2
Depending on the customer-specific requirements the modulation frequency may be increased, if the output current
is reduced. The standards and regulations must be observed for this working point.
Frequency inverter Modulation frequency

current code
2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz
002 2.4 A 2.4 A 2.4 A 2.0 A 1.6 A
003 3.2 A2) 3.2 A2) 3.2 A2) 2.7 A2) 2.2 A
004 3,8 2) 3.8 A2)3) 3.8 A2)3) 3.2 A2)3) 2.6 A3)
006 5.8 A 5.8 A 5.8 A 4.9 A 3.9 A
007 7.8 A2) 7.8 A2) 7.8 A2) 6.6 A2) 5.3 A
009 9.0 A2) 9.0 A2)3) 9.0 A2)3) 7.6 A2)3) 6.1 A3)
Tab. 3
21471644/220808
1) Mains current with a relative line impedance of 1% (see section 5)

2) Line reactor required for a duty factor > 60% CDF
20 3) Modulation frequency reduced in thermal limit range
Size 3 4
Current code DIC-4-... 014 017 025 032 040
Motor-side output
Output current I A 14 16,5 25 32 40
Overload capability at 2 kHz - - 1.5 for 60s; 2.0 for 10s 1.4 f. 60s
(cycle 10 min.) 1.6 f. 10s
Overload capability at 4 kHz - - 1.5 for 60s; 2.0 for 10s 1.4 f. 60s 1.3 f. 60s
(cycle 10 min.) 2.0 f. 10s 1.6 f. 10s
Min. braking resistance R Ω 58 48 32 24 24
Line-side input
Line current 1) 3ph/PE I A 14,2 14,5 2) 26 28,2 2) 35,6 2)

Fuses 3ph/PE I A 16 20 35 50
Mechanical
⇒ "DIC-4-014 to 040 frequency in‐
verters", Page 26
Connecting terminals A mm2 0,2 ... 6 0,2 ... 16
Ambient Conditions
Power loss P W 145 200 240 310 420

Tab. 4
Frequency inverter Modulation frequency

current code
2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz
014 14.0 A 14.0 A 14.0 A 11.8 A 9.5 A
017 16.5 A2) 16.5 A2) 16.5 A2) 13.9 A2) 11.2 A
025 25.0 A 25.0 A 25.0 A 21.0 A 17.0 A

032 32.0 A2) 32.0 A2) 32.0 A2) 26.9 A2) 21.8 A
040 40.0 A2) 38.3 A 2) 3) 35.0 A 2) 3) 29.4 A 2) 3) 23.8 A 2) 3)

Tab. 5
21471644/220808

2) Line reactor required for a duty factor > 60% CDF
3) Modulation frequency reduced in thermal limit range 21
Size 5 6
Current code DIC-4-... 045 060 075 090 110
Motor-side output
Output current I A 45 60 75 90 110
Overload capability at 2 kHz - - 1.5 for 60s; 2.0 for 10s
(cycle 10 min.)
Min. braking resistance R Ω 15 7,5
Line-side input
Line current 1) 3ph/PE I A 52 58 2) 72 86 2) 105 2)

Fuses 3ph/PE I A 63 80 100 125
Mechanical
⇒ "DIC-4-045 to 110 frequency in‐
verters", Page 27
Connecting terminals A mm2 1,5 ... 25 Max. 70 (threaded studs)
Ambient Conditions
Power loss P W 420 540 660 770 1060

Tab. 6
Frequency inverter current code Modulation frequency

2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
045 45.0 A 45.0 A 45.0 A
060 60.0 A2) 60.0 A2) 60.0 A2)
075 75.0 A 75.0 A 75.0 A
090 90.0 A2) 90.0 A2) 90.0 A2)
110 110.0 A2) 110.0 A2) 110.0 A2)
Tab. 7
21471644/220808

22 2) Line reactor required for a duty factor > 60% CDF
3.4 Operating diagrams
3.4.1 General
The technical data for the frequency inverter relates to the nominal working point that was selected for a wide range
of applications. It is possible to apply a functionally safe and economical dimensioning (derating) of the frequency
inverter via the following diagrams for specific applications.
3.4.2 Site altitude
100
85
60
40
20
2
1000 2000 3000 4000
42392544_xml.eps
Fig. 4 Derating; 5%/1000 m above 1000 m above sea level; hmax = 4000 m
1 Output current in %
2 Installation height in m above sea level
55
45
2
1000 2000 3000 4000
42392644_xml.eps
Fig. 5 Max. coolant temperature; 3.3 °C/1000 m above 1000 m above sea
level
21471644/220808
1 Coolant temperature in °C
2 Installation height in m above sea level
23
3.4.3 Coolant temperature
100
80
63
40
20
2
0 10 20 30 40 50 55
42392744_xml.eps
Fig. 6 Derating; 2.5%/K above 40 °C; Tmax = 55 °C
2 Coolant temperature in °C
3.4.4 Line voltage
100
83
63
40
20
2
0 400 420 440 460 480
42392844_xml.eps
Fig. 7 Derating; 0.22%/V above 400 V; Tmax = 480 V
2 Mains voltage in V
21471644/220808
24
4 Mechanical installation
4.1 General
Standard frequency inverters of the IP20 type of enclosure are designed for fitting in the switchgear cabinet. For
fitting the installation and safety regulations as well as the specification of the devices must be observed.
DANGER

The frequency inverters only comply with safety class IP20, if the covers and connecting terminals are inserted
properly. Only then operation is permitted.

● The combination of Dedrive Compact fitted on line filters as base does not satisfy vibration resistance require‐
ments to IEC 68-2-6 (max. 5g).
● For increased vibration resistance demands, Dedrive Compact units must be fitted next to the line filter on the
mounting panel.
For all sizes:
If a KP module is plugged to the frequency inverter, the depth dimension is increased.
KP500 operating unit: Depth + 19 mm
KP232 interface adapter: Depth + 25 mm
b c
b1 c1
x
a2
a1
a
x
<
X 100mm
42392944_xml.eps
Fig. 8 Dimensions size 1+2
Installation is done with the standard fasteners in a vertical position onto the installation plate.
The inverter is fitted on the line filter on the upper side by means of the mounting tab included in the line filter scope
21471644/220808
of supply. ⇒ "Mechanical data and dimensions of line filters", Page 222.
Installation is done by inserting the long side of the fastening sheet into the heat sink and fixing it to the installation
plate with screws.
25
Dimensions Mounting dimensions in mm
Frequency inverter a b c a1 a2 b1 c1
Size 1 DIC-4-002 ... 004 190 60 180 210 ... 230 255 30 130
Size 2 DIC-4-006 ... 009 250 60 180 270 ... 290 315 30 130
Tab. 8
CAUTION
Hot components due to insufficient cooling

Risk of burning in the case of contact or fire hazard
The units must be fitted with sufficient clearance, so that the cooling air can circulate without any hindrance.
Take care that the air is not polluted by dust, grease, aggressive gases etc.
b c
x
b1 c1
a
a2
a1
x
<
X 100mm
42393044_xml.eps
Installation is done with the standard fasteners onto the installation plate.
Installation is done by fixing the two angle brackets with the heat sink of the frequency inverter onto the installation
plate with screws. The frequency inverters of sizes 3 and 4 are supplied with angle brackets which are fixed on the
heat sink by means of four screws, each. The upper angle brackets are fixed with M4 x 20 screws, the lower angle
brackets with M4 x 60 screws. The dimensions and mounting dimensions are in millimeters and apply to the standard
unit without optional components.
21471644/220808
26
Size 3 DIC-4-014 ... 017 250 100 200 270 ... 290 315 12 133
Size 4 DIC-4-025 ... 040 250 125 200 270 ... 290 315 17,5 133
Tab. 9
CAUTION

b c
b1 c1
x
a1
a2
x a
<
X 100mm
42393144_xml.eps

21471644/220808
27
M4x20
M5x20
M4x20
M5x20
4 x M5x10
M4x70 M4x70
M5x70 M5x70
42393244_xml.eps
Fig. 11 Fastening size 5

21471644/220808
28
6 x M5x20
6 x M5x16
4 x M5x20
42393344_xml.eps
Fig. 12 Fastening size 6
Size 5 and 6 frequency inverters are supplied with a mounting frame, which is attached to the heat sink. It is fixed
at the top and bottom by means of cheese-head screws and by means of counter-sunk screws on the sides. M6
screws must be used for attaching size 5 units to the mounting plate, and M8 screws for size 6.

Size 5 DIC-4-045 ... 060 250 200 265 270 ... 290 315 20 165
Size 6 DIC-4-075 ... 110 400 275 265 430 ... 450 470 20 165
Tab. 10
CAUTION

21471644/220808
29
4.5 Fitting CM-xxx and EM-xxx hardware modules
4.5.1 General fitting instructions
CM communications modules and EM expansion modules are supplied pre-assembled in an enclosure. They are
fitted into slots B and C, ⇒ "Hardware modules", Page 49.
DANGER

The inverter must be disconnected from the power supply before any hardware is fitted. Modules must not be fitted
when the inverter is connected to a power supply as the inverter and/or the hardware modules will otherwise be
destroyed.
Wait at least 5 minutes after disconnecting from the line supply, before starting fitting.
The circuit board visible on the rear must not be touched, as parts may be damaged.
4.5.2 Instructions for fitting the EM expansion module
Remove the cover before fitting the expansion module into slot C.
4.5.3 Instructions for fitting the CM communication module
3
1
42393444_xml.eps
Fig. 13
A PE spring is also included to connect the PE conductor (screen).
Fitting the CM communication module
1. Remove the cover.

21471644/220808
2. The slot for the module sub-assembly is accessible.
3. First install the PE spring included in the delivery using the screw fitted in the unit.
The spring must be centred when fitted.
30
4. The unit can now be fitted and secured to the PE spring using the spring on the module.
5. Break out the pre-stamped opening in the cover for connector X310 and refit the cover.
21471644/220808
31
5 Electrical installation
5.1 General
The electrical installation must be carried out by qualified personnel according to the general and regional safety
and installation regulations. Safe operation of the frequency inverter is ensured provided that the documentation and
the specification of the unit are complied with during installation and putting into service. Under special application
conditions, further regulations and guidelines may also have to be considered.
DANGER

The mains, DC and motor terminals may carry dangerous voltages after the frequency inverter has been released
for operation.
– Work on the unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the link capacitors have
discharged.
The connecting cables must be protected externally in compliance with the maximum voltage and current values of
the fuses. The mains fuses and cable cross-sections must be designed for the rated working point of the frequency
inverter according to EN 60204-1 or DIN VDE 0298, part 4. According to UL/CSA the frequency inverter is suitable
for operation in a power supply network of max. 480 VAC, which supplies a symmetrical current of max. 5000 A root-
mean-square value, if it is protected with fuses of the RK5 class. Only use copper cables with a temperature range
of 60/75 °C.
DANGER

The frequency inverters must be connected to earth with a large surface area to ensure good conductivity. The
leakage current of frequency inverters may be > 3.5 mA, a fixed connection must be provided in accordance with
the EN 50178 standard. The protective earth conductor cross-section required for earthing the installation surface
must be at least 10 mm² or a second protective earth conductor must be connected in parallel to the first. The
cross-section in these applications must correspond to the recommended cable cross-section.
Conditions for connection

● According to the technical data, the frequency is suitable for connection to the public or industrial supply network.
If the transformer power of the supply network ≤ 500 kVA, the optional line reactor is only required for those
frequency inverters marked accordingly in the technical data. All other frequency inverters are suitable for con‐
nection without line reactor at a relative system fault level (relation between active-power input and system fault
level) ≥ 1%.
● The connection to the public supply network without further measures must be checked in accordance with the
provisions of the standard EN 61000-3-2. Frequency inverters ≤ DIC-4-017 with integrated mains filter and a
motor cable length of up to 10 m comply with the emission limit values according to the product standard EN
61800-3 without any further measures. Increased requirements due to the application of the frequency inverter
must be met using optional components. Line reactors and filters are optionally available for this product series.
● Operation in a non-earthed system (IT system) is allowed after the Y capacitors inside the unit have been dis‐
connected.
● Fault-free operation with a residual-current-operated circuit-breaker is ensured with a tripping current ≥ 30 mA if
the following items are considered:
● Use of residual-current-operated circuit-breakers sensitive to all types of currents (type B acc. to EN 50178)
e.g. Siemens 5SZ3...G00
● Residual-current-operated circuit-breakers protect frequency inverters with leakage-current reduced filter or
without line filter.
● The length of the screened cable is ≤ 10 m and no further capacitive components exist between the mains or
motor cables and PE.
● The Y capacitors inside the unit must be disconnected. Thus cable-bound emitted interference (EMB) is in‐
creased.
21471644/220808
32
5.2 EMC notes
The frequency inverters are designed with an interference immunity (EMI) for operation in industrial applications
according to the requirements and limit values of the product standard EN 61800-3. Electromagnetic interference
must be avoided by appropriate installation and compliance with the specific product information.
Measures
● The frequency inverter and the line reactor must be fitted on the ideally galvanized mounting panel on a large
surface.
● Take care for a good equipotential bonding within the system or installation. Installation parts such as switchgear
cabinets, control desks, machines frames etc. must be connected with PE conductors with a large surface area
to ensure good conductivity.
● Ensure that the frequency inverter, the line choke, external filters and other components are connected to each
other via short cables with one earthing point.
● When installing, excessive cable lengths and cables laid in free air must be avoided.
● Contactors, relays and magnet valves in the switchgear cabinet must be provided with suitable interference sup‐
pression components.
● Cable shields must be earthed or connected to the unit with a low resistance and a large surface area. Provide
a 360° earth connection using appropriate screen clamps.
● Unplaiting screens and making contacts by means of long single conductors (so-called pig tails) must be avoided.
Connections
A
B
C
D
42393544_xml.eps
Fig. 14
A Line connection: Provided the maximum permis‐ line filter is used. The screen of control cables must
sible voltage drop is considered, the mains supply be connected to earth on both sides with good
21471644/220808
line can be of any length, but it must be laid sepa‐ conductivity over a large area using screen clamps
rated from control, data and motor cables. We (360° earth connection).
recommend screened cables be fitted between the
line filter and the frequency inverter if an external
33
B DC link connection: For the DC link connection the (360° earth connection). The screen of analogue
frequency inverters must be connected via the signal cables must be connected to earth at one
same line potential or to a common DC source. end with the inverter.
C Control connection: Ensure that EMC require‐ D Motor and braking resistor: The shielded motor ca‐
ments are considered, particularly when laying ble is to be connected to the motor with a metallic
control and signal cables. The control and signal PG screw fitting and to the frequency inverter with
cables must be laid separately from the power ca‐ a suitable and highly conductive clip (360° earth
bles. The screen of control and signal cables must connection) with earth potential. The signal cable
be connected to earth on both sides with good for monitoring the motor temperature must be laid
conductivity over a large area using screen clamps separately from the motor cable.
The frequency inverters comply with the requirements of Low Voltage Guideline. 73/23/EEC and the requirements
of EMC Guideline 89/336/EEC. EMC product standard EN 61800-3 relates to the drive unit system. The docu‐
mentation includes information how to satisfy the standards to be applied, if the frequency inverter is a components
of the drive system. The declaration of conformity must be supplied by the company installing the drive system.
5.3 Block diagram
X10
S3OUT
A 1
2 X1 L1 L2 L3 + -
3
X210A
1 +24V / 180mA
2 GND 24V
S1IND
B 3
S2IND + -
C 4
S3IND
5 U, I
S4IND
6
S5IND CPU
7
X210B
S6IND
1
2 GND 24V
S1OUT
D 3
MFO1
E 4
5 +10V / 4mA
I
MFI1 A
F 6
D
7 GND 10V X2 U V W Rb1 Rb2
42393644_xml.eps
Fig. 15
A Relay connection S3OUT

Change-over contact: Response time approx. 40 ms
Normally open: 240 V AC / 5 A (ohmic and inductive); ; 24 V DC / 5 A (ohmic load)
21471644/220808
Normally closed: 240 V AC / 3 A (ohmic and inductive); ; 24 V DC / 1 A (ohmic load)

Tab. 11
34
CAUTION
Incorrect load for DC

The component may get damaged.
For DC, the relay contact must not be subjected to inductive load.
Operation of a 24 V DC coupling relay is not permitted.
B Digital input S1IND

Digital signal, controller enable, response time approx.16 ms (On), 10 µs (Off)
Umax = 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, PLC compatible
C Digital input S2IND ... S6IND

Digital signal, response time approx.16 ms, Umax= 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, PLC compatible
Frequency signal, 0 ... 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, fmax = 150 kHz
D Digital output S1OUT

PLC-compatible, overload proof and short-circuit proof
Digital signal, 24 V, Imax=40 mA
E Multi-function output MFO1

Digital signal: 24 V, Imax =40 mA, PLC-compatible, overload proof and short-circuit proof
Analog signal: 24 V, Imax =40 mA, pulse width modulated, fPWM=116 Hz
Frequency signal: 0 ... 24 V, Imax = 40 mA, fmax = 150 kHz
F Multi-function input MFI1

Analog signal, resolution 12 Bit, 0 ... 10 V (Ri = 70 kΩ), 0 ... 20 mA (Ri = 500 Ω)
Digital signal, response time approx.16 ms, Umax= 30 V, 0.4 mA at 24 V, PLC compatible
Tab. 12
5.4 Line connection
5.4.1 General
The mains fuses and cable cross-sections must be designed for the rated working point of the frequency inverter
according to EN 60204-1 or DIN VDE 0298, part 4. According to UL/CSA approved copper cables of class 1 with a
temperature range of 60/75°C must be used for the cable lengths and the corresponding mains fuses. The electrical
installation must be carried out according to the specification of the unit and to the standards and regulations to be
applied.
DANGER

Control, power supply and motor cables must be laid separately. The cables connected to the frequency inverter
must not be subjected to an insulation test at a high test voltage without using special circuits.
CAUTION
Impermissible inching
Damage/malfunction of the frequency inverter
21471644/220808
Frequency inverters may only be connected to the line supply every 60 seconds.
This means that inching of line contactors is not permitted.
35
5.4.2 DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency inverters
X1 3
X1 + - L1 L2 L3 X1 + - L1 L1 L2 L3
1
2
L1 L2 L3 PE
L1 L2 L3 PE
42393744_xml.eps
Fig. 16 DIC-4-002 to 009 line connection
1 DIC-4-002 to 004; 3ph / 400 V AC 3c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 0.25 ...
2 DIC-4-006 to 009; 3ph / 400 V AC 1.5 mm2; AWG 22 ... 16
3 Phoenix ZEC 1.5 / ... ST 7.5 3d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 1.5
mm2; AWG 22 ... 16
3a Cable rigid; 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2; AWG 24 ... 16
3b Cable flexible; 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2; AWG 24 ... 16
Frequency inverters are connected to the mains power supply via terminal strip X1: Type of enclosure IP20
(EN60529) is only ensured, when terminal X1 is plugged in.
DANGER

The polarized plug-in terminal X1 must be connected and disconnected without power being applied. The mains
and DC terminals may carry dangerous voltages after the frequency inverter has been disconnected safely. Work
on the unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the link capacitors have discharged.
21471644/220808
36
5.4.3 DIC4-014 to 040 frequency inverters
X1
1
L1 L2 L3 - +
L1 L2 L3 PE
2 3
a a
b b
c c
d d
42393844_xml.eps
Fig. 17 DIC4-014 to 040 line connection
1 DIC-4-014 to 040; 3ph / 400 V AC 3 DIC-4-025 to 040; WAGO series 745 / 16 mm2 /
2 DIC-4-014 to 017; WAGO series 745 / 6 mm2 / RM10+15
RM7.5 3a Cable rigid; 0.2 ... 16 mm2; AWG 24 ... 6
2a Cable rigid; 0.2 ... 6 mm ; AWG 24 ... 10
2
3b Cable flexible; 0.2 ... 16 mm2; AWG 24 ... 6
2b Cable flexible; 0.2 ... 6 mm2; AWG 24 ... 10 3c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 0.25 ...
2c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 10 mm2; AWG 22 ... 8
4 mm2; AWG 22 ... 12 3d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 10
2d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 4 mm2; AWG 22 ... 8
mm2; AWG 22 ... 16
DANGER

Connecting terminal X1 must be connected and disconnected without power being applied. The mains and DC
terminals may carry dangerous voltages after the frequency inverter has been disconnected safely. Work on the
unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the link capacitors have discharged.
21471644/220808
37
X1
1 a
L1 L2 L3 - +
b
c
2,5 Nm
L1 L2 L3 PE 22 lb-in
d
42393944_xml.eps
Fig. 18 DIC 4-045 to 060 line connection
1 DIC-4-045 to 060; 3ph / 400 V AC 2c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 1.0 ...
2 Phoenix MKDSP 25 / 6-15.00-F 25 mm2; AWG 18 ... 4
2a Cable rigid; 0.5 ... 35 mm2; AWG 20 ... 2 2d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 1.5 ... 25
mm2; AWG 16 ... 4
DANGER

Connecting terminal X1 must be connected and disconnected without power being applied. The mains and DC
terminals may carry dangerous voltages after the frequency inverter has been disconnected safely. Work on the
unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the link capacitors have discharged.
21471644/220808
38
X1
X1 L1 L2 L3 - +
L1 L2 L3 PE
10 Nm
89 lb-in
42394044_xml.eps
Fig. 19 DIC 4-075 to 110 line connection
1 DIC-4-075 to 110; 3ph / 400 V AC
Line connection: stud bolt M8 x 25; conductor cross section up to 70 mm2
DANGER

The X1 connection studs may only be connected when not live and after being disconnected. The connection studs
and the DC terminals can still have dangerous voltages even after the frequency inverter has been properly dis‐
connected. Work on the unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the link capacitors have
discharged.
5.5 Motor connection
5.5.1 General
The motor and the braking resistor (Rb) must be connected to terminal X2 of the frequency inverter via screened
cables which must be connected to the PE potential on both ends with a good conductivity. Control, power supply
and motor cables must be laid separately. Depending on the application, the motor cable length and modulation
frequency, the limit values of national and international regulations must be complied with.
Frequency inverters ≤ DIC-4-017 with integrated EMC filter comply with the emission limit values of the product
standard EN 61800-3, for a motor cable length of up to 10 m. Optional filters can be used to meet any customer-
21471644/220808
specific requirements.
Owing to the design, frequency inverters produce voltage peaks and switching edges which load the motor insulation
and bearings to a higher extent. Due to the edge steepness and the inverter output voltage level as well as due to
39
the electrical properties of the motor supply cable, voltage rises of almost two times the inverter link voltage may be
applied to the motor. The insulation of the motor winding must be designed appropriately.
Even if a du/dt filter is used, the operation of motors wihout phase insulation cannot be ensured definitively, since
the electric strength is not sufficient in many cases. However, the filter reduces the load on the motor. The use of
du/dt filters can also make it possible to achieve greater cable lengths between motors and frequency inverters.
Motor cable lengths without output filter

Frequency inverter Unscreened cables Screened cables
DIC-4-002 to 007 50 m 25 m
DIC-4-009 to 040 100 m 50 m
DIC-4-045 to 110 150 m 100 m
Tab. 13
Motor cable lengths with du/dt filter

Frequency inverter Unscreened cables Screened cables
DIC-4-002 to 007 75 m 50 m
DIC-4-009 to 040 150 m 100 m
DIC-4-045 to 110 300 m 150 m
Tab. 14
Parameter identification may not be carried out when the du/dt filter is connected.
21471644/220808
40
X2
X2 Rb1 Rb2 U V W
M
3~
42394144_xml.eps
Fig. 20 DIC-4-002 to 009 motor connection
1 Phoenix ZEC 1.5 / ... ST7.5 1c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 0.25 ...
1a Cable rigid; 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2; AWG 24 ... 16 1.5 mm2; AWG 22 ... 16
1b Cable flexible; 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2; AWG 24 ... 16 1d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 1.5
mm2; AWG 22 ... 16
DANGER

The polarized plug-in terminal X2 must be connected and disconnected without power being applied. The motor
terminals and the terminals of the braking resistor may carry dangerous voltages after the frequency inverter has
been released for operation. Work on the unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the
link capacitors have discharged.
The motor and the braking resistor are connected to the frequency inverter via plug-in terminal X2. Type of enclosure
IP20 (EN60529) is only ensured, when terminal X2 is plugged in.
21471644/220808
41
X2 Rb1 Rb2 U V W
X2
M
3~
1 2
a a
b b
c c
d d
42394244_xml.eps
1 DIC-4-014 to 017; WAGO series 745 / 6mm2 / 2 DIC-4-025 to 040; WAGO series 745 / 16mm2 /
RM7.5 RM10+15
1a Cable rigid; 0.2 ... 6 mm2; AWG 24 ... 10 2a Cable rigid; 0.2 ... 16 mm2; AWG 24 ... 6
1b Cable flexible; 0.2 ... 6 mm ; AWG 24 ... 10
2
1c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 2c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 0.25 ...
4 mm2; AWG 22 ... 12 10 mm2; AWG 22 ... 8
1d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 4 2d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 10
mm2; AWG 22 ... 16 mm2; AWG 22 ... 8
DANGER

Connecting terminal X2 must be connected and disconnected without power being applied. The motor terminals
and the terminals of the braking resistor may carry dangerous voltages after the frequency inverter has been
released for operation. Work on the unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the link
capacitors have discharged.
21471644/220808
42
X2
X2 U V W Rb1 Rb2
a
M
3~
b
2,5 Nm
c 22 lb-in
d
42394344_xml.eps
1 DIC-4-045 to 060; WAGO series 745 / 6mm2 / 1c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 1.0 ...
RM7.5 25 mm2; AWG 18 ... 4
1a Cable rigid; 0.5 ... 35 mm2; AWG 20 ... 2 1d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 1.5 ... 25
1b Cable flexible; 0.5 ... 25 mm ; AWG 20 ... 4
2 mm2; AWG 16 ... 4
DANGER

Connecting terminal X2 must be connected and disconnected without power being applied. The motor terminals
and the terminals of the braking resistor may carry dangerous voltages after the frequency inverter has been
released for operation. Work on the unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the link
capacitors have discharged.
21471644/220808
43
X2
X2 U V W Rb1 Rb2
M
3~
10 Nm
89 lb-in
42394444_xml.eps
Line connection: stud bolt M8 x 25; conductor cross section up to 70 mm2
DANGER

X2 connection studs may only be connected when not live and after being disconnected. The motor terminals and
the terminals of the braking resistor may carry dangerous voltages after the frequency inverter has been released
for operation. Work on the unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have elapsed until the link capacitors
have discharged.
21471644/220808
44
5.6 Control terminals
5.6.1 General
d
0.2 ... 0.3 Nm
1.8 ... 2.7 ib-in
42394544_xml.eps
Fig. 24 Control terminals
1 Wieland DST85 / RM3.5 1c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 0.25 ...
1a Cable rigid; 0.14 ... 1.5 mm2; AWG 30 ... 16 1.0 mm2; AWG 22 ... 18
1b Cable flexible; 0.14 ... 1.5 mm2; AWG 30 ... 16 1d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 0.25 ...
0.75 mm2; AWG 22 ... 20
The control and software functions can be freely configured to ensure safe and efficient operation. These operating
instructions describe the factory setting of the standard connections in the corresponding Configuration 30 and
the software parameters for setting.
CAUTION
Incorrect connection/disconnection of the control terminals

Damage/malfunction of the frequency inverter
The control inputs and outputs, which cannot be connected up with an incorrect polarity, may only be connected
when not live and after being disconnected.
Control terminal X210A

Ter. Description
1 Voltage output 24 V, Imax = 180 mA 4)
2 Ground / GND
3 Digital input S1IND, Umax = 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, PLC compatible, response time approx. 16 ms (on), 10 μs (off)
4 Digital input S2IND, Umax = 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, PLC compatible, response time approx. 16 ms
6 Digital input S4IND, Umax = 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, PLC compatible, frequency signal, 0 ... 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, fmax = 150 kHz
7 Digital input S5IND, Umax = 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, PLC compatible, frequency signal, 0 ... 30 V, 10 mA at 24 V, fmax = 150 kHz
Tab. 15
Control terminal X210B

Ter. Description
2 Ground / GND 24 V
21471644/220808
3 Digital output S1OUT, U = 24 V, Imax = 40 mA, overload and short-circuit-proof
4) The power supply on terminal X210A.1 can be loaded with a max. current of I
max = 180 mA. Depending on the application, the max. available
current is reduced by digital output S1OUT and multi-function output MFO1. 45
Ter. Description
4 Multi-function output MFO1,
digital signal: 24 V, Imax =40 mA, PLC-compatible, overload proof and short-circuit proof,
Analog signal: 24 V, Imax =40 mA, pulse width modulated, fPWM=116 Hz
Frequency signal: 0 ... 24 V, Imax = 40 mA, fmax = 150 kHz
5 Reference output 10 V, Imax = 4 mA
6 Multi-function input MFI1,

Analog signal, resolution 12 Bit, 0 ... +10 V (Ri = 70 kΩ), 0 ... 20 mA (Ri = 500 Ω),
Digital signal, response time approx. 16 ms, Umax = 30 V, 0.4 mA at 24 V, PLC compatible
7 Ground / GND
Tab. 16
5.6.2 Relay output S3OUT
1
X10
a
X10
1 b
2 S3OUT
3 c
42394644_xml.eps
Fig. 25 Relay output S3OUT
1 Phoenix ZEC 1.5/3ST5.0 1c with wire end ferrule without plastic sleeve; 0.25 ...
1a Cable rigid; 0.2 ... 1.5 mm ; AWG 24 ... 16
2 1.5 mm2; AWG 22 ... 16
1b Cable flexible; 0.2 ... 1.5 mm2; AWG 24 ... 16 1d with wire end ferrule with plastic sleeve; 0.25 ... 1.5
mm2; AWG 22 ... 16
The freely programmable relay output is linked ex works with the brake release function.
Control terminal X10

Ter. Description
1 ... 3 Relay output, floating changeover contact, response time approx. 40ms,max. contact load
- Normally open: 240 V AC / 5A (ohmic and inductive); ; 24 V DC / 5A (ohmic)
- Normally closed: 240 V AC / 3A (ohmic and inductive); ; 24 V DC / 1A (ohmic)
Tab. 17
CAUTION
Incorrect load of the relay contact

Damage/malfunction
For DC, the relay contact must not be subjected to inductive load. Operation of a 24 V DC coupling relay is not
permitted.
5.6.3 Control terminals – connection diagram

21471644/220808
The control hardware and software of the frequency inverters can be configured almost freely, this means that certain
functions can be allocated to the control connections.
46
The modular concept therefore makes it possible to adapt the frequency inverter to a wide variety of drive applica‐
tions.
The requirements to the control hardware and software are known for established drive applications. Thus certain
functions can be allocated to control connections and the internal interconnection of the software modules can be
configured. These allocations can be selected by means of the Configuration 30 (CONF) parameter.
5.6.4 Configurations 1xx and 4xx - without encoder
X210A
1 +24V / 180mA
2 GND 24V
3 S1IND
4 S2IND
5 S3IND
6 S4IND
7 S5IND
X210B
1 S6IND
2 GND 24V
- +
- 3 S1OUT
+ 4 MFO1
5 +10V / 4mA
+
6 MFI1
- 7 GND 10V
42394744_xml.eps
Fig. 26

X210A.1 Supply voltage
X210A.2 GND
X210A.3 Controller release / acknowledge fault
X210A.4 programmable, SW-step 1+
X210A.5 programmable, SW-step 1-
X210A.6 freely programmable
X210A.7 freely programmable
Tab. 18

X210B.1 programmable, (SOST) step 2 / (SOSP) accelerate
X210B.2 GND
X210B.3 programmable, (digital) “Ready” message
X210B.4 programmable, Error (digital message)
X210B.5 Supply, reference value potentiometer
X210B.6 programmable, analog setpoint voltage value
X210B.7 GND
Tab. 19
21471644/220808
47
5.6.5 Configurations 2xx - with encoder
X210A
1 +24V / 180mA
2 GND 24V
3 S1IND
4 S2IND
+ - 5 S3IND
B
6 S4IND
A
7 S5IND
X210B
1 S6IND
2 GND 24V
- + 3 S1OUT
- + 4 MFO1
5 +10V / 4mA
+
6 MFI1
- 7 GND 10V
42394844_xml.eps
Fig. 27

X210A.1 Supply voltage
X210A.2 GND
X210A.3 Controller release / acknowledge fault
X210A.4 programmable, SW-step 1+
X210A.5 programmable, SW-step 1-
X210A.6 Rotary encoder channel B 5)
X210A.7 Rotary encoder channel A 5)
Tab. 20

X210B.1 programmable, (SOST) step 2 / (SOSP) accelerate
X210B.2 GND
X210B.3 programmable, (digital) “Ready” message
X210B.4 programmable, Error (digital message)
X210B.5 Supply, reference value potentiometer
X210B.6 programmable, analog setpoint voltage value
X210B.7 GND
Tab. 21
For further information on the connection of the different rotary encoders to the basic unit as well as to the optional
EM-ENC-02 expansion module please refer to ⇒ "Selection of the pulse generator and interface electronics",
Page 234.
21471644/220808
48 5) The signal level must be 24V.

5.7 Hardware modules
5.7.1 General
Due to the modular hardware components frequency inverters can easily be integrated into the automation concept.
Optional hardware modules are detected during initialisation and the control functions are adapted automatically.
For the necessary information on the installation and operation of the optional extensions, please refer to the asso‐
ciated documentation.
⇒ "Fitting CM-xxx and EM-xxx hardware modules", Page 30
Hardware modules
42394944_xml.eps
Fig. 28
A KP500 operating unit

KP232 Interface adapter
Connection of the optional KP500 operating unit or a KP232 interface adapter.
B CM communication module
Socket for interfacing to different communication protocols:
CM-232: RS232 interface
CM-485: RS485 interface
CM-PDP: Profibus DP interface
CM-CAN: CANopen interface
C EM expansion module
Socket for customer-specific adaptation of the control inputs and outputs to different applications:
EM-SYS: System bus
21471644/220808
EM-ENC-02: Extended rotary encoder evaluation (RS 422), PTC thermistor evaluation, system bus
EM-I/O-02: additional analog and digital inputs or outputs, PTC thermistor evaluation, system bus
Tab. 22
49
DANGER

Only carry out installation and dismantling work on the hardware modules of sockets B and C once the frequency
inverter concerned has been disconnected. Work on the unit may only be carried out after a few minutes have
elapsed until the link capacitors have discharged.

● If two optional components with CAN protocol controller (e.g. CM-CAN and EM-ENC-02) are installed, the sys‐
tem bus interface in the EM expansion module is deactivated.
21471644/220808
50
6 KP500 control unit
6.1 Key assignment and displays
B C
D E
F H
G
I
42395044_xml.eps
Fig. 29 Key assignment and displays
Parameters can be set and displayed and the frequency inverter can be controlled by means of the optional KP500
operating unit. The operating unit is not absolutely necessary for the operation of the frequency inverter and can be
plugged in during operation, if required.
Keys
A RUN Start the drive and change into the CTRL menu. Pressing the RUN key branches into the motor potentiometer
function.
STOP Change into the CTRL menu and stop the drive. Acknowledge fault.
J ▲▼ Navigate in the menu structure and select parameters. Increase and decrease parameter values.
ENT Call parameters or change within the menu structure. Acknowledge the selected function or parameter.
ESC Exit parameters or return within the menu structure. Abort the function or reset the parameter value.
FUN Change key functions and access special functions.
Tab. 23
Display
B Three-digit 7-segment display of the parameter number, if a password has been allocated cod is displayed ⇒ "Set password",
Page 72
C One-digit 7-segment display of the active data set, direction of rotation etc.
D Display of the selected menu branch:
VAL Display actual values
PARA Select parameters and edit parameter values
CTRL Select functions which can be used via the operating unit:
SEtUP: guided setup
CtrL: Motor potentiometer and jog function
CPY Parameter copy function via the operating unit:
ALL All parameter values are copied
FOr Memory in the operating unit is formatted or deleted
E Status and operational messages:
WARN Warning against critical operating behaviour
FAULT Fault switching-off, with the associated message
RUN Flashing: indicates readiness for operation
Lighting continuously: indicates operation and release of the output stage.
REM Active remote control via interface connection
21471644/220808
F Change of functions by means of FUN key

F Five-digit 7-segment display of the parameter value and sign
G Physical unit of the parameter value displayed
51
Display
H Active acceleration or deceleration ramp
I Current direction of rotation of the drive
Tab. 24
6.2 Menu structure
42395144_xml.eps
Fig. 30
The menu structure is arranged on the operating unit according to the graphical overview. The PC user interface
divides the functions and parameters into different levels. Complete information is stored in the software and allows
the flexible use of the options for parameter setting and controlling the frequency inverter.
21471644/220808
52
6.3 Main menu
42395244_xml.eps
Fig. 31
Menu Functions
branch
VAL Display of actual values
PARA Display and change parameters
CPY Parameter copy function
CTRL Selection of control and test functions
Tab. 25
The different parameters and information on the frequency inverter can be displayed by means of the operating unit.
In the menu structure the different functions and parameters are grouped in four menu branches depending on the
subject. Within the menu structure you can change into the main menu by pressing the ESC key for a longer time
or several times.
You select the desired menu branch by means of the arrow keys. The selected menu branch flashes in the display.
By pressing the ENT key you select the menu branch. The display changes to the first parameter or to the first
function in the selected menu branch. Pressing the ESC key returns to the main menu of the operating unit.
Keys
▲+▼ Navigate in the menu structure and select a menu branch.
ENT Transfer into the selected menu branch
ESC Exit the menu branch and return to the main menu.
Tab. 26
21471644/220808
53
6.4 Actual value menu (VAL)
ESC
ENT
A ENT
ESC
D
B C
42395344_xml.eps
Fig. 32 Actual value menu (VAL)
In the menu branch VAL, the operating unit shows many actual values depending on the configuration selected and
on the options installed. The operating instructions show the parameters and basic functions of the software which
are linked to the corresponding actual value.
A You select the desired number from the actual values displayed in numerical order by means of the arrow keys. If data sets of actual
value parameters can be changed, the current data set is displayed with the associated data set number. The 7-segment display
shows data resetcord 0, if the actual values of the four data sets are equal.
Keys
▲+▼ Change to the actual value parameter when switching on
FUN , ▲ Display last actual value parameter (highest number)
FUN , ▼ Display first actual value parameter (smallest number)
B By pressing the ENT key you select the actual value which is displayed with the current parameter value, unit and active data set.
C During putting into service and operation and fault analysis, it is possible to monitor each actual value parameter in detail. The actual
value parameters are partially arranged in the four available data sets. If the parameter values in the four data sets are identical, the
actual value is displayed in data set 0. Different actual values in the four data sets are displayed in data set 0 by the display dIFF.
Keys
▲,▼ Change of data set when actual values can be changed
FUN , ▲ Maximum actual value is continuously determined and displayed
FUN , ▼ Minimum actual value is continuously determined and displayed
FUN , ENT Mean value of the actual value during the monitoring period
D By pressing the ENT key, the selected actual value is stored as parameter when switching on. The SEt message with the parameter
number appears for a short time. When switching on the frequency inverter, this actual value will automatically be displayed.
E You can once again monitor and display the value once the parameters have been saved. By pressing the ESC key you can change
into the parameter selection of the menu branch VAL.
Tab. 27
21471644/220808
54
6.5 Parameter menu (PARA)
ESC
ENT
A ENT
ESC
D
B C
42395444_xml.eps
Fig. 33 Parameter menu (PARA)
The parameters interrogated during guided set-up have been selected from existing applications and should be
amended on demand by further settings in the menu branch PARA.
If cod is displayed instead of the parameter number, this indicates that a password has been set in the Dedrive
Compact ⇒ "Set password", Page 72.
A You select the desired number from the parameters displayed in numerical order by means of the arrow keys. If data sets of parameters
can be changed, the current data set is displayed with the associated data set number. The 7-segment display shows data set 0, if
the parameter values of the four data sets are equal.
Keys
▲+▼ Change to the parameter changed at last
FUN , ▲ Display last parameter (highest number)
FUN , ▼ Display first parameter (smallest number)
B By pressing the ENT key you select the parameter which is displayed with the current parameter value, unit and active data set.
Settings in data set 0 change the parameter values in the four data sets.
C The parameter value can be adapted using the arrow keys. Depending on the parameter, the value must be changed or an operation
mode be selected. Pressing the arrow keys for a longer period of time increases the changed value. After an interruption the speed
of change is reduced to one tenth of the difference in value reached before. When the parameter value starts flashing, the increment
has been reset to the original value.
Keys
▲ +▼ The parameter is set to the factory setting.
FUN , ▲ The parameter is set to the highest value.
FUN , ▼ The parameter is set to the smallest value.
FUN , ENT Change of data set when parameters can be changed
D By pressing the ENT key, the selected actual value is stored as parameter when switching on. The SEt message with the parameter
number appears for a short time. When switching on the frequency inverter, this actual value will automatically be displayed.
Messages
Err1: EEPrO Parameter could not be stored
Err2: STOP Parameter can only be read during operation
Err3: Error Other error
E Once the parameter has been saved, you can change the value again if you wish, or else you should press the ESC key to switch to
parameter selection.
21471644/220808
Tab. 28
55
6.6 Copy menu (CPY)
6.6.1 General
The copy function of the operating unit makes it possible to copy parameter values from the frequency inverter to a
non-volatile memory (upload) in the operating unit and to download the values to a frequency inverter.
The copy function facilitates the setting of parameters for repeating applications. The function files all parameters
independent of the access control and the value range. The storage capacity available for four files in the operating
unit is scaled dynamically according to the scope of data.
● This function is only available in control level 3.

● Downloading is not possible with set hardware enable (FUF).
6.6.2 Reading the memory infomation
When the menu branch CPY is called, information on the data stored in
the operating unit must be read out. This process will take some seconds.
During this period init and a progress display are displayed. After initiali‐
sation, the function can be selected in the copy menu.
42395544_xml.eps
Fig. 34
When the memory information stored in the operating unit is not valid,
initialisation is aborted with an error message. In this case, the memory
in the operating unit must be formatted. Please carry out the following
steps:
42395649_xml.eps
Fig. 35
Confirm the error message by pressing the ENT key.
Select the FOr memory formatting function and confirm the selection by
means of the ENT key.
During formatting the display shows FCOPY and a progress display.
42395744_xml.eps
Fig. 36
After a few seconds the process is finished. The display shows rdY.
Confirm the display by pressing the ENT key.
42395844_xml.eps
Fig. 37
Now you can continue to select the copy function.
42395944_xml.eps
21471644/220808
Fig. 38
56
6.6.3 Menu structure
The copy menu CPY is divided into two basic partial functions. You can select between the storage function and
deleting the stored data by means of the arrow keys. For this process the source and the destination must be
selected. The three-digit 7-segment display informs on the free storage capacity in the non-volatile memory of the
operating unit.
FOr Function
The FOr function can be used for formatting and deleting the memory in
the operating unit. This may be necessary when using the operating unit
for the first time.
42396044_xml.eps
Fig. 39
ALL function
All parameter values which can be written or read are transferred. For a
normal copy operation confirm this selection by means of the ENT key
and continue by selecting the source.
42396144_xml.eps
Fig. 40
Act function
Only the parameters of the current configuration are transferred.
6.6.4 Selecting the source
The parameters for partial function ALL in menu branch CPY can be set specifically for the application. You select
the source of data for the copy operation (upload) from the sources being available by means of the arrow keys. The
7-segment display shows the free storage capacity in the operating unit.
The data sets in the inverter are marked with a number between 0 and 4. Her the 0 stands for all data sets and 1 to
4 for the individual data set. The memory locations in the operating unit are designated with F1 to F4.
Display Description
Src. 0 The data of the four data sets are copied from the frequency inverter.
Src. 1 The data from data set 1 are copied.
Src. E An empty data set for deleting a file in the operating unit
Src. F1 File 1 is transferred from the memory
Tab. 29
Example 1:
All data sets from the frequency inverter are to be stored in file 1 of the operating unit:
Thus the source is SRc 0 and the destination is dSt F1.
21471644/220808
Example 2:
The content of file 1 of the operating unit is to be reloaded to all data sets of the inverter.
Thus the source is SRc F1 and the destination is dSt 0.
57
6.6.5 Selecting the destination
The parameters of the destination for the copy operation can also be set specifically for the application. The data
source is transferred to the destination selected (download). The destinations being available correspond to the logic
allocation of the data source selected.
Display Description
dSt. 0 The four data sets of the frequency inverter are overwritten.
dSt. 1 The data are copied into data set 1.
dSt. F1 The data are transferred into file 1.
Tab. 30
6.6.6 Copy operation
WARNING
Parameter values outside the value range

The value range and parameter setting may be different depending on the power range of the frequency inverter.
The transfer of parameter values outside the value range results in an error message.
Before transferring the parameter setting to the frequency inverter, the individual parameter values must be
checked.
A copy operation should only be carried out between frequency inverters with the same "current code".
e.g. 014 for DIC-4-014-E-0000-00
During the copy operation the display shows COPY and the number of
the parameter currently being copied as progress display. Parameters will
also be copied which have no importance for the configuration selected.
42396244_xml.eps
Fig. 41
After approx. 100 seconds the copy operation is completed and the dis‐
play shows rdY.
By pressing the ENT key the display changes into the copy menu and by
pressing the ESC key to the selection of the destination.
42396344_xml.eps
Fig. 42
If the ESC key is pressed during the copy operation, the copy operation
is aborted and the data are transferred incompletely. The display shows
Abr and the number of the last parameter which has been copied.
21471644/220808
By pressing the ENT key you return to the selection in the copy menu and
by pressing the ESC key to the selection of the destination.
42396444_xml.eps
After the copy operation from the operating unit to the Dedrive Compact,
Fig. 43
58 a reset is carried out automatically.
6.6.7 Error messages
The copy function files all parameters independent of the access control
and the value range. Some of the parameters can only be written, if the
frequency inverter is out of operation. The controller enable (S1IND) must
not be activated during the copy operation, otherwise data transmission
will be aborted. The display shows FUF and the number of the last pa‐
rameter which has been copied. If the control enable is de-activated, the
42396544_xml.eps
aborted copy operation is continued.
Fig. 44
Data transmission from the source selected to the destination is continu‐

ously monitored by the copy function. If an error occurs, the copy opera‐
tion is aborted and the Err message is displayed with an error code.
42396644_xml.eps
Fig. 45
Error messages
Code Meaning
0 1 Writing error in the memory of the operating unit;
repeat the copy operation or format the memory in the case of multiple errors.
2 Writing error in the memory of the operating unit;
repeat the copy operation or format the memory in the case of multiple errors.
3 The storage capacity of the operating unit has been determined incorrectly;
if this error occurs several times, the operating unit must be replaced.
4 Insufficient storage capacity, the data are incomplete;
delete the incomplete file and data no longer required from the operating unit.
5 Communication has been faulted or interrupted;
repeat the copy operation, delete the incomplete file, if required.
1 0 Invalid identifier of a file in the operating unit;
delete incorrect file and format memory, if required.
2 The storage location of the destination file selected is occupied;
delete file or use different destination file in the operating unit.
3 The source file to be read in the operating unit is empty;
only select files as source which contain useful data.
4 Incorrect file in the operating unit;
2 0 The memory of the operating unit is not formatted;
carry out the partial function for formatting in the copy menu.
3 0 Reading error of a parameter from the frequency inverter;
check connection and repeat reading operation.
1 Writing error of a parameter from the frequency inverter;
check connection and repeat reading operation.
2 Unknown type of parameter;
4 0 Communication has been faulted or interrupted;
repeat the copy operation, delete the incomplete file, if required.
Tab. 31
6.7 Control menu (CTRL)

The frequency inverter can be controlled by means of the operating unit. In the menu branch CTRL different functions
can be selected which facilitate putting into operation and controlling via the operating unit.
The control of the frequency inverter via an optional communication module must be set by means of the parameter
21471644/220808
Local/Remote 412. The parameter can be used for the selecting or limiting the control possibilities being available.
Depending on the operation mode selected, the control menu is only available to a limited extent.
59
Operating Functions
modes
0- Control via Contacts The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation are transmitted via digital
signals.
1- Control via Statemachine The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation are transmitted via the DRIV‐
ECOM state machine of the communication interface.
2- Control via Remote-Contacts The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation are transmitted via logic
signals through the communication protocol.
3- Ctrl. KP The start and stop command is given from the operating unit and the specification of the direction of rotation
, direction Contacts via digital signals.
4- Ctrl. KP+Cont., direction Cont. The start and stop command is given from the operating unit or via digital signals. The direction of rotation
is only specified via digital signals.
13 - Control via KP The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation given via the operating unit.
, Direction KP
14 - Control KP+Cont., Direction KP The start and stop command is given from the operating unit or via digital signals. The direction of rotation
is only specified via the operating unit.
20 - Control Contacts The start and stop command is transmitted via digital signals. The direction of rotation is fixed to clockwise
, Clockw. rotation.
23 - Control Keypad The start and stop command is given from the operating unit. The direction of rotation is fixed to clockwise
, Clockw. rotation.
24 - Control Cont. + KP The start and stop command is given from the operating unit or via digital signals. The direction of rotation
, Clockw. is fixed to clockwise rotation.
30 to 34 Operation mode 20 to 24, only anti-clockwise rotation
43 - Crtl. KP The start and stop command is given from the operating unit. The direction of rotation is specified via the
, Dir. Cont. + KP operating unit or via digital signals.
44 - Crtl. Cont. + KP The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation are given from the operating
, Dir. Cont. + KP (factory set‐ unit or via digital signals.
ting)
Tab. 32
DANGER
Non-compliance with operating regulations

There is danger to life and limb and of considerable material damage.
The control of the drive via the operating unit requires the release of the power module via digital input control
enable S1IND. Only qualified persons may work on the devices. Qualified persons are familiar with the installation,
assembly, putting into operation and operation and have the necessary qualification for their task. The documen‐
tation must be read carefully before and the safety instructions must be observed.
6.8 Controlling the motor via the operating unit

The operating unit enables control of the connected motor depending on the operation mode selected by means of
the parameter Local/Remote 412.
DANGER
Non-compliance with operating regulations

The control of the drive via the operating unit requires the release of the power module via digital input control
enable S1IND. Only qualified persons may work on the devices. Qualified persons are familiar with the installation,
assembly, putting into operation and operation and have the necessary qualification for their task. The documen‐
tation must be read carefully before and the safety instructions must be observed.
21471644/220808
60
The menu branch CTRL can be reached by navigating within the menu
structure. The CtrL function includes sub-functions that are displayed ac‐
cording to the operating point of the frequency inverter. Press the RUN
key to go from any point within the menu structure to motor potentiometer
function Pot, or internal reference value int.
42396744_xml.eps
Fig. 46
Motor potentiometer function Pot
Use the cursor keys to set the output frequency of the frequency inverter
from the minimum frequency 418 up to the maximum frequency
419. The acceleration corresponds to the factory setting (2 Hz/s) of the
parameter Ramp KP-MPot 473. The parameters Acceleration 420
42396844_xml.eps and Deceleration 421 are considered at lower values of acceleration.
Fig. 47
Internal reference value int
The drive is operating and the current actual value is displayed. Use the
cursor keys to go to motor potentiometer function Pot, which causes that
the current value for the frequency to be accepted.
42396944_xml.eps
Fig. 48
JOG frequency JOG
Press the FUN key to change from internal reference value int, or motor
potentiometer function Pot to the JOG frequency 489. The frequency
can be set by means of the arrow keys. When the FUN key is released,
the drive stops and the display changes to the original function Pot or
42397044_xml.eps int. The last frequency value is stored in the parameter JOG-Frequenz
Fig. 49 489.
Key functions
ENT Switch over the direction of rotation independent of the control signal on the terminals clockwise rotation S2IND or anti-clockwise rotation
S3IND.
ESC Exit function and return to the menu structure
FUN Pressing the key changes to the JOG frequency and starts the drive. Releasing the key changes to the subordinate function and stops
the drive.
RUN Start drive, alternative to the control signal SW-Step 1 + or SW-Step 1 –
STOP Stop drive, alternative to the control signal SW-Step 1 + or SW-Step 1 –
Tab. 33
DANGER
Possible change of the direction of rotation

Pressing the ENT key results in a change of the direction of rotation independent of the control signal SW-Step 1
+ or SW-Step 1–. If the minimum frequency 418 has been set to 0 Hz, a change in the sign of the frequency
reference value produces a change in the direction of rotation of the motor.
21471644/220808
61
7 Putting into operation in practice
7.1 General
DANGER
Unintended start-up of the drive

Hazard of death!
For programming Dedrive Compact parameters via a KP-500 control unit or the Parcom Compact parameter pro‐
gramming software, settings may be selected which cause unintended start-up of the drive.
This applies both for manual parameter programming and for loading of a parameter file.
These instructions also apply to programming parameters via the CAN bus or Profibus.
In order to avoid unintended start-up of the drive, controller enable on input S1IND MUST be de-activated while
programming parameters.
Controller enable on input S1IND must only be activated after the "FUF" message for the duration of parameter
identification by the motor.
Take further suitable measures to avoid unintended start-up of the drive or transmission of critical control com‐
mands between Dedrive Compact and the installation. These may be, for example, disconnecting the control
terminals (e.g. X210A, X210B, X10 ...) or switching of the supply voltage for the electrical brake.
Depending on the application, further additional safety devices must be provided in order to avoid any hazard for
persons and machinery.
The following sections describe how to proceed with the KP 500 operating unit.
When the unit is put into operation with Parcom Compact, the parameters must be called up and processed indi‐
vidually before the function "Read inverter information" is called up.
7.2 Switching on the power supply

Please note the safety instructions ⇒ "Safety instructions", Page 14 and ⇒ "General", Page 62!
Once the installation work has been completed, you should check all control and power connections again before
turning on the mains voltage. If all the electrical connections are correct, it is necessary to ensure that you switch
off the controller enable of the frequency inverter (control input S1IND open). After the mains is switched on, the
frequency inverter carries out a self-test and reports "Fault" during this short period.
The frequency inverter concludes the self-test after a few seconds.
When controller enable has been applied to control output S1IND, the frequency inverter activates the "Ready" digital
signal (to digital output S1OUT by default).
When being supplied and factory-set, the guided set-up is automatically called up. The control unit displays menu
item "SEtUP" from the CTRL menu branch.
7.3 Set-up by means of the operating unit
7.3.1 General on set-up
Please note the safety instructions ⇒ "Safety instructions", Page 14 and ⇒ "General", Page 62!
The guided set-up of the frequency inverter determines all the relevant parameter settings for the desired application.
Once the SETUP routine has been successfully concluded, the actual value Actual frequency 241 is subse‐
quently displayed from the VAL menu branch in the control unit. Subsequently the user should check whether further
parameters are relevant for the application.
Incorrect parameter setting

● The guided set-up includes the function for parameter identification. The parameters are determined by meas‐
21471644/220808
urement and set accordingly. The motor should be cold on starting the measurement since some of the motor
data depend on the operating temperature.
62
The guided set-up display ”SEtUP” automatically appears when being
supplied or after parameter identification has been aborted.
Following successful set-up you can select the sub-menu CTRL in the
main menu and call up the "SEtUP" function again by means of the arrow
keys.
Confirm the "SEtUP" display with the ENT key.
Depending on the selected Control level 28, the configurations being

available are automatically displayed. The configurations are described
in the following chapter of the operating instructions. Select the number
of the desired configuration by means of the arrow keys and confirm the
ENT selection by means of the ENT key.
If the configuration has been changed, the hardware and software func‐
tions are configured and the inverter is re-initialised. The guided “SEtUP“
starts again from the beginning. Please confirm the configuration by
pressing the ENT key.
ENT
42397144_xml.eps
Fig. 50
7.3.2 Configuration
The parameter Configuration 30 determines the allocation and basic function of the control inputs and outputs
and the software functions. The frequency inverter software offers several configurations for selection. The major
difference between the configurations is how to control the drive. In the operating instructions the following config‐
urations and associated parameters are described in the third Control level 28.
Configuration 110 – V/f without encoder
Configuration 110 includes the functions for the variable speed control of
a motor.
Detailed description of the configuration ⇒ "Configuration", Page 73.

42397244_xml.eps
Fig. 51
Configuration 111 – V/f with technology controller
Configuration 111 extends the V/f characteristic by software functions

which facilitate adaptation to customer requirements for different appli‐
cations
42397344_xml.eps
Fig. 52
Configuration 210 – FOR speed control with encoder
Configuration 210 includes the functions for the variable-speed field-ori‐

ented regulation of a motor with rotary encoder feedback.

42397444_xml.eps
Fig. 53
Configuration 230 – FOR N or M controlled
Configuration 230 extends configuration 210 by the functions for the field-
oriented regulation depending on the torque.
21471644/220808

42397544_xml.eps
Fig. 54 63
Configuration 410 – FOR speed control without encoder
Configuration 410 includes the functions for the field-oriented regulation

of a motor without encoder.

42397644_xml.eps
Fig. 55
Configuration 430 – FOR speed without encoder N or M controlled
Configuration 430 extends configuration 410 by the functions for the field-
oriented regulation depending on the torque.

42397744_xml.eps
Fig. 56
7.3.3 Data set
After configuration, selection of the data set is displayed. Select the re‐
quired Data set ds with the cursor keys and confirm with the ENT key.
The Data set dS parameter makes it possible to select between four

data sets for storing the parameter settings.
42397844_xml.eps
Fig. 57
In data set 0 (factory setting), data sets 1 to 4 are saved with the same parameter values. The standard application
of the frequency inverter uses data set 1 without using the change-over of data sets.
Setting
Parameter dS Functions
0 All data sets (DS0)
1 Data set 1 (DS1)
2 Data set 2 (DS2)
3 Data set 3 (DS3)
4 Data set 4 (DS4)
Tab. 34
7.3.4 Motor data
The motor data that is input in the following part of the guided set-up is to
be taken from the rating plate and the data sheet of the motor. The motor
data set in the factory refer to the rated data of the frequency inverter. The
other motor data required for the control and regulation processes are
calculated from the settings made during the setup which are checked for
plausibility.
42397944_xml.eps
Fig. 58
The rated values used in the factory settings must be checked and, if necessary, changed by the user. Change the
values with the cursor keys and confirm entry with the ENT key.
For Demag ZBA motors with a wide voltage range, e.g. 380 – 400 V, enter the smaller of the two voltages as
Rated voltage 370.
Parameters Setting
21471644/220808
No. Description Min. Max. Factory set.

370 Rated voltage 0.17 * UFUN 2 * UFUN UFUN
371 Rated current 0.01 * IFUN 10 * ü* IFUN IFUN
64 372 Rated speed 96 rpm 60000 rpm nN

Parameters Setting
374 Rated cosinus Phi 0,01 1,00 cos(φ)N
375 Rated frequency 10.00 Hz 1,000.00 Hz 50.00 Hz

376 Rated mech. power 0.01 * PFUN 10 * PFUN PFUN
490 Operation mode encoder 1 1 - single 4 - quadruple 0 - off

491 Division marks encoder 1 1 8192 1024
493 Operation mode encoder 2 1 - single 4 - quadruple 0 - off
766 Source Actual Speed 1 - Encoder 1 2 - Encoder 2 2 - Encoder 2
Tab. 35
7.3.5 Rotary encoder data
Configurations 210 and 230 of the field-oriented regulation require the connection of an incremental rotary encoder.
The channel signals of the rotary encoder must be connected to the digital inputs S5IND (channel A) and S4IND
(channel B).
The Operation Mode Encoder 1 490 defines the way of scanning.
A further encoder input is available when an extension module is fitted. It is programmed by means of the
Operation Mode Encoder 2 493 parameter.
For further information on the rotary encoder please refer to ⇒ "Rotary encoder", Page 77.
7.3.6 Plausibility check
The check of the motor data should only be left out by qualified users. The
configurations include complex regulation processes which largely de‐
pend on correctly entered motor data. Therefore the warning and error
messages displayed during the check must be observed. If a critical sit‐
uation is detected during the guided set-up procedure, it is displayed in
the operating unit. In Parcom Compact, this is displayed in the parameter
42398044_xml.eps Status of motor parameter identification 797 ⇒ "Set-up by
Fig. 59 means of the communication interface", Page 69. Depending on the
deviation from the expected parameter value, a warning or error message
is displayed.
The warning message can be acknowledged by means of the ENT key and the guided set-up is continued.
The parameter values entered can be corrected by subsequently pressing the ESC key.
In Parcom Compact the parameter Motor parameter identification 796 must be set to "1 – continue".
Code Measures / Remedy

Warning messages
SA000 No warning message existing. This message can be read out via an optional communication card.
SA001 The rated voltage 370 is outside the FI nominal voltage range. The maximum rated voltage is indicated on the type plate
of the frequency inverter.
SA002 The rated current 371, the rated mech. power 376 and the rated voltage 370 must be checked. The efficiency
calculated for an asynchronous motor is in the limit range.
SA003 The Rated Cosinus Phi 374 is outside the standard range (0.6 to 0.95).
SA004 The rated speed 372 and the rated frequency 375 must be checked. The slip for an asynchronous motor is in the limit
range.
Tab. 36
If a fault message appears, check and enter the parameterized rated data again. The guided set-up is repeated until
21471644/220808
the rated values have been entered correctly. Only experienced users should terminate the guided set-up prema‐
turely by pressing the ESC key, since some of the rated data is not correct.
65
Fault messages
SF000 No error message existing.
SF001 The rated current 371 that was entered is too low.
SF002 The rated current 371 is too high with reference to the rated mech. power 376 and the rated voltage 370.
SF003 The Rated Cosinus Phi 374 is wrong (more than 1 or less than 0.3).
SF004 The slip frequency calculated from the rated data is negative. The rated speed 372 and the rated frequency 375 must
be checked.
SF005 The rated speed 372 and the rated frequency 375 that were entered must be checked, since the calculated slip frequency
is too large.
SF006 The total power of the drive calculated from the rated data is smaller than the entered rated mech. power.
SF007 The configuration set is not supported by the guided set-up.
Tab. 37
7.3.7 Parameter identification
The display "PAidE" must be confirmed by pressing the ENT key.
In Parcom Compact the function is started by setting the parameter Status

of motor parameter idenification 796 to the value "10 – Complete Setup,
DS0" ⇒ "Set-up by means of the communication interface", Page 69
42398144_xml.eps
Fig. 60
In addition to the rated data, the configuration selected requires the knowledge of further motor data not being
indicated on the type plate of the motor. The guided set-up can measure the necessary motor data. The values
measured when the motor is at standstill are entered directly or after calculation of the parameter. The sequence
and duration of parameter identification varies depending on the motor and inverter output connected and may take
up to a few minutes. The connected motor is evaluated in the subsequent course of parameter identification with
the displayed signals. During this procedure the motor may be braked firmly.
If the controller enable signal is not applied to control input S1IND, the
inverter reports "FUF" on the operating unit.
When the enable signal is applied, the "FUF" message is deleted and the
unit starts identifying the parameters.
42398244_xml.eps
Fig. 61
DANGER
Non-compliance with the operating instructions

The parameter identification of the frequency inverter requires the release of the power module. Only qualified
persons may work on the devices. Qualified persons are familiar with the installation, assembly, putting into oper‐
ation and operation of frequency inverters and have the necessary qualification for their task. Carefully read the
documentation before starting the work and comply with the safety instructions.
Parameter identification may not be carried out when the du/dt filter is connected.
During parameter identification noise occurs in the motor.
The parameter identification releases the brake of a KB-Motor.
The final ”rEAdY” message must be confirmed by pressing the ENT key.
Cancelling by pressing the ESC key or by terminating the enable of S1IND

means that incomplete values are accepted.
21471644/220808
42398344_xml.eps
66 Fig. 62
When the parameters have been identified, the "Read inverter information" function must be performed in Parcom
Compact ⇒ "Set-up by means of the communication interface", Page 69.
During or after the parameter identification warning messages may be displayed.
Warning messages
SA021 The stator resistance is very high. The following causes are possible:
- The motor cable cross-section is not sufficient.
- The motor cable is too long.
- The motor cable is not correctly connected.
- The contacts are not in good condition (possibly corroded).
SA022 The rotor resistance is very high. The following causes are possible:
- The motor cable cross-section is not sufficient.
- The motor cable is too long.
- The motor cable is not correctly connected.
- The contacts are not in good condition (possibly corroded).
SA041 The slip speed could not be correctly determined. Check the values entered for the Rated speed 372 and
Rated frequency 375 parameters. Repeat identification of the parameters.
SA042 The slip speed could not be correctly determined. Check the values entered for the Rated speed 372 and
Rated frequency 375 parameters. Repeat identification of the parameters.
SA051 Motor data entered for star connection, but the motor is connected for delta connection. Change the motor lead connections for
operation with star connection. Check the values entered for the rated motor parameters for operation with delta connection.
Repeat identification of the parameters.
SA052 Motor data entered for delta connection, but the motor is connected for star connection. Change the motor lead connections for
operation with delta connection. Check the values entered for the rated motor parameters for operation with star connection.
Repeat identification of the parameters.
SA052 Measurements show asymmetric phases. Check the leads on the motor and frequency inverter terminals for correct connection
and check the contacts (possibly corroded). Repeat identification of the parameters.
Tab. 38
During or after the parameter identification error messages may be displayed.
Error messages
SF011 Measurement of main inductance has failed because the motor has a high slip. Correct the rated motor values in parameters
370, 371, 372, 374, 375 and 376. Repeat identification of the parameters.
SF012 Measurement of leakage inductance has failed because the motor has high slip. Correct the rated motor values in parameters
370, 371, 372, 374, 375 and 376. Repeat identification of the parameters.
SF021 Measurement of the stator resistance provided no useful result. Check the leads on the motor and frequency inverter terminals
for correct connection and check the contacts for corrosion and secure contact. Repeat identification of the parameters.
SF022 Measurement of the rotor resistance provided no useful result. Check the leads on the motor and frequency inverter terminals
for correct connection and check the contacts for corrosion and secure contact. Repeat identification of the parameters.
Tab. 39
Overview of operating unit messages

SEtUP Setup routine menu item
CALC Plausibility check running
PAidE Inverter is ready to identify parameters
FUF Controller enable on control input S1IND is missing
rEAdY Parameter identification completed
End Guided set-up routine finished
rESEt Inverter is being reset
Tab. 40
21471644/220808
7.3.8 Reference values
The versatile drive applications resulting in many parameters to be set require that further parameters must be
checked. The parameters interrogated during the guided set-up have been selected from existing applications and
should be amended by further settings in the menu branch PARA after the guided set-up has been completed. 67
Parameters Setting
475 Drive control 10 - SOST
418 Min. frequency 0.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 3.50 Hz
419 Maximum frequency 0.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 50.00 Hz
420 Acceleration 0.00 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 10.00 Hz/s
421 Deceleration 0.00 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 10.00 Hz/s
480 SOST step 1 -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 5.00 Hz
481 SOST step 2 -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 50.00 Hz
Tab. 41
The control unit shows the End message that you should confirm with the
ENT key. The guided set-up of the frequency inverter is completed with
a reset and the initialisation of the frequency inverter. The Dedrive Com‐
pact signals an error during initialisation.
42398444_xml.eps
Fig. 63
The parameter actual frequency 241 that is defined in the factory

settings is displayed in connection with an fault-free initialization of the
frequency inverter.
42398544_xml.eps
Fig. 64
The guided set-up makes it easier for you to select the correct parameters and determines further rated data of the
motor. If the parameters have been set by means of the optional programming software Parcom Compact or in the
menu branch PARA of the operating unit, the display of the actual value selected must be activated manually. The
setup function appears when the frequency inverter is switched on, and you can quit this by pressing the ESC key.
Change into the menu branch VAL and select the desired actual value which is to be displayed in the future. Press
the ENT key to display the value of the parameter and press the ENT key again to select the actual value for a new
start.
21471644/220808
68
7.4 Checking the direction of rotation
Please note the safety instructions, ⇒ "Safety instructions", Page 14, ⇒ "Connection of the electrical equipment",
Page 15 and ⇒ "General", Page 62.
The connection between the reference value and the actual direction of rotation of the drive must be checked. The
check should be carried out as follows. Specify a reference value of approx. 10% vorgeben and switch on the enable
of the freuqency inverter for a short time (control inputs FUF (S1IND) and SW-Step 1+ for clockwise or FUF (S1IND)
and SW-Step 1- for anti-clockwise rotation). Check whether the motor shaft rotates in the correct direction during
acceleration of the drive. In addition to the check of the drive the corresponding actual values and operating mes‐
sages can be read out by means of the operating unit. If e.g. an incorrect direction of rotation is detected, two motor
phases e.g. U and V, must be interchanged on the terminals of the frequency inverter. The connection of the fre‐
quency inverter on the line side has no effect on the direction of rotation of the drive.
Within the field-oriented regulation with incremental rotary encoder the actual value is compared to the reference
value via the Operation mode 760. If the direction of rotation is detected as being incorrect, the digital inputs
S5IND (channel A) and S4IND (channel B) must be checked in addition to the motor connection.
The set-up of the frequency inverter is completed and can be amended by further settings in the PARA menu. The
set parameters are selected so that they are sufficient for a set-up in most application cases. The other settings
relevant for the application must be checked according to the operating instructions.
7.5 Set-up by means of the communication interface

The parameter setting and set-up of the frequency inverter by means of one of the optional communication interfaces
includes the functions for the plausibility check and parameter identification. The documentation must be read care‐
fully before and the safety instructions must be observed, since the relevant parameters must be set independently
by the qualified user.
The parameter Motor parameter identification 796 defines the function which is carried out immediately.
The operation modes divide the automatic steps carried out subsequently during the guided set-up.
Operation mode 796 Functions

0- Clear status The set-up does not carry out any function.
1- Continue The warning message is acknowledged and the set-up is continued.
2- Abort The set-up is aborted and a RESET of the frequency inverter is carried out.
10 - Complete Setup, DS0 The set-up is carried out in data set 0 and identical parameter values are stored in all four data sets.
11 - Complete Setup, DS1 The parameter values of the set-up are stored in data set 1.
20 - Plaus. check machine data, DS0 The set-up process checks the rated motor parameters in the four data sets.
21 - Plaus. check machine data, DS1 The rated motor parameters in data set 1 are checked for plausibility.
30 - Calculation and para. ident., The set-up determines further motor data via the parameter identification, calculates dependent pa‐
DS0 rameters and stores identical parameter values in all four data sets.
31 - Calculation and para. ident., Extended motor data are measured, dependent parameters are calculated and the parameters are
DS1 stored in data set 1.
21471644/220808
69
Tab. 42
The individual set-up steps can be monitored and checked by means of the parameter
Status motor parameter identification 797. The set-up via the communication interface continuously
updates the status parameter which can be read out via the interface.
Status 797 Meaning

OK The set-up has been carried out.
PC phase 1 The plausibility check of the motor data is active.
PC phase 2 The calculation of dependent parameters is active.
FUF Parameter identification requires the controller enable on digital input S1IND.
Parameter identification The rated values of the motor are measured by the parameter identification.
Setup already active The set-up is carried out via the operating unit.
SF001 Rated current too low The rated current 371 that was entered is too low.
SF002 Rated current too high The rated current 371 is too high with reference to the rated mech. power 376 and the
rated voltage 370.
SF003 The Rated Cosinus Phi 374 is wrong (more than 1 or less than 0.3).
Rated Cos-Phi
SF004 Negative Slip Frequency The slip frequency calculated from the rated data is negative. The rated speed 372 and the
rated frequency 375 must be checked.
SF005 Slip Frequency Too High The rated speed 372 and the rated frequency 375 that were entered must be checked, since
the calculated slip frequency is too large.
SF006 Power Balance The total power of the drive calculated from the rated data is smaller than the entered rated mech.
power.
SF007 The set configuration is not supported by the set-up.
Unsupported Configuration
SA001 Rated voltage The rated voltage 370 is outside the rated voltage range of the frequency inverter. The maximum rated
voltage is indicated on the type plate of the frequency inverter.
SA002 Nom. Current The rated current 371, the rated mech. power 376 and the rated voltage 370 must be
checked. The efficiency calculated for an asynchronous motor is in the limit range.
SA003 The Rated Cosinus Phi 374 is outside the standard range (0.6 to 0.95).
Rated Cos-Phi
SA004 Slip Frequency The rated speed 372 and the rated frequency 375 must be checked. The slip for an asynchro‐
nous motor is in the limit range.
No Release Parameter identification requires the enable on digital input S1IND.
Error An error has occurred in the set-up sequence.
Warning Phase Asymmetry The parameter identification has detected a phase asymmetry during measurement of the three motor
phases.
Tab. 43
21471644/220808
70
8 Programming parameters with the Parcom Compact software
8.1 General
As an alternative for configuring and programming the parameters of the inverter, a PC with Parcom Compact
parameter programming software, which is connected to one of the optional RS 232 modules 537 769 84 or 537
723 84 via data cable 537 237 84 can be used.
Communication with the inverter is only possible when the unit is supplied with power.
8.2 Window layout
1
2
42578345_xml.eps
Fig. 65
1 Menu bar 4 Parameter window

2 Toolbar 5 Status bar
3 Directory window
Parcom Compact software with its graphical user interface facilitates simple programming of the inverter parameters.
The mouse or the keyboard can be used.
The width and height of the windows as well as the width of the columns in the parameter window can be changed
by holding and dragging the separators.
21471644/220808
71
9 Inverter data
9.1 General
Dedrive Compact frequency inverters are suitable for a wide range of applications. The modular hardware and
software structure provides for adaptation to customer requirements. The available hardware functions of the fre‐
quency inverter are displayed and can be modified by setting the software parameters specifically for the application.
9.2 Serial number

The Serial number 0 is entered when the frequency inverter is manufactured. An internal 9-digit code and the 8-
digit serial number are displayed. Additionally the serial number is printed on the type label.
Serial number 0: 123 456 789; 12345678
Type plate: Dedrive Compact DIC-4-002-E-0000-01

Serial No.: 12345678
Tab. 44
9.3 Optional modules

The hardware can be extended with modules plugged into the sockets. The modules detected by the frequency
inverter are displayed with the corresponding acronyms after initialisation in the parameter Optional modules
1.
Example: CM-232; EM-ENC-02
9.4 Frequency inverter software version

The firmware stored in the frequency inverter defines an available parameter and function structure of the software.
The Inverter Software Version 12 is displayed.
Inverter Software Version 12 : 4.2.4/050-6
9.5 Set password

As a protection against unauthorized access the parameter Set password 27 can be set. The parameter
Set password 27 is set to zero in the factory, so that all parameters can be changed. If a password has been set,
parameters can only be changed after this password has been entered.
Parameters Setting
27 Set password 0 999 0
Tab. 45
Set password:
● Define a number between 1 and 999 festlegen and enter it in parameter Set password 27.
Releasing the parameter change, if a password has been set:
● Parcom Compact: When starting Parcom Compact, a "Password and control level" window appears in which
control level 3 and the set password must be entered.
● KP 500 operating unit: In the "PARA" menu parameter 27 must be selected and the set parameter be entered.
Delete password:
21471644/220808
● Release parameter change, see above.

● Enter the value 0 in the parameter Set password 27.
72
9.6 Control Level
The control level 28 defines the scope of functions to be programmed. The operating instructions describe the
parameters from the first to the third control level. The parameters of the third control level should only be set by
qualified users. Before starting work, the documentation must be read carefully and the safety instructions must be
observed. In the operating instructions a ”Qualified person” is a person who is familiar with the installation, assembly,
putting into operation and operation of frequency inverters and has the necessary qualification for their task.
Parameters Setting
28 Control Level 1 3 3
Tab. 46
9.7 User Name

The User name 29 can be entered via the optional Parcom Compact programming software. A display via the KP
500 operating unit is possible only to a limited extent.
32 alphanumeric characters
9.8 Configuration
9.8.1 General
The parameter Configuration 30 determines the allocation and basic function of the control inputs and outputs
and the software functions. The frequency inverter software offers several configurations for selection. The major
difference between the configurations is how to control the drive. The analog and digital inputs can be combined
within the configuration and amended with optional communication protocols. In the operating instructions the fol‐
lowing configurations and associated parameters are described in the third Control level 28.
After the configuration has been changed, the factory-set values must be activated ⇒ "Programming", Page 74.
9.8.2 Configuration 110 – V/f without encoder
Configuration 110 includes the functions for the variable speed control of a motor. The motor speed is adjusted
depending on the load and on the set reference frequency.
9.8.3 Configuration 111 – V/f with technology controller
Configuration 111 extends the V/f characteristic by software functions which facilitate adaptation to customer re‐
quirements for different applications The technology controller must be used depending on the application.
9.8.4 Configuration 210 – FOR speed control with encoder
Permitted for lifting applications
Configuration 210 includes the functions for the variable-speed field-oriented regulation of an asynchronous motor
with rotary encoder feedback. A separate regulation of the torque-forming and the flux-forming current provides for
a highly dynamic drive with a high load torque. The necessary rotary encoder feedback results in an exact speed
and torque behaviour.
If KB motors are used in lifting applications, sections ⇒ "Plausibility check", Page 65, ⇒ "Starting behaviour of the
FOR", Page 81 and ⇒ "Field controller", Page 159 must be considered!
9.8.5 Configuration 230 – FOR N or M controlled

21471644/220808
Configuration 230 extends configuration 210 by the functions for the field-oriented regulation depending on the
torque. The torque reference value is shown as percentage and transferred into a corresponding operating behaviour
of the application. A digital control input is used for switching between variable-speed regulation and regulation
depending on the torque.
73
9.8.6 Configuration 410 – FOR speed control without encoder
Factory setting
Recommended for travel applications
Possible min. frequency f min = 5 Hz
In configuration 410 only modulation frequencies from 4 kHz on can be used. Configuration 410 includes the functions
for the field-oriented regulation of an asynchronous motor without encoder. The current motor speed is determined
from the instantaneous currents and voltages combined with the machine parameters.
Parallel switching of different motors is not possible in this configuration.
9.8.7 Configuration 430 – FOR N or M controlled without encoder
In configuration 430 only modulation frequencies from 4 kHz on can be used.
Configuration 430 extends configuration 410 by the functions for the field-oriented regulation depending on the
torque. The torque reference value is shown as percentage and transferred into a corresponding operating behaviour
of the application. The changeover of the FOR between speed and torque control is made via a digital control input.
Parallel switching of motors is not possible in the torque control operating mode in this configuration.
9.9 Language
The parameters are stored in the frequency inverter in different languages. The description of parameters is dis‐
played in the language selected Language 33.
Language 33 Functions
0- German Description of parameters in German
1- English Description of parameters in English
2- Espanol Description of parameters in Spanish
3- Francais Description of parameters in French
Tab. 47
9.10 Programming
The Program 34 parameter makes it possible to acknowledge an error message and to restore the factory setting.
The display of the operating unit shows the message "dEFLt" or "rESEt" and the LEDs additionally indicate the status
of the frequency inverter.
Program 34 Functions
123 A reset is carried out, an existing error is acknowledged. The display of
the operating unit shows the message "rESEt".
4444 The parameters set within the configuration selected are overwritten with
the factory-set values. The display of the operating unit shows the mes‐
sage "dEFLt".
Tab. 48
21471644/220808
74
10 Motor data
10.1 General
The input of the motor data is the basis for the functions of the control and regulation processes. During the guided
set-up the necessary parameters are interrogated according to the selected Configuration 30.
10.2 Rated motor parameters

The rated motor parameters of a three-phase asynchronous motor must be set according to the type plate or the
technical data sheet of the motor. The motor data set in the factory refer to the rated data of the frequency inverter.
The other motor data required for the control and regulation processes are calculated from the settings made during
the setup which are checked for plausibility.
The rated values specified by the manufacturer must be checked by the user.
Parameters Setting
370 Rated voltage 0.17 * UFUN 2 * UFUN UFUN
371 Rated current 0.01 * IFUN 10 * ü* IFUN IFUN
372 Rated speed 96 rpm 60000 rpm nN
373 No. of pole pairs 1 24 2

374 Rated cosinus phi 0,01 1,00 cos(φ)N
375 Rated frequency 10.00 Hz 1,000.00 Hz 50,00

376 Mech. mech. power 0.01 * PFUN 10 * PFUN PFUN
Tab. 49
10.3 Additional motor data
10.3.1 General
In order to exactly calculate the machine model for the selected control and regulation process in the case of field-
oriented regulation, further data must be determined which cannot be read from the type plate of the asynchronous
motor. During the guided set-up, the parameter identification has been carried out for measuring further motor data.
10.3.2 Stator resistance
Only in the 4xx configurations; not in 2xx
The resistance of the stator winding has been measured during the guided set-up. The parameter is set as phase
quantity and in a delta connection it is smaller than the winding resistance by factor 3. In the factory setting the
equivalent stator resistance of a standard motor is entered suitably for the rated output of the frequency inverter.
Parameters Setting
377 Stator resistance 0 mΩ 65535 mΩ RsN
Tab. 50
The stator resistance can be optimised in the idle state of the motor. At the stationary working point the
Torque current share Isq 216 or the estimated Active Current 214 should be equal to zero. This check
should be carried out at a winding temperature that is also reached during normal operation of the motor, since the
stator resistance depends on the temperature.
10.3.3 Leakage factor
The leakage factor of the motor defines the relation between leakage inductance and main inductance. Thus the
torque-forming and the flux-forming current component are linked via the leakage inductance. In order to optimise
21471644/220808
the leakage factor within the field-oriented regulation process, different working points of the drive must be ap‐
proached. The Flow current share Isd 215 in contrast to the Torque current share Isq 216, should be
largely independent of the load torque. The fluxbuilding current component is inversely proportional to the leakage
factor. With increasing leakage factor the torque-forming current increases and the flux-forming component 75
decreases. The check should show a relatively constant Flow current share Isd 215, depending on the set
Idle current 716, independent of the load on the drive.
The regulation without encoders uses the parameter Leakage factor 378 for optimising the synchronization to
one drive.
Parameters Setting
378 Leakage factor 1,0% 20,0% 7,0%
Tab. 51
10.3.4 Magnetising current
The Idle current 716 is an indicator of the flux in the motor and thus for the voltage applied to the motor at no
load as a function of the speed. This value is determined during the guided set-up to approx 30 % of the
Rated current 371. This current is comparable to the excitation current of a DC machine with external excitation.
To optimise the value for the field-oriented regulation without encoders, the motor must be operated under no load
at a rotating frequency that is below the Rated frequency 375. The accuracy of optimisation increases with the
set Modulation frequenzcy 400 and the idle state of the motor to be reached. The
Flow current share Isd 215 to be read out should approximatively correspond to the set Idle current
716.
The field-oriented regulation with rotary encoder feedback uses the set Idle current 716 for the flux in the motor.
The fact that the magnetisation depends on the frequency and voltage at the corresponding working point is taken
into account by a magnetisation characteristic. Especially in the field-weakening range above the rated frequency
the characteristic is calculated on the basis of three points. The parameter identification has determined the mag‐
netising characteristic of the motor and has set the parameter Magnetising current 50% flux 713,
Magnetsing current 80% flux 714 and Magnetising current 110% flux 715.
Parameters Setting
713 Magnetising Current 50% Flux 1,0% 50,0% 31,0%
716 Idle current 0.01 * IFUN ü * IFUN 0.3 * IFUN
Tab. 52
10.3.5 Rotor time constant correction factor
The rotor time constant results from the inductance of the rotor circuit and the rotor resistance. Owing to the tem‐
perature dependence of the rotor resistance and the saturation effects of the core, the rotor time constant also
depends on the temperature and the current. The behaviour at load and thus the rated slip depend on the rotor time
constant. During the guided setup, the parameter identification determines the data of the motor and sets the pa‐
rameter Rotor time constant correction factor 718 accordingly. To adjust precisely or to check the rotor
time constant, you may proceed as follows: Load the motor at half the Rated frequency 375. Approx. half the
Rated voltage 370 must then result with a max. tolerance of 5 %. If this is not the case, adjust the
Rotor time constant correction factor 718 as required. The higher you set the correction factor, the
stronger the voltage is reduced under load. Read out the rotor time constant value calculated by the software using
the Current rotor time constant 227 actual value. This check should be carried out when the winding is
cold.
Parameters Setting
718 Rotor time constant 0,01% 300,00% 100,00%
correction factor
21471644/220808
Tab. 53
76
10.4 Rotary encoder
10.4.1 General
The speed actual value needs to be measured continuously for the control and regulation process for some of the
available Configurations 30. The necessary incremental rotary encoder must be connected to the digital control
terminals S5IND (channel A) and S4IND (channel B) of the frequency inverter.
Operation modes 490 and 493 for encoders 1 and 2 are deactivated by default from software version 6 on.
In 2xx configurations, the user must activate the operation mode of the encoder that is used and set
Source actual speed 766 accordingly.
10.4.2 Operation mode encoder 1
Select Operation mode 490 for encoder 1 in accordance with the connected incremental encoder.
The Source actual speed 766 parameter must be set accordingly.
A unipolar rotary encoder can be connected to the standard control terminals.
The necessary incremental rotary encoder must be connected to the digital control terminals S5IND (channel A) and
S4IND (channel B) of the frequency inverter.
Operation mode 490 Rotary encoder 1

0- Off (factory setting) Speed measurement not active;
the digital inputs are available for further functions.
1- Single evaluation Double channel encoder with direction of rotation detection via track signals A and B;
one signal edge is evaluated for each division mark.
4- Quadruple evaluation Double channel encoder with direction of rotation detection via track signals A and B;
four signal edges are evaluated for each division mark.
11 - Single evaluation unsigned Single-channel rotary encoder via channel signal A. The actual speed value is positive. One signal
edge per pulse is evaluated. Digital input S4IND is available for further functions.
12 - Double evaluation unsigned Single-channel rotary encoder via channel signal A. The actual speed value is positive. Two signal
edges per pulse are evaluated. Digital input S4IND is available for further functions.
101 - Single evaluation inverted As operation mode 1. The actual speed value is inverted. (alternative to exchanging the channel sig‐
nals)
104 - Quadruple evaluation inverted As operation mode 4. The actual speed value is inverted. (alternative to exchanging the channel sig‐
nals)
111 - Single evaluation negative As operation mode 11. The actual speed value is negative.
112 - Double evaluation negative As operation mode 12. The actual speed value is negative.
Tab. 54
10.4.3 Operation mode encoder 2
A further encoder input is available when an extension module is fitted. It is programmed by means of the
Operation Mode Encoder 2 493 parameter.
The Source actual speed 766 parameter must be set accordingly.
Further details: See operating instructions of the extension modules.
Integrated encoders of KB motors with S31 electronics may only be operated with an EM-ENC-02 extension module
with a 24 V power supply if the terminating resistor of the EM-ENC-02 unit is deactivated.
Operation mode 493 Rotary encoder 2

0- Off (factory setting) Speed measurement not active.
4- Quadruple evaluation Two-channel rotary encoder with direction of rotation detection via channel signals A and B; with push-
pull operation additionally signals A/ and B/. Four signal edges per pulse are evaluated.
104 - Quadruple evaluation inverted As operation mode 4;
21471644/220808
The actual speed value is inverted. (alternative to exchanging the channel signals)
Tab. 55
77
10.4.4 Division marks encoder 1
The number of increments of the rotary encoder suitable for safe evaluation must be selected according to the speed
range of the application by means of the following formulas.
Max. number of division marks Smax
Smax = 150000Hz .60s/min

nmax
42398744_xml.eps
Fig. 66
1024' : n max = 8700 1/min
43228844_xml.eps
Fig. 67 Example: 1024'
The maximum number of division marks Smax is defined by the limit frequency fmax = 150 kHz of digital inputs S5IND
(track A) and S4IND (track B).
Min. number of division marks Smin
Smin =500Hz . 60s/min

A . n min
42398844_xml.eps
Fig. 68
1024' : n min = 10 1/min

0,33 Hz
43228944_xml.eps
Fig. 69 For quadruple evaluation
To ensure good motor running characteristics, an encoder signal must be evaluated at least every 2 ms (signal
frequency f = 500 Hz). Based on this requirement, the minimum division mark Smin of the incremental encoder can
be calculated for a required minimum speed nmin.
The parameter for the actual number of increments for the connected encoder must programmed via the
Division marks encoder 1 491 parameter.
Parameters Setting
Tab. 56
21471644/220808
78
10.4.5 Filter time constant encoder 1
For encoders with an unsymmetrical pulse control factor the encoder signal can be filtered for improving the control
behaviour.
Operation mode 815 Filter time constant encoder 1

0- Off Speed is measured without filtering.
1- 2 ms The filter time constant is 2 ms.
Tab. 57
10.5 System data

By means of the Factor actual value system 389 parameter a relationship can be established between the
actual frequency and the Actual value system 242.
The actual frequency is multiplied by the parameter Factor cctual value system 389. The product is displayed
as Actual value system 242. Thus e.g. a speed can be standardized to m/min.
Parameters Setting
389 Factor actual value system - 100,000 100,000 1,000
Tab. 58
21471644/220808
79
11 Operating behaviour
11.1 General
Parameters for the operating behaviour of the frequency inverter must be set relative to the application. Particularly
the starting and stopping behaviour is freely configurable according to the selected Configuration 30. Additionally
functions such as autostart, synchronisation and positioning facilitate the integration into the application.
11.2 Starting behaviour
11.2.1 General
Parameters for start-up of the asynchronous motor must be set relative to the control and regulation process. Field-
oriented regulation processes are based on a complex controller structure and only require, in contrast to the V/f
characteristic, the definition of the limit values Maximum flux build-up time 780 and
Current during flux formation 781. The V/f characteristic is amended by the selected
Operation mode 620 of the start-up behaviour.
11.2.2 Start-up behaviour of the V/f characteristic
11.2.2.1 General
The parameter Operation mode 620 of the start-up behaviour is available in configuration 110 and configuration
111. Depending on the operation mode selected, first the motor is magnetised or a starting current is applied.
Operation mode 620 Start-up behaviour

0- Start delay + DC pre-mag For the time set with the parameter Start delay 820 the modulation remains switched off. Subse‐
(factory setting) quently a DC is put out for the duration of the DC pre-magnetisation time 821 which results from
the product of DC magnetisation 823 and the set Boost for f=0 600. Subsequently the output
voltage and the output frequency are modified according to the V/f characteristic.
1- Magnetisation In this operation mode, the Current during flux formation 781 is applied to the motor for
magnetisation after release. The output frequency is kept at 0 Hz for the duration of the
Maximum flux build-up time 780. After this time has elapsed, the set V/f characteristic is con‐
tinued.
2- Magnetisation+ Operation mode 2 includes operation mode 1. After the Maximum flux build-up time 780 has
Current Impr. elapsed, the output frequency is increased according to the set acceleration. When the output frequency
reaches the value set with the parameter Frequency Limit 624, the Starting current 623 is
reduced. There is a smooth transition up to 1.4 times the frequency limit to the set V/f characteristic.
From this working point on, the output current depends on the load.
3- Magnetisation+ Operation mode 3 includes operation mode 1 of the start-up function. When the output frequency rea‐
I*R-Comp. ches the value set with the parameter Frequency Limit 624 the boost of the output voltage by the
IxR compensation becomes effective. The V/f characteristic is shifted by that share of voltage which
depends on the stator resistance.
4- Magnet.+ In this operation mode, the current set with the parameter Current during flux formation
Curr.Imp.+ 781 is applied to the motor for magnetisation after release. The output frequency is kept at 0 Hz for the
I*R-Comp. duration of the Maximum flux build-up time 780. After the time has elapsed, the output frequency
is increased according to the set acceleration. When the output frequency reaches the value set with
the parameter Frequency Limit 624, the Starting current 623 is reduced. There is a smooth
transition to the V/f characteristic and an output current depending on the load is applied. Simultane‐
ously from this output frequency on the boost of the output voltage by the IxR compensation becomes
effective. The V/f characteristic is shifted by that share of voltage which depends on the stator resist‐
ance.
12 - Magn.+ Operation mode 12 includes an additional function to ensure a start-up behaviour under arduous con‐
Curr.Imp. w. Ramp Stop ditions. The magnetisation and application of the starting current corresponds to operation mode 2. The
ramp stop takes the current consumption into account which the motor has at the corresponding working
point and controls the frequency and voltage change by means of the ramp stop. The
controller status 275 signals the intervention of the controller with the message "RSTP".
14 - Magn.+Current Imp. w. RS.+ In this operation mode the functions of operation mode 12 are amended by the compensation of the
I*R-Comp. voltage drop on the stator resistor. When the output frequency reaches the value set with the parameter
Frequency Limit 624 the boost of the output voltage by the IxR compensation becomes effective.
The V/f characteristic is shifted by that share of voltage which depends on the stator resistance.
Tab. 59
The V/f characteristic is amended by a current controller for the start-up behaviour, in contrast to the field-oriented
21471644/220808
regulation. The PI controller controls the application of the set Starting current 623.
80
Parameters Setting
621 Amplification 0,01 10,00 1,00
622 Integral time 1 ms 30000 ms 50 ms
Tab. 60
11.2.2.2 DC magnetisation
In configuration 110 and 111 the DC level can be set via the parameter DC magnetisation 823 for the
DC pre-magnetisation time 821.
The DC results from the product of DC magnetisation 823 and the set Boost for f=0 600.
Parameters Setting
823 DC magnetisation 0% 250% 100%
Tab. 61
11.2.2.3 Starting current
Configurations 110, 111 (V/f characteristic) and 410 (FOR without encoders) use the application of the starting
current in operation modes 2, 4, 12 and 14. The Starting current 623 ensures a sufficient torque particularly
for starting against high-inertia loads up to reaching the Frequency limit 624.
For applications which require a permanently high current at low speed, externally ventilated motors must be used
for thermal reasons.
Parameters Setting
623 Starting current 0.0 A ü * IFUN IFUN
Tab. 62
11.2.2.4 Frequency limit
In configurations 110, 111 and 410 the Starting current 624 is applied until the Frequency limit 624 is
reached. Permanent working points below the frequency limit are only allowed, if externally ventilated motors are
used. Above the frequency limit there is a transition to the control and regulation process of the selected
Configuration 30.
Parameters Setting
624 Frequency limit 0.00 Hz 100.00 Hz 4.50 Hz
Tab. 63
11.2.3 Starting behaviour of the FOR
The field-oriented regulation in configuration 210, 230 and 410 is based on the separate regulation of the flux-forming
and torque-forming current component. When the motor starts, it is first magnetised or a current is applied. By means
of the parameter Current during flux formation 781 the magnetising current Isd and by means of the pa‐
rameter Maximum flux build-up time 780 the maximum time for current application is set.
Current is applied until the reference value of the rated magnetisation current is reached or the
Maximum flux build-up time 780 is exceeded.
Parameters Setting
780 Maximum flux build-up time 1 ms 10000 ms 1000 ms
21471644/220808
781 Current during flux formation 0.1 * IFUN ü * IFUN IFUN

Tab. 64
81
DANGER
Load sinking during starting

If KB motors are used for lifting applications, the parameter Maximum flux build-up time 780 must be re‐
duced to 1ms, in order to prevent load sinking possible during starting..
When the load sinks, error 1102 Max. frequency deviation occurs.
Parameters 780 und 781 are also used for operation mode 1 – magnetisation of the V/f characteristic; ⇒ "Start-up
behaviour of the V/f characteristic", Page 80.
11.3 Stopping behaviour

The stopping behaviour of the motor can be defined via Operation mode 630. The following operation modes are
defined by different combinations of the logic signals SW-Step 1+ 68 and SW-Step 1- 69.
Operation mode 630 run-out behaviour

SW-Step 1+ = 0 and SW-Step 1- = 0
Operation mode 630
Run-out behaviour 1 Run-out behaviour 4
SW-Step 1+ = 1 and Run-out behaviour 1 11 (Factory setting) 14

SW-Step 1- = 1 Run-out behaviour 4 41 44
Tab. 65
Example: When parameter Operation mode 630 is set to 41, run-out behaviour 4 is activated for SW-Step 1+ =
1 and SW-Step 1- = 1 (according to the left number of the set value), and run-out behaviour 1 for SW-Step 1+ = 0
and SW-Step 1- = 0 (according to the right number of the set value).
Stopping behaviour
Run-out behaviour 1 The drive is stopped with the set deceleration. At standstill the power
inverter is blocked.
Shutdown + switch-off
Run-out behaviour 4 The drive is stopped with the emergency stop deceleration
Emergency stop clockwise 424 or
Emergency stop + switch-off
Emergency stop anticlockwise 425. At standstill the power inver‐
ter is blocked.
Tab. 66
11.4 Auto-Start
The autostart function is suitable for applications which, due to their function, allow a start-up when the power supply
is switched on. By activating the autostart function with the parameter Operation mode 651, the frequency inverter
accelerates the drive, after the supply voltage has been applied. The control signal controller enable and the starting
command are required by the regulations.
The motor is accelerated according to the parameters and to the reference value signal when switching on.
Operation mode 651 Auto-start function

0- Off (factory setting) The drive starts when the controller enable S1IND and the starting command SW-Step 1+ or SW-Step
1- are connected.
1- On By applying the supply voltage the drive is accelerated by the frequency inverter.
Tab. 67
DANGER
Automatic restart after a mains failure and voltage recovery

21471644/220808

At this point, please pay particular attention to VDE regulations 0100, part 227, and 0113, particularly section 5.4
"Protection against automatic restart after a mains failure and voltage recovery", as well as section 5.5
82
"Undervoltage protection". Furthermore special regulations relevant to the individual application as well as national
regulations must be complied with.
11.5 Search Run

It is necessary to synchronise to a rotating drive for applications which drive the motor through their behaviour or if
the drive still rotates after a disconnection on fault. By means of the Operation mode 645 the motor is synchronised
to the current motor speed without the "overcurrent" error message. Subsequently the motor is accelerated to the
reference speed according to the set acceleration.
The synchronisation in the operation modes 10 to 15 is made by short test pulses. Rotating frequencies up to 250
Hz are determined within 100 ms to 300 ms. At higher frequencies a wrong frequency is determined and synchro‐
nisation fails. A search run cannot determine whether an attempt to synchronise has failed in the "Quick Synchro‐
nisation" operation modes.
Depending on the set configuration only certain operation modes can be selected.
Operation mode 645 Search run function

0- Off (factory setting) The synchronisation to a rotating drive is de-activated.
1- Search Dir. acc to Preset Val. The search direction is determined by the sign of the reference value. If a positive reference value
(clockwise rotating field) is specified, the search direction is positive (clockwise rotating field), with a
negative reference value (anti-clockwise rotating field) the search direction is negative.
2- First Clockw.,Then Anticl., DCB First synchronisation to the drive is attempted in positive direction (clockwise rotating field). If this at‐
tempt fails, synchronisation to the drive is attempted in negative direction (anti-clockwise rotating field).
3- First Anticl.,Then Clockw., DCB First synchronisation to the drive is attempted in negative direction (anti-clockwise rotating field). If this
attempt fails, synchronisation to the drive is attempted in positive direction (clockwise rotating field).
4- Clockwise Only, Synchronisation to the drive is only carried out in positive direction (clockwise rotating field).
DC-Brake
5- Anti-clockwise Only, Synchronisation to the drive is only carried out in negative direction (anti-clockwise rotating field).
DC-Brake
10 - Quick Synchronisation Synchronisation to the drive is attempted in the positive (clockwise rotating field) or negative direction
(anti-clockwise direction).
11 - Quick Synch. acc. to Preset Val‐ The search direction is determined by the sign of the reference value. If a positive reference value
ue (clockwise rotating field) is specified, the search direction is positive (clockwise rotating field), with a
negative reference value (anti-clockwise rotating field) the search direction is negative.
14 - Quick Synch., Clockwise Only Synchronisation to the drive is only carried out in the positive direction (clockwise rotating field).
15 - Quick Synch., Anti-clockwise Synchronisation to the drive is only carried out in negative direction (anti-clockwise rotating field).
Only
Tab. 68
The operation modes 1, 4 and 5 specify a direction of rotation for the search run and avoid a direction of rotation
deviating from this. The search run can accelerate drives by checking the rotating frequency, if these drives have a
low moment of inertia or small load torque.
A search run may determine an incorrect direction of rotation in operation mode 10 to 15 during Quick Synchroni‐
sation. For example a frequency unequal to zero may be determined although the drive is at standstill. If no
overcurrent occurs, the drive is accelerated accordingly. A direction of rotation is specified in the operation modes
11, 14 and 15.
The synchronisation changes the set start-up behaviour of the selected configuration. The start command first ac‐
tivates the search run to determine the rotating frequency of the drive. In the operation modes 1 to 5 the
Current / rated motor current 647 is used for synchronisation as a percentage of the Rated current
371.
Parameters Setting
647 Current / rated motor current 1,00% 100,00% 70,00%
Tab. 69
21471644/220808
For the search run the V/f characteristic is amended by a PI controller which controls the set
Current / rated motor current 647.
83
If the parameter Operation mode 645 is set to operation mode 1 to 5 (search run), the Demagnetizing Time
633 must elapse before the search run is started.
Parameters Setting
648 Amplification 0,00 10,00 1,00
Tab. 70
If it is not possible to synchronise to the drive, the Braking current 631 is applied to the motor in operation mode
1 to 5 for the duration of the Brak. time after search run 646 in den Motor eingeprägt. When a direct current
is applied as set in the parameters of the DC brake, the motor heats up. Therefore a direct current should only be
applied to self-ventilated motors for a short time.
Parameters Setting
646 Brak. time after search run 0.0 s 200.0 s 10.0 s
Tab. 71
11.6 Positioning
11.6.1 General
Positioning is effected by specifying the positioning distance in "Reference positioning" operation mode or by spec‐
ifying the positioning angle in "Axle positioning" operation mode.
Positioning from a reference point uses a digital reference signal from a signal source that can be selected for
positioning the drive independent of the speed.
Axle positioning uses a digital reference signal of a rotary encoder. The "Reference positioning" function is available
in configuration 110, 410 and 210 and is activated by selecting operation mode 1 for the Operation mode 458
parameter.
The "Axle positioning" function is available in configuration 210 and is activated by selecting operation mode 2 for
the Operation mode 458 parameter.
Operation mode 458 Positioning function

0- Off (factory setting) Positioning is switched off
1- Reference positioning Positioning from reference point by specifying the positioning distance (revolutions), the reference point
is detected via a Signal source 459.
2- Axle positioning Position from reference point by specifying the positioning angle, reference signal from the rotary en‐
coder.
Tab. 72
11.6.2 Reference positioning
The feedback of the current position is related to the revolutions of the motor relative to the time of the reference
signal. The positioning accuracy of the application to be implemented depends on the current
Actual frequency 241, the Deceleration (clockwise) 421, the No. of pole pairs 373, the selected
Positioning distance 460 and the set control and regulation process.
The distance between the reference point and the desired position must be entered in motor revolutions. The cal‐
culation of the distance covered must be carried out by means of the selected Positioning distance 460
according to the application.
If the Positioning distance 460 is set to 0.000 r, the drive is immediately shutdown according to the selected
run-out behaviour for Operation mode 630.
21471644/220808
84
Parameters Setting
460 Positioning distance 0.000 r 1000000.000 r 0.000 r
Tab. 73
The actual value parameter Rotations 470 facilitates the setting and optimisation of this function. The revolutions
of the motor displayed should correspond to the Positioning distance 460.
The minimum number of revolutions required until reaching the desired position depends on the
Actual frequency 241 and the Deceleration (clockwise) 421 (or Deceleration anticlockwise
423) as well as on the No. of pole pairs 373 of the motor.
Example: f = 20 Hz, a = 5 Hz/s, p = 2 ⇒ Umin = 20
f2 Umin = Min. number of revolutions

U min =
2 .a . p f = Actual frequency 241
a = Deceleration 421 (423)

42398944_xml.eps
p = No. of pole pairs 373 of the motor
Fig. 70 Tab. 74
At least 20 revolutions are required to stop at the desired position at an actual frequency of 20 Hz and a deceleration
of 5 Hz/s. The is the minimum value which must not be lower for the Positioning distance 460. If the number
of revolutions up to the desired position is lower, the frequency must be reduced, the deceleration must be increased
or the reference point must be shifted.
The digital signal for detecting the reference point and the logic operation can be selected from a range of
Signal sources 459. The logic operation between digital inputs S2IND, S3IND and S6IND with further functions
must be checked according to the selected Configuration 030.
Signal source 459 Functions

2- S2IND, falling edge (factory set‐ Positioning starts with the logic signal change from 1 (HIGH) to 0 (LOW) at the reference point.
ting)
3- S3IND, falling edge
6- S6IND, falling edge
1x - SxIND, rising edge Positioning starts with the logic signal change from 0 (LOW) to 1 (HIGH).
2x - SxIND, rising/falling edge Positioning starts with the logic signal change.
Tab. 75
Detection of the reference position via a digital signal can be influenced by a variable dead time when the control
command is read and processed. The signal propagation delay is compensated by a positive value for
Signal correction 461. When a negative signal correction is set, the processing of the digital signal is delayed.
Parameters Setting
461 Signal correction -327.68 ms +327.67 ms 0.00 ms
Tab. 76
The influences on positioning which depend on the working point must be corrected empirically by means of the
parameter Load correction 462. If the desired position is not reached, the delay is increased by means of a
positive value for the load correction. The distance between the reference point and the desired position is increased.
Negative values accelerate the braking operation and reduce the positioning distance. The limit of the negative signal
correction results from the application and from the Positioning distance 460.
Parameters Setting
462 Load correction -32768 +32767 0
Tab. 77
21471644/220808
The behaviour of the positioning function after the desired position has been reached can be defined by means of
the parameter Activity after positioning 463.
85
Activity after positioning 463 Functions
0- End positioning The drive is stopped with the run-out behaviour of Operation mode 630.
(Factory setting)
1- Waiting for positioning signal The drive speed is kept up to the new signal edge; with a new edge of the positioning signal
the drive is accelerated in the previous direction of rotation.
2- Reversal by new edge The drive speed is kept up to the new signal edge; with a new edge of the positioning signal
the drive is accelerated in the opposite direction of rotation.
3- Positioning ; off The drive is shut down and the power output stage is switched off.
4- Start by time control The drive speed is kept for the Time to wait 464; after the time to wait the drive is accel‐
erated in the previous direction of rotation.
5- Reversal by time control The drive speed is kept for the Time to wait 464; after the time to wait the drive is accel‐
erated in the opposite direction of rotation.
Tab. 78
The position reached can be maintained for the Time to wait 464, before the drive is accelerated according to
operation mode 4 or 5.
Parameters Setting
464 Time to wait 0 ms 3600000 ms 0 ms
Tab. 79
Examples for positioning from a reference point depending on the parameters selected for the factory setting.
Positioning 458 = 1
1
1
0
f
3
2
0
42399044_xml.eps
Fig. 71
(1) Actual value: Digital inputs 250
(2) Actual value: Actual frequency 241
(3) Deceleration 421
● The reference point is detected by a signal at digital input 6 according to the parameter Signal sources 459
in operation mode 16-S6IND, neg. edge.
● The Positioning distance 460 with the parameter value 0.000 r defines an immediate shutdown of the drive
acording to the Operation mode 630 defined in the run-ou behaviour.
● The Signal correction 461 of the signal propagation time from the measuring point to the frequency inverter
is not used due to the value of 0 ms.
● The Load correction 462 can compensate an incorrect positioning by the load characteristic. In the factory
setting the compensation is deactivated with the value 0.
● The Activity after positioning 463 is defined by operation mode 0–End of positioning.
21471644/220808
● The Time to wait 464 is not taken into account in the above setting of the parameter
Activity after positioning 463.
● The actual value Rotations 470 enables direct comparison with the desired Positioning distance 460.
86 In the case of deviations a Signal correction 461 or a Load correction 462 can be carried out.
11.6.3 Axle positioning
An incremental encoder with a reference pulse is required for axle postioning in configuration 210. The signal of the
rotary enoder with reference pulse can be evaluated by means of an optional extension module and operation modes
1004 and 1104. Positioning is effected by a start signal and a drop below an adjustable frequency limit. The motor
stops according to the set run-out behaviour at the positioning angle entered.
For correct functioning of axle positioning, the speed controller should be optimised after guided set-up. This selec‐
tion is described in the chapter "Speed controller".
The angle between the reference point and the desired position is entered via parameter
Reference orientation 469. If this value is modified during shutdown of the motor, positioning is carried out
again at the frequency of 0.5 Hz. For this it is necessary that a run-out behaviour is selected for
Operation mode 630 which applies a starting current permanently during shutdown or during the holding time
(described in the chapter "Stopping behaviour").
Parameters Setting
469 Reference orientation 0,0° 359,9° 0,0°
Tab. 80
DANGER
Change of the direction of rotation during positioning

During positioning the direction of rotation of the drive may change, independent of whether the command start
clockwise or start anti-clockwise has been activated.
Positioning is started by means of a start command from a signal souce (e.g. digital input), which must be allocated
to parameter Start positioning of axle 37. The signal source can be selected from the operation modes
for digital inputs described in the chapter "Digtal inputs", ⇒ "Digital inputs", Page 135
Positioning starts provided that the Actual frequency 241 of the output signal is smaller than the value entered
in parameter Positioning frequency 471 eingetragene Wert ist. Due to a run-out behaviour the actual fre‐
quency falls below the positioning frequency.
Parameters Setting
471 Positioning Frequency 1.00 Hz 50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz
Tab. 81
By means of the parameter Max positional error 472 the max. permissible deviation from the value of the
Reference orientation 469 can be set.
Parameters Setting
472 Max positional error 0,1° 90,0° 3,0°
Tab. 82
The time constant for compensating the positional error can be set via parameter
Time constant positioning contr. 479. The value for the time constant should be increased, if oscillations
of the drive occur during positioning around the reference orientation.
Parameters Setting
479 Time constant positioning contr. 1.00 ms 9999.99 ms 20.00 ms
Tab. 83
In order to ensure that the set position is held under the influence of a load torque, a run-out behaviour should be
21471644/220808
selected for parameter Operation mode 630, which applies a starting current permanently during shutdown or
during the holding time.
87
The status message „60-Arrived at desired Position“ when the reference orientation has been reached can be allo‐
cated to a digital output. The message is output under the following conditions:
● Operation mode 2 (axle positioning) has been selected for parameter Operation mode 458.
● The controller enable on digital input S1IND is switched on.
● The Start positioning of axle 37 is activated.
● Encoder monitoring is activated, i.e. operation mode 2 (error message) for the Operation mode 760 parameter
of encoder monitoring is selected.
● Operation mode 1004 or 1104 (quadruple evaluation with reference pulse) is selected for the rotary encoder input.
● The Actual frequency 241 is smaller than 1 Hz.
● The deviation of the current position from the reference orientation is smaller than the
Max. positional error 472.
The current position after Start positioning of axle 37 is detected by the frequency inverter as follows:
● During the set-up, after the frequency inverter has been switched on, a search run over 3 revolutions at a rotating
frequency of 1 Hz is carried out to detect the reference signal. After the reference signal has been detected two
times, positioning to the Reference orientation 469 is effected.
● If the motor was already rotating before axle positioning has been started, positioning to the
reference orientation 469 is effected without the search run, since the position of the reference point was
already detected by the frequency inverter.
If positioning is effected after the controller enable and starting command from standstill of the motor:
● The motor is positioned to the reference orientation at clockwise rotation, if the value for the reference orientation
is higher than the value set before.
● The motor is positioned to the reference orientation at anti-clockwise rotation, if the value for the reference ori‐
entation is smaller than the value set before.
The direction of rotation during positioning is independent of whether start clockwise or start anti-clockwise has been
activated.
The time until reaching the reference orientation depends on:

● Actual frequency
● Frequency ramp for deceleration
● Angle of rotation up to reference orientation
● Max positional error
● Time constant positioning contr. 21471644/220808
88
11.7 Brake control
11.7.1 General
t2 t3 A t4
t1 t5
42399144_xml.eps
Fig. 72
1 fref t1 Brake release delay 824
2 Release brake t2 Start delay 820
3 PWM t3 DC pre-magnetisation time 821
4 S2IND t4 DC post-magnetisation time 822
A Integrator operation t5 Brake application time 825

Tab. 84
The starting and stopping of the drive can be controlled by means of different functions. The diagram shows the
interplay as a function of time.
The individual functions are described in the following sections.
11.7.2 Start delay
This function delays the internal travel signal by the time set. During this time modulation is still being switched off.
Parameters Setting
820 Start delay 0 ms 1000 ms 0 ms
Tab. 85
21471644/220808
89
11.7.3 DC pre-magnetisation time
With the field-oriented regulation the speed is set to 0 between start delay and integrator operation for the time set.
With the V/f characteristic a direct voltage is output between start delay and integrator operation for the time set,
⇒ "Starting behaviour", Page 80.
Parameters Setting
821 DC pre-magnetisation time 0 ms 1000 ms 0 ms
Tab. 86
11.7.4 DC post-magnetization time
t VZ
1
t GS
tB
42399244_xml.eps
Fig. 73
1 Output frequency tB Brake application time
2 SW step 1+ tVZ Delay time
3 "Release brake" message tGS DC post-magnetization time
4 "Modulation on" message

Tab. 87
With the field-oriented regulation the speed is set to 0 after the integrator operation for the time set.
With the V/f characteristic a direct voltage is output after the integrator operation for the time set, ⇒ "DC magneti‐
sation", Page 81.
Parameters Setting
822 DC post-magnetization time 0.0 ms 10.0 ms 0.0 ms
Tab. 88
The diagram shows the effect of the post-magnetization time. For the set time, the inverter supplies a DC voltage
to the amount of 1½ times the “Characteristic boost for f = 0” parameter when the deceleration phase is finished.
This causes the motor to exhibit eddy-current braking characteristics. The calculation of the cut-off value on the basis
of the brake application time and deceleration time also considers the post-magnetization time. Therefore, the me‐
chanical brake is only applied at the end of the post-magnetization time.
21471644/220808
11.7.5 Brake release delay
Starting with the DC pre-magnetization time 821 the Brake release delay 824 is started. Thus the digital
"Release brake" message can be delayed.
90
Parameters Setting
824 Brake release delay 0 ms 5000 ms 0 ms
Tab. 89
11.7.6 Brake application time
The Brake application time 825 must be set to the actual response time of the brake.
Parameters Setting
825 Brake application time 0 ms 2000 ms 100 ms
Tab. 90
The inverter calculates an internal frequency cut-off value on the basis of the brake application time and the decel‐
eration ramp. This also considers a programmed DC post-magnetization time parameter. At the moment the setpoint
value is switched off, the inverter compares the actual output frequency with the calculated cut-off value. In principle,
there are 3 possibilities as shown in cases 1 to 3.
Case 1: The brake application time is shorter than the remaining deceleration time
t VZ
1
tB
42399344_xml.eps
Fig. 74 Case 1: The brake application time is shorter than the remaining deceleration time
1 Output frequency 5 Calculated cut-off value

2 SW step 1+ tB Brake application time
3 "Release brake" message tVZ Delay time
4 "Modulation on" message

Tab. 91
In case 1, the brake application time is shorter than the remaining deceleration time. The "Release brake" signal is
switched off as soon as the value drops below the cut-off value.. The brake is no longer excited and the mechanical
brake starts to brake when its application time has elapsed. If the brake application time is correctly programmed,
the ramp is at zero at the same moment and the modulation is switched off.
21471644/220808
91
Case 2: The brake application time is longer than the remaining deceleration time
tVZ
1
tGS
tB
5
42399444_xml.eps
Fig. 75 Case 2: The brake application time is longer than the remaining deceleration time
1 Output frequency 5 Calculated cut-off value

4 "Modulation on" message tGS DC post-magnetization time

Tab. 92
In case 2, the brake application time is longer than the remaining deceleration time. The "Release brake" signal is
switched off immediately and the inverter calculates a DC post-magnetization time. The output frequency decreases
to zero at the ramp and the modulation then remains switched on. For the calculated DC post-magnetization time,
the inverter supplies a DC voltage to the amount of 1½ times the “"Characteristic boost for f = 0" parameter. This
causes the motor to exhibit eddy-current braking characteristics until the mechanical brake engages.
Case 3: The brake application time is interrupted by an integrator stop, for example
tVZ
1
tGS
tB
5
21471644/220808
42399544_xml.eps
Fig. 76 Case 3: The brake application time is interrupted by an integrator stop, for example
92
1 Output frequency 6 Integrator stop
4 "Modulation on" message tGS DC post-magnetization time
5 Calculated cut-off value

Tab. 93
Case 3 shows an interrupted brake application time. The cause of this may be another valid setpoint or an integrator
stop due to an overload. In both cases, the calculation is restarted as in case 2. The DC post-magnetization time is
extended correspondingly.
11.8 Load spectrum calculation
11.8.1 General
Hoist units are classified corresponding to their planned mode of operation in groups of mechanisms according to
operating time and load spectra and dimensioned according to the resulting loads (DIN 15020; ISO4301/1; FEM
1.001; FEM 9.511; FEM 9.755).
Therefore, they are only rated for a limited duration of service.
Classification is carried out on the basis of

● the planned total duration of service of the hoist unit
● the load, loading and stress spectra that the hoist unit is exposed to.
When the total duration of service has expired, measures must be taken in which components are checked and
replaced as specified by the manufacturer. A new available duration of service is then specified.
The load spectrum calculation is designed to enable the actual duration of service to be calculated at all times and
displayed as a reference for the total duration of service. When 90% of the total duration of service has expired, the
frequency inverter displays a warning that is designed to remind the hoist operator of the corresponding maintenance
measures.

● The hoist operator bears sole responsibility for ensuring that maintenance is carried out in good time.
● Before the load spectrum calculation is carried out, the Lifting correction factor and Lowering correction factor
parameters must be adjusted.
● This adjustment must be carried out when the motor is warmed up for operation.
● The following sections must be followed exactly.
Parameters 830, 831, 832, 833, 835 are not changed if Load spectrum calculation (Para. 830 = 1) is active when
the default is set (via parameter 34 = 4444) ⇒ "Programming", Page 74! This means that the Load spectrum cal‐
culation is active with the previous settings when the unit is reset to the default settings. However, it must be
considered that the load spectrum calculation will no longer function correctly after the default values have been set,
as the motor data (P rated, n rated) may have changed.
If parameters are transferred to the Parcom Compact using the parameter copy function of the KP500 control unit
or with the “Load parameter values from file” function, the load spectrum calculation is activated if the necessary
conditions are satisfied.
11.8.2 Load spectrum calculation mode

0- Off (factory setting) Load spectrum calculation is switched off.
1- On Load spectrum calculation is switched on.
Tab. 94
21471644/220808
Load spectrum calculation is switched off by default by means of Operation mode 830.
The function can only be activated when the Theoretical duration of service 831 is greater than 0.
93
When programming parameters via a PC with the Parcom Compact software, the "Read inverter information" func‐
tion must be called up to enable the "1– Activated" selection. Selection "1" can be selected at any time on the KP500
operating unit if the given conditions are satisfied.
The "Read inverter information" function must be called up again following activation.
None of the load spectrum calculation function parameters can be changed after load spectrum calculation has been
activated by means of Operation mode 830! This means that the function itself cannot be deactivated.

● Therefore, the load spectrum parameters must be set and adjusted before the load spectrum calculation function
is activated.
● It can only be deactivated by the Demag Customer Service department.
The Actual duration of service 835 is calculated after the function is activated. The LOAD SPECTRUM
warning is displayed when the Actual duration of service 835 reaches 90% of the
Theoretical duration of service 831. This warning remains on until the
Actual duration of service 835 drops below 90% of the Theoretical duration of service 831
again.
When the specified maintenance work has been carried out, the Actual duration of service 835 can be set
to 0 by the Demag Customer Service department.
11.8.3 Theoretical duration of service
Provided the load spectrum calculation has not yet been activated, the number of full load hours can be specified
according to the FEM classification by means of the Theoretical duration of service 831 parameter.
The load spectrum calculation can only be activated (parameter 830 = 1) when the
Theoretical duration of service 831 is greater than 0. This prevents unintended activation.
Parameters Setting
831 Theoretical duration of service 0.0 hours 100,000.0 hours 0.0 hours
Tab. 95
11.8.4 Lifting correction factor
Lifting correction factor 832 represents the relationship between the rated torque of the motor and the
torque of the motor required to lift the rated load of the hoist unit. Lifting correction factor 832 is included
in the calculation of the Actual duration of service 835. The Lifting correction factor 832 pa‐
rameter can only be changed if the load spectrum calculation has not yet been activated.
The "Lifting" direction of operation must be activated with the "SW-Step 1+" input.

● Lifting correction factor 832 must be adjusted when the motor is warmed up for operation before the
load spectrum calculation function is activated.
To do this, a defined load must be suspended from the hoist unit. This load should approximately correspond to the
rated load of the hoist unit. The ratio of this load to the rated load must be determined.
Lifting correction factor 832 must be set in such a way that the Relative torque 837 actual value
corresponds to the ratio determined during the lifting operation.
Parameters Setting
832 Lifting correction factor 30% 200% 100%
Tab. 96
21471644/220808
11.8.5 Lowering correction factor
Lowering correction factor 833 represents the relationship between the rated torque of the motor and the
94 torque of the motor required to lower the rated load of the hoist unit. Lowering correction factor 833 is
included in the calculation of the Actual duration of service 835. The
Lowering calculation factor 833 parameter can only be changed if the load spectrum calculation has not
yet been activated.
The "Lowering" direction of operation must be activated with the "SW-Step 1-" input.

● Lowering correction factor 833 must be adjusted when the motor is warmed up for operation before
the load spectrum calculation function is activated.
To do this, a defined load must be suspended from the hoist unit. This load should approximately correspond to the
rated load of the hoist unit. The ratio of this load to the rated load must be determined.
Lowering correction factor 833 must be set in such a way that the Relative torque 837 actual value
corresponds to the ratio determined during the lowering operation.
Parameters Setting
833 Lowering correction factor 30% 200% 100%
Tab. 97
11.8.6 Duration of service specification
The Actual duration of service 835 can be pre-set via the Duration of service specification
834 parameter. It may be necessary to specify the parameter for replacement or additional units or if an incorrect
value has been entered. Actual duration of service 835 can only be specified if the load spectrum calcu‐
lation has not yet been activated.
Parameters Setting
834 Duration of service specification 0.0 hours 100,000.0 hours 0.0 hours
Tab. 98
11.8.7 Actual duration of service
Actual duration of service 835 is an actual value parameter and reflects the current duration of service in
full load hours. The value of the Actual duration of service 835 is 0 before the load spectrum calculation
is activated.
The actual values can be read out and monitored in the VAL menu branch of the operating unit.
A further "Absolute duration of service" value is calculated for monitoring. The calculation of the "Absolute duration
of service" corresponds to the calculation of the Actual duration of service 835.
However, the "Absolute duration of service" cannot be reset or reduced. It can only be read by the DCC Customer
Service department under number 890. This makes it possible to establish whether the
Actual duration of service 835 has been reset by means of the
Duration of service specification 834 parameter, e.g. following maintenance of the hoist unit.
If the load spectrum calculation is activated, and the Duration of service specification 834 is larger than
the internal "Absolute duration of service", the "Absolute duration of service" is increased to the value of
Duration of service specification 834.
11.8.8 Remaining service life
Remaining service life 836 provides the owner of the hoist unit with information for a due maintenance
deadline. The inverter displays the "Load spectrum" warning at 10%. A general overhaul must be carried out at no
later than 0 %.
21471644/220808
95
11.8.9 Relative torque
The Relative torque 837 actual value must be used to adjust the Lifting correction factor 832 and
Lowering correction factor 833 parameters. The read value must correspond to the ratio of hoist unit actual
load to rated load.
11.8.10 Ramp factor
During the acceleration and deceleration ramps a ramp factor 838 is applied to the calculated load spectrum.
The dynamic shares occurring with very steep ramps are only partially applied to the load spectrum, if the value set
is smaller than 1.00.
Parameters Setting
838 Ramp factor 0,30 1,00 1,00
Tab. 99
11.9 Limit switch functions
11.9.1 Reference value limitation
5
6
7
42399644_xml.eps
Fig. 77
1 (SOSP) acceleration 062 5 Minimum frequency 418

2 SW-Step 1+ 068 6 Setpoint val. limit 1+ 871
3 Fast to slow limit switch limitation 1+ 803 7 Direction of travel for positive frequency
4 Maximum frequency 419
21471644/220808
Limitation of the setpoint value is activated when the relevant digital input is logically OFF when the fast-to-slow limit
switch is approached (input open).
96
If no fast-to-slow limit switches are wired, the input parameters
Fast to slow limit switch limitation 1+ 803, Fast to slow limit switch limitation 1-
804 and Fast to slow limit switch limitation 2 805 must be set to the value "6 - ON", ⇒ "Fast-to-slow
limit switch limitation", Page 138.
The diagram shows setpoint value limitation using an example of control with setpoint memory in the positive direction
and limit 1+.
11.9.2 Setpoint val. limit 1+ and setpoint val. limit 1-
The Fast to slow limit switch limitation 1+ 803 and

Fast to slow limit switch limitation 1- 804 input parameters can be programmed independently of
each other with 2 digital inputs, ⇒ "Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1+ and
fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1-", Page 138.
The limitation is always applied according to the sign, i.e. only the positive setpoint value is limited when the
Fast to slow limit switch limitation 1+ 803 input is logically OFF, and vice versa. The limitation
function is only effective if the current setpoint value is higher than the limitation value. In this case, a programmed
limitation value may also be lower than the value of the first setpoint step (e.g. SOST step 1 480). If the conditions
for the limitation are satisfied, the inverter will decelerate down the current ramp to the limitation value. If the limitation
function is switched off again and a higher setpoint value is required, the inverter will accelerate back up to the
specified setpoint value. However, only to the Minimum frequency 419 value for SOSP.
Parameters Setting
871 Setpoint val. limit 1+ -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 2.00 Hz
872 Setpoint val. limit 1- -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 2.00 Hz
Tab. 100
11.9.3 Setpoint val. limit 2+ and Setpoint val. limit 2-
The Fast to slow limit switch limitation 2 805 input function can be programmed with one digital
input ⇒ "Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 2", Page 139.
If the fast-to-slow limit switch is approached with a frequency greater than 6.00 Hz, it is possible to travel in the
opposite direction out of the fast-to-slow limit switch range without any limitation, provided the inverter has not been
switched off in the meantime.
The limitation function is only effective if the current setpoint value is higher than the limitation value. In this case, a
programmed limitation value may also be lower than the value of the first setpoint step (e.g. SOST step 1 480). If
the conditions for the limitation are satisfied, the inverter will decelerate down the current ramp to the limitation value.
If the limitation function is switched off again and a higher setpoint value is required, the inverter will accelerate back
up to the specified setpoint value. However, only to the Minimum frequency 419 value for SOSP.
Parameters Setting
873 Setpoint val. limit 2+ -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 2.00 Hz
874 Setpoint val. limit 2- -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 2.00 Hz
Tab. 101
11.9.4 Limit switch monitoring frequency
The Operating limit switch + 806 and Operating limit switch - 807 input functions can be pro‐
grammed independently of each other with 2 digital inputs, ⇒ "Operating limit switches", Page 139.
If the Operating limit switch + 806 is approached in positive direction with a frequency higher than the
Limit switch monitoring freq. + 875 or the Operating limit switch- 807 is approached in negative
direction with a frequency higher than Limit switch monitoring freq. - 876, error 1120 "Limit switch mon‐
itoring frequency exceeded" is generated.
21471644/220808
97
Parameters Setting
875 Limit switch 0.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 2.00 Hz
monitoring frequency +
876 Limit switch 0.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 2.00 Hz
monitoring frequency -
Tab. 102
11.9.5 Limit switch status
The State 1 866 to State 4 869 parameters are only needed for system bus applications.
Therefore, for applications without a system bus, the factory setting
"814 – State limit switch"
must remain unchanged.
21471644/220808
98
12 Error and warning behaviour
12.1 General
The operation of the frequency inverter and the connected load is continuously monitored. The monitoring functions
and the associated limit values must be programmed specifically for the application. If the limits are set to values
below the cut-off limit of the frequency inverter, a disconnection on fault can be prevented by corresponding meas‐
ures in the case of a warning message. The warning message is indicated by the LEDs and can be read out via the
operating unit or by means of the Parcom Compact programming software via the parameter Warnings 269 or
output via one of the digital control outputs.
12.2 Overload Ixt

The admissible load characteristic depends on various technical data of the frequency inverters and on the ambient
conditions.
The selected Modulation frequency 400 determines the rated current and the overload being available for ten
or sixty seconds. The associated parameters Warning Limit Short Term Ixt 405 and
Warning Limit Long Term Ixt 406 must also be programmed.
Parameters Setting
405 Warning limit short term Ixt 6% 100% 80%
406 Warning limit long term Ixt 6% 100% 80%
Tab. 103
12.3 Temperature
The ambient conditions and the current working point heat up the frequency inverter. In order to avoid a disconnection
on fault of the frequency inverter, the Warning Limit Heat Sink Temp. 407, for the temperature limit of the
heat sink and the Warning Limit Inside Temp. 408, for the temperature limit inside the frequency inverter
housing can be programmed. The temperature value which is calculated from the limit value depending on the type
minus the set warning limit can be determined from the application data.
The cut-off limit of the frequency inverter is 60 °C - 70 °C inside the frequency inverter housing and 80 °C - 90 °C
for the heat sink.
Parameters Setting
407 Warning Limit Heat Sink Temp. -25 °C 0 °C -5 °C
408 Warning Limit Inside Temp. -25 °C 0 °C -5 °C
Tab. 104
12.4 Controller status

The selected control and regulation process and the associated monitoring functions prevent the disconnection of
the frequency inverter. The action of the function changes the operating behaviour of the application and can be
displayed via status messages by means of the parameter Controller status 275. The limit values and events
that lead to an action of the corresponding controller are described in the corresponding sections. The behaviour in
the case of a controller action is configured by means of the parameter Controller status message 409.
Controller status message 409 Functions

0- No message The controllers which influence the operating behaviour are indicated in the
Controller status 275 parameter.
1- Warning status (Factory setting) The limitation by a controller is indicated as a warning by the operating unit.
21471644/220808
11 - Warning status and LED The limitation by a controller is indicated as a warning by the operating unit and by the LEDs.
Tab. 105
99
12.5 IDC compensation limit
Due to asymmetries the output current of the frequency inverter may contain a DC percentage. This DC percentage
can be compensated by the frequency inverter. Here the maximum output voltage of the compensation is set by
means of the parameter IDC compensation limit 415. If a higher voltage than the set limit is required for
compensating the DC percentage, error "F1301 IDC-COMPENSATION" is triggered.
If this error occurs, the load should be checked for being defective. Under certain circumstances the voltage limit
must be increased.
If the parameter IDC compensation limit 415 is set to zero, the DC compensation is deactivated.
Parameters Setting
415 IDC compensation limit 0.0 V 1.5 V 0.0 V
Tab. 106
12.6 Frequency switch-off limit

The maximum permissible output frequency of the frequency inverter must be set with the
Frequency switch-off limit 417 parameter. If this frequency limit is exceeded by Stator frequency
210, or Actual frequency 241, the frequency inverter switches off and outputs error message "F1100".
For configurations 110 "V/f- characteristic" and 410 "FOR control speed without encoder", encoder 1 can be activated
by means of parameter Operation mode 490 for additional monitoring of the measured actual frequency.
Parameters Setting
417 Frequency switch-off limit 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 100.00 Hz
Tab. 107
12.7 Motor temperature

The monitoring function can be programmed by means of the parameter Motor-PTC Operation Mode 570. In
the operation modes 1 ... 5 a thermal contact is evaluated via a digital input. The integration into the application can
be improved by an operation mode with delayed disconnection, ⇒ "Motor thermal contact", Page 137.

0- Off (factory setting) The monitoring of the motor temperature is not active.
1- Therm.-Cont.: Warning only The critical working point is indicated by the operating unit and the parameter Warnings
269.
2- Therm.-Cont.: Error Switch-Off The disconnection on fault is indicated by message F0400. The disconnection on fault can be
acknowledged via the operating unit or digital input.
3- Therm.-Cont.: Err.Switch-Off 1 min The disconnection on fault corresponding to operation mode 2 is delayed by one minute.
delayed
4- Therm.-Cont.: Err.Switch-Off 5 min The disconnection on fault corresponding to operation mode 2 is delayed by five minutes.
delayed
5- Therm.-Cont.: Err.Switch-Off 10 The disconnection on fault corresponding to operation mode 2 is delayed by ten minutes.
min delayed
Tab. 108
If the EM extension module is plugged in, further operation modes for evaluating a PTC thermistor are available.
See operating instructions of the EM-ENC-02 and EM-I/O-02 extension modules.
21471644/220808
100
12.8 Phase failure
If one of the three phases of the motor or power supply fails, the frequency inverter, the motor and the mechanical
drive components may get damaged, if the phase failure is not noticed. The behaviour in the case of a phase failure
can be set by means of the parameter Phase Supervision 576.

10 - Mains: Error Switch-Off In the case of a phase failure in the power supply, the disconnection is delayed by one minute
(Factory setting) indicating error F0703. During the delay warning message A0100 is displayed.
11 - Mains & Motor: Error Switch-Off The phase supervision disconnects the frequency inverter after one minute indicating error
message F0403 in the case of a motor phase failure and F0703 in the case of a phase failure
in the power supply.
20 - Mains: Shutdown The drive is shut down one minute after a phase failure in the power supply indicating error
F0703.
21 - Mains & Motor: Shutdown This function shuts down the drive immediately in the case of a motor phase failure and after
one minute in the case of a phase failure in the power supply.
Tab. 109
12.9 Automatic error acknowledgement

Automatic error acknowledgement makes it possible to acknowledge the Overcurrent F0500, Overcurrent F0507
and Overvoltage F0700 errors without any intervention by a higher-level control system or a user. If one of the above-
mentioned errors occurs, the frequency inverter cuts off the power semiconductors and waits for the time set with
the parameter Restart Delay 579. If the error has to be acknowledged, the motor speed is determined by means
of the Quick Synchronisation function and synchronised with the rotating machine. Automatic error acknowledge‐
ment uses the Quick Synchronisation operation mode independent of the Operation mode 645 parameter setting.
Please note the information on the search run function. The number of errors to be acknowledged within ten minutes
is set by means of the parameter Allowed no. of auto-acknowl. 578. The above-mentioned errors have a
separate counter so that a new acknowledgement above the admissible number within ten minutes leads to the
direct disconnection of the frequency inverter.
Parameters Setting
578 Allowed no. of auto-acknowl. 0 20 0
579 Restart delay 0 ms 1000 ms 20 ms
Tab. 110
12.10 Frequency monitoring

The parameter Frequency monitoring 468 determines the reaction of the frequency inverter to differences
between the output of the ramp and the actual frequency.
Frequency monitoring 468 Functions

1- Max. frequency deviation When the value of parameter Max. frequency deviation 429 is exceeded, an error is signalled,
Factory setting for configuration ⇒ "Max. frequency deviation", Page 102
210
2- Max. leading The difference is limited by means of the parameter Maximum Leading 426, ⇒ "Frequency Ramps",
Factory setting for all other con‐ Page 110
figurations
Tab. 111
21471644/220808
101
12.11 Max. frequency deviation
The function is only activated for configuration 210 as factory setting.
By means of the parameter Max. frequency deviation 429 a tolerance range is established around the current
output frequency of the ramp (integrator). If the difference between the integrator and the current actual frequency
of the motor exceeds the max. frequency deviation, this will result in the disconnection on fault F1102 = "Max.
frequency deviation".
This function is only active, when the rotary encoder is de-activated and modulation is switched on.
This function is also active, when the rotary encoder is activated and modulation is switched off.
If one of the rotary encoders is activated in configurations without encoder, the rotary encoder frequency is evaluated
as actual frequency instead of the rotor frequency calculated internally.
Parameters Setting
429 Max. frequency deviation 0.01 Hz 15.00 Hz 10.00 Hz
Tab. 112
21471644/220808
102
13 Reference values
13.1 General
Dedrive Compact frequency inverters can be configured specifically to the application and allow to adapt the modular
hardware and software structure to the requirements of the customer.
13.2 Frequency Limits

The speed range and thus the output frequency of the frequency inverter is defined by the parameters
Minimum frequency 418 and Maximum frequency 419. The corresponding control and regulation processes
use the two limit values for scaling and limiting the frequency.
Parameters Setting
Tab. 113
The torque-forming current component and thus the slip frequency of the asynchronous machine depend on the
required torque. The field-oriented regulating processes additionally include the parameter Slip limit 719 for
limiting the torque in the calculation of the machine model. The rated slip calculated from the rated motor data is
limited according to the percentage set by the parameter Slip limit 719.
Parameters Setting
719 Slip limit 0% 10000% 330%
Tab. 114
13.3 Percentage Limits

Percentage limits only apply to configurations with torque regulation.
The control range of the percentages is defined by the parameters Minimum reference percentage 518 and
Maximum reference percentage 519. The corresponding control and regulation processes use the two limit
values for scaling and limiting the percentages.
Parameters Setting
518 Minimum reference percentage 0,00% 300,00% 0,00%
519 Maximum reference percentage 0,00% 300,00% 100,00%
Tab. 115
13.4 Reference frequency channel
13.4.1 General
The various functions for specifying the reference frequency in the speed-controlled configurations are combined in
the reference frequency channel. The Drive control 475 determines the additive linkage of the available refer‐
ence value sources depending on the hardware installed.
Control 475 Functions

1 to 21 Operation modes with absolute value function
1- Analog MFI1A The reference value source is the multi-function input 1 in Operation mode 452 - voltage
input.
21471644/220808
⇒ "Analog input MFI1A", Page 122

10 - SOST Absolute value of reference value steps according to the input functions (SOST) Step 2
066 and (SOST) Step 3/4 067
⇒ "SOST reference value steps", Page 108
103
Control 475 Functions
11 - SOST + analog MFI1A Adds operation modes 10 and 1
20 - SOSP The setpoint source is the function setpoint memory (SOSP) Acceleration 62
⇒ "SOSP reference value memory", Page 114
21 - SOSP + analog MFI1A Adds operation modes 20 and 1
101 - 111 As operation mode 1 to 11, however with sign
Tab. 116
When the EM-I/O-02 or EM-ENC-02 extension module is plugged in, there are further possible selections. See
operating instructions of the extension modules.
13.4.2 Table of switch positions
The following table describes the software switches shown in the block diagram depending on the selected
Drive control 475.
Switch position in the block diagram

Operation mode MFI1A FF MP EM-S1INA F3 Sign
1 1 Absolute value
2 1 Absolute value
4 1 1 Absolute value
10 1 Absolute value
14 1 1 1 Absolute value
20 1 Absolute value
24 1 1 1 Absolute value
32 1 Absolute value6)
101 1 +/-
110 1 +/-
111 1 1 +/-
Tab. 117
EM-S1INA only with extension module

21471644/220808
104 6) only in the manual mode

21471644/220808
13.4.3
Frequenzsollwertkanal ProHub-Funktion
Ansteuerung 475 Betriebsartt 850
Folgefrequenz
Block diagram
F3 Betrag 0
0
S2IND % 0
Jrel.
S3IND 1
f
S6IND Sperrfrequenzen Frequenzgrenzen ProHub-Funktion
1
fmax fmax
Betriebsart 496
+ f2
Teiler 497
+ f1 fmin fmin
SOST-
Stufe... FF Min. Frequenz 418 GŸltige Maximal-
Festfrequenz 0 + Max. Frequenz 419 frequenz 861
1 480 - f1
2 481
3 482 - f2
1
4 483
SOST-Stufe 2 66 1. Sperrfrequenz 447 Endschalter- Frequenzrampen
Fig. 78 Block diagram of the reference frequency channel

SOST-Stufe 3/4 67 2. Sperrfrequenz 448 funktionen
Frequenz-Hysterese 449
Sollwertspeichern
(SOSP) MP
Beschleunigen 62 0 Start / Stop /
Max. Drehrichtungsauswahl
Zusatzsollwert Sollfrequenz intern 228
Min. 1
00 0 0
Sollwert (SOSP) f max +
ungŸltig Verzšgern 63 50 11 Frequenzsollwert
MFI1A 53 f max -
+ -1
Multifunktion 0
481 SW-Stufe 1+ 68
analog SW-Stufe 1- 69
1 P. 842 P. 844
MFI1 P. 841 P. 802 P. 840 P. 843 P. 845
digital
Betriebsendschalter aktiv
Betriebsart 452 1 1
S1INA 0 0
EM-S1INA (optional)
0
I
P. 800 P. 801
EM- 1
S1INA U
P. 847 P. 848
Betriebsart 562
42399744DE_xml.eps
105
13.5 Reference percentage channel
13.5.1 General
The reference percentage channel only applies to configurations with torque regulation.
The reference percentage channel combines different signal sources to specify the reference values. The scaling
in percent facilitates the integration into the application taking different process variables into account.
The Reference percentage source 476 determines the additive linkage of the available reference value sour‐
ces depending on the hardware installed.
Operation mode Functions

1- Abs. Analog Value MFI1A The reference value source is multi-function input 1 in Operation mode 452 - analog signal.
10 - Abs. Fix. Perc. Val. (FP) The percentage according to the Fixed percent change-over 1 75,
Fixed percent change-over 2 76 and the current data set, ⇒ "Fixed percentage values",
Page 109
11 - Abs. Value MFI1A + FP Combination of operation modes 10 and 1
20 - Abs. Val. Motorpoti (MP) The reference value source is the function Percent motor poti up 72 und
Percent motor poti down 73
21 - Abs. Value MFI1A + MP Combination of operation modes 20 and 1

32 - Abs. Val. Rep. Freq. Input (F3) The frequency signal on the digital input acc. to Operation mode 496
101 - 132 Operation modes with sign (+/-)

Tab. 118
When the EM-I/O-02 or EM-ENC-02 extension module is plugged in, there are further possible selections. See
operating instructions of the extension modules.
13.5.2 Table of switch positions
The following table describes the software switches shown in the block diagram depending on the selected
Reference percentage source 476.
Switch position in the block diagram

Operation mode MFI1A FP MP F3 Sign
1 1 Absolute value
10 1 Absolute value
20 1 Absolute value
32 1 Absolute value
101 1 +/-
110 1 +/-
111 1 1 +/-
120 1 +/-
121 1 1 +/-
132 1 +/-
Tab. 119
21471644/220808
106
21471644/220808
13.5.3
Prozentsollwertkanal
Block diagram
Prozentsollwertquelle 476
Folgefrequenz
0 F3
S2IND % 0
Jrel.
S3IND
f
S6IND
1
Betriebsart 496
Teiler 497
Motorpoti
Prozent-Motorpoti MP
AUF 72 0
Fig. 79 Block diagram of the reference percentage channel

Max. Betrag Start / Stop /
Drehrichtungsauswahl
Min. 1 Prozentsollwert 229
Prozent-Motorpoti Prozentwertgrenzen
0
AB 73 %max
MFI1A + Prozentsollwert
0 -1
Multifunktion %min
analog Min. Prozentwert 518

Max. Prozentwert 519 SW-Stufe 1+ 68
1 SW-Stufe 1- 69
MFI1
digital
Betriebsart 452
FP
Festprozentwert
0
Festprozentwert 1 520
Festprozentwert 3 522 1
Umschaltung 1 75
Umschaltung 2 76
42399844DE_xml.eps
107
13.6 Fixed reference values
13.6.1 General
Fixed reference values can be programmed as reference value steps or fixed percentages according to the config‐
uration and function.
The signs of the fixed reference values determine the direction of rotation. A positive sign means a clockwise rotating
field and a negative sign means an anti-clockwise rotating field. The direction of rotation can only be reversed by
means of the sign, if the Drive control 475, or Reference percentage source 476 is set to an operation
mode with sign (+/-). The direction of rotation can additionally be specified by means of the digital signal sources
linked with the parameters SW-Step 1+ 68 and SW-Step 1- 69.
Fixed reference values can be programmed in four data sets and are linked with further sources via the reference
value channel. Thus the functions Data Set Change-Over 1 70 and Data Set Change-Over 2 71 can be
used for setting 16 fixed reference values.
13.6.2 SOST reference value steps
The four reference value steps define reference values which are selected via SW-Step 1+ 68 or SW-Step 1-
69 , as well as (SOST) Step 2 66 and (SOST) Step 3/4 67, ⇒ "SOST reference value step change-over",
Page 137
Operating principle: General information
All reference step functions are activated when current flows through the relevant input. The input signals are filtered
by the hardware and software.
To obtain a valid reference value, an edge from "off" to "on" must be created following the ready for operation signal.
Edge evaluation is only possible if the inverter is ready for operation. Edge signals given too early will not be detected
and have to be repeated.
Reference value step function
2, 3 or 4 reference value steps can be selected. Depending on the number selected, various inputs are available for
other functions.
The steps do not work on the basis of summation. A lower value may be programmed to a higher step than for a
lower one. The current reference value is always specified by the highest step that is switched on.
When the first step SW-Step 1+ 68 is applied, the inverter accelerates up the Acceleration 420 ramp to the
frequency value programmed for SOST step 1 480. If a further step is applied to the SW-Step 1+ 68 input, the
inverter will accelerate or decelerate to the corresponding programmed speed. The signal must remain applied to
the SW-Step 1+ 68 input for activating higher steps.
If no signal is applied to the SW-Step 1+ 68 input any longer, the inverter will decelerate down the current ramp to
0 and will switch off the output stage.
If a signal is applied for the opposite direction SW-Step 1- 69 before zero is reached, the inverter will accelerate
in the opposite direction after reaching 0 without switching off the "Release brake" message.
The reference value step function works in the "-" direction in the same way.
If both SW-Step 1+ 68 and SW-Step 1– 69 inputs are activated simultaneously, the inverter will evaluate this
status as an invalid reference value. The reaction is determined by the Operation mode 630 parameter of the run-
out behaviour function.
SOST parameters
Parameters Setting
68 SW step 1+ 71 – S2IND
21471644/220808
69 SW-Step 1 - 72 – S3IND
66 (SOST) Step 2 75 – S6IND
67 (SOST) Step 3/4 7 - Off
108
Parameters Setting
480 SOST step 1 -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 5.00 Hz
481 SOST step 2 -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 50.00 Hz
482 SOST step 3 -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 5.00 Hz
483 SOST step 4 -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 5.00 Hz
Tab. 120
See also ⇒ "SOST reference value step change-over", Page 137
13.6.3 JOG frequency
The JOG function forms part of the functions for controlling the drive via the KP 500 operating unit. The JOG fre‐
quency can be modified within the function by means of the arrow keys. The drive starts and the motor rotates at
the set JOG-Frequency 489. If the JOG frequency has been modified by means of the arrow keys, this value is
stored, ⇒ "Controlling the motor via the operating unit", Page 60
Parameters Setting
489 JOG frequency -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 5.00 Hz
Tab. 121
13.6.4 Fixed percentage values
Fixed percentages only apply to configurations with torque regulation. The four percentages define reference values
which are selected via the Fixed Percent Change-Over 1 75 and Fixed Percent Change-Over 2 76.
The Reference percentage source 476 defines the addition of the different sources in the reference percent‐
age channel.
Parameters Setting
520 Fixed percentage 1 -300,00% 300,00% 0,00%
Tab. 122
⇒ "Fixed percentage value change-over", Page 137

21471644/220808
109
13.7 Frequency Ramps
Frequency ramp
+f
max
1
421 (RDECR) /
420 (RACCR)
424 (RDNCR)
2 423 (RDECL) /
422 (RACCL) 425 (RDNCL)
-f
max
42399944_xml.eps
Fig. 80
1 Clockwise rotation
2 Anti-clockwise rotation
The internal reference value from the reference frequency channel and the line reference value of a bus control can
be lead to the ramp as individual or added variable. The setting is via the parameter Ramp setpoint 434.
Ramp setpoint 434 Functions

1- Internal Setpoint The source is the frequency reference value generated internally.
2- Line Setpoint The source is the reference value specified by a bus control.
3- Internal + Line Setpoint (Factory Addition of the internal reference value and the line reference value.
setting)
Tab. 123
The ramps determine how fast the frequency value is modified after a reference value has been changed or after a
start, stop or brake command. The maximum permissible ramp steepness must be selected corresponding to the
application and the motor power consumption.
If the frequency ramps for both directions of rotation are set equally, programming by means of the parameters
Acceleration 420 and Deceleration 421. The values of the frequency ramps
Acceleration anticlockwise 422 and Deceleration anticlockwise 423 are taken over, if these are
programmed to the factory setting of -0.01 Hz/s.
The parameter value 0.00 Hz/s for the acceleration blocks the corresponding direction of rotation.
21471644/220808
110
Parameters Setting
420 Acceleration 0.00 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 10.00 Hz/s
421 Deceleration 0.01 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 10.00 Hz/s
422 Acceleration anticlockwise - 0.01 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s - 0.01 Hz/s
423 Deceleration anticlockwise - 0.01 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s - 0.01 Hz/s
Tab. 124
The ramps for the Emergency stop clockwise 424 and Emergency stop anticlockwise 425 of the drive
which must be activated via the Operation mode 630 must be selected according to the application. The non-
linear (S-shaped) curve of the ramps is not active in the case of an emergency stop of the drive.
Parameters Setting
424 Emergency stop clockwise 0.01 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 30.00 Hz/s
425 Emergency stop anticlockwise 0.01 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 30.00 Hz/s
Tab. 125
The parameter Maximum Leading 426 limits the difference between the output of the ramp and the current actual
value of the drive. The set maximum difference is a dead time for the regulation process and should be selected as
low as possible.
Parameters Setting
426 Maximum leading 0.01 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s
Tab. 126
The load occurring with a linear acceleration of the drive is reduced by the speeds of change to be set (S-shaped
curve). The non-linear frequency curve is defined as a ramp rise or fall and specifies in which time range the fre‐
quency is lead to the set ramp. The values set by means of the parameters 420 to 423 are maintained independent
on the selected ramp rise or fall times.
If the ramp rise or fall time is set to 0 ms, the S-shaped curve function is deactivated and enables the linear ramps
to be used. The data set change-over of the parameters during one acceleration phase of the drive requires the
defined transfer of values. The control calculates the values necessary for reaching the reference values from the
ratio of the acceleration to the ramp rise or fall time and uses these values until the acceleration phase is completed.
This procedure avoids the reference values being exceeded and makes it possible to switch between data sets with
extremely different values.
Parameters Setting
430 Ramp rise time clockwise 0 ms 65000 ms 0 ms
431 Ramp fall time clockwise 0 ms 65000 ms 0 ms
432 Ramp rise time anticlockwise 0 ms 65000 ms 0 ms
433 Ramp fall time anticlockwise 0 ms 65000 ms 0 ms
Tab. 127
21471644/220808
111
430 ((RRTR) 431 (RFTR)
+fmax
1
3
t
taufr
2
tauf
-fmax
432 (RRTL) 433 (RFTL)
43200444_xml.eps
Fig. 81
1 Clockwise rotation 2 Anti-clockwise rotation

3 Frequency reference value = 0.00 Hz
Example:
Calculation of the acceleration time for a clockwise rotating field with an acceleration from 20 Hz to 50 Hz (fmax)
and an Acceleration 420 of 2 Hz/s. The Ramp rise time clockwise 430 is set to 100 ms.
f
t aufr =
RACCR
t aufr =
50Hz - 20Hz = 15s
2Hz/s
t auf = t aufr + RRTR
t auf = 15s + 100ms = 15,1s

43200544_xml.eps
Fig. 82
tauftr Acceleration time clockwise rotating field
∆f Frequency change acceleration ramp

RACCR Acceleration
21471644/220808
RRTR Ramp rise time clockwise

Tab. 128
112
13.8 Percentage ramps
Fixed percentage ramps only apply to configurations with torque regulation.
The percentage ramps scale the change of reference values in percent for the corresponding input function. The
acceleration and deceleration of the drive are programmed via the frequency ramps.
The characteristic Gradient percentage ramp 477 corresponds to a function which takes the time response of
the drive system into account. When the parameter is set to 0 %/s, this function is deactivated, which leads to a
direct change of the reference value for the following function.
The factory-set value depends on Configuration 30.
Parameters Setting
477 Gradient percentage ramp 0%/s 60,000%/s 10%/s
Tab. 129
13.9 Blocking frequencies
3 3
2
fsperr
fsperr - 3 fsperr + 3
43200644_xml.eps
Fig. 83
1 Reference value output 2 Internal reference value

3 Hysteresis
In certain applications it is necessary to block reference frequencies, which avoids that points of resonance of the
installation are used as stationary working points. The parameters 1st blocking frequency 447 and
2nd blocking frequency 448 with the parameter Frequency hysteresis 449 define two points of reso‐
21471644/220808
nance.
A blocking frequency is active, when the parameter values of the blocking frequency and the frequency hysteresis
are unequal to 0.00 Hz.
113
The area blocked by the hysteresis as stationary working point is passed as quickly as possible according to the set
ramp. If the selected setting of the controller parameters results in a limitation of the output frequency, e.g. by
reaching the current limit, the hysteresis is passed with a delay. The behaviour of the reference value can be de‐
termined from its direction of movement in the diagram shown above.
Parameters Setting
447 1. blocking frequency 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 0.00 Hz
448 2. blocking frequency 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 0.00 Hz
449 Frequency hysteresis 0.00 Hz 100.00 Hz 0.00 Hz
Tab. 130
13.10 SOSP reference value memory
13.10.1 Operating principle: General information
All reference value memory functions are activated when current flows through the relevant input. The input signals
are filtered by the hardware and software.
To obtain a valid reference value, an edge from "off" to "on" must be created following the ready for operation signal.
Edge evaluation is only possible if the inverter is ready for operation. Edge signals given too early will not be detected
and have to be repeated.
Reference value memory function
This reference value creation function is specially designed for use with 2-stage pushbuttons. A 2-stage pushbutton
is required for each direction of rotation. The first step actuates the SW-step 1+ 68 or SW-step 1– 69 input. The
second step actuates the relevant (SOSP) Acceleration 62 input.
When the first step SW-Step 1+ 68 is applied, the inverter accelerates up Acceleration 420 ramp to the value
of parameter Min. frequency 418. If a signal is applied to the (SOSP) Accelerate 682 input in addition to the
SW-Step 1+ 62 input, the inverter will continue to accelerate up the acceleration 420 ramp. Acceleration can
be interrupted by switching off the signal at the (SOSP) Acceleration 62 input. If the signal remains applied to
the SW-Step 1+ 68 input, the inverter will save the current frequency reference value to memory. The acceleration
operation can be continued at any time until the Max. frequency 419 parameter value is reached.
The signal applied to the SW-Step 1+ 68 input must be switched off to start decelerating. The inverter will then
reduce its frequency down the Deceleration 421 ramp. If the SW-Step 1+ 68 input is activated once more, the
inverter will save the current frequency to memory, but only if it is still higher than the Min. frequency 48 parameter
value. If the current value is lower than the Min. frequency 418 parameter value, the inverter will accelerate to
the Min. frequency 418 parameter value. Frequency values between 0 and Min. frequency 418 cannot be
achieved with this reference value control when stationary.
If the SW-Step 1+ 68 signal remains switched off, the inverter will reach zero and switch off the output stage.
If a signal is applied for the opposite direction SW-step 1– 69 before zero is reached, the inverter will accelerate
in the opposite direction after reaching 0 without switching off the "Release brake" signal.
The "–" direction of rotation works in the same way.
If both SW-step 1+ 68 and SW-step 1– 69 inputs are activated simultaneously, the inverter will evaluate this
status as an invalid setpoint value. The reaction is determined by the Operation mode 630 parameter of the run-
out behaviour function.
21471644/220808
114
13.10.2 SOSP parameters
Parameters Setting
68 SW step 1+ 71 – S2IND
69 SW-Step 1 - 72 – S3IND
62 (SOSP) Acceleration 75 – S6IND
Tab. 131
13.10.3 Reference value memory diagram
43200744_xml.eps
Fig. 84
1 Minimum frequency 418 3 "SW-Step 1 +" input

2 Maximum frequency 419 4 "(SOSP) Acceleration" input
The parameter SOSP function 474 defines the behaviour of the function in relation to different working points of
the frequency inverter. The reference values are limited by the corresponding limit values Minimum frequency
418, Maximum frequency 419 or Minimum reference percentage 518,
Maximum reference percentage 519.

0- Not Latching The drive runs up to the minimum frequency at each start.
1- Latching Via the "Autostart" function the drive runs up to the reference value which was selected before
the controller enable signal S1IND has been deactivated. This reference value is stored even
when the unit is switched off.
2- Taking Over Taking Over operation mode is to be used for the change-over of data sets of the reference
value channel. The current reference value is used on change-over to SOSP control.
21471644/220808
3- Taking Over and Latching This operation mode combines the behaviour of operation mode 1 and 2.
Tab. 132
115
13.11 Keypad motor potentiometer
The operating unit includes the motor potentiometer function by means of different keys. The change of the reference
value is limited by the parameter Ramp Keypad-Motorpoti 473, ⇒ "Controlling the motor via the operating unit",
Page 60.
Parameters Setting
473 Ramp keypad motorpoti 0.00 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 2.00 Hz/s
Tab. 133
13.12 Repetition frequency input

The use of a frequency signal completes the many possibilities of reference value specification. The signal on one
of the available digital inputs is evaluated according to the selected Operation mode 496.

0- Off (factory setting) The repetition frequency is zero.
21 - S2IND One edge of the frequency signal on terminal X210A.4 is evaluated with a positive sign.
single evaluation pos.
22 - S2IND double evaluation pos. Both edges of the frequency signal on terminal X210A.4 are evaluated with a positive sign.
31 - S3IND One edge of the frequency signal on terminal X210A.5 is evaluated with a positive sign.
32 - S3IND double evaluation pos. Both edges of the frequency signal on terminal X210A.5 are evaluated with a positive sign.
61 - S6IND One edge of the frequency signal on terminal X210B.1 is evaluated with a positive sign.
62 - S6IND double evaluation pos. Both edges of the frequency signal on terminal X210B.1 are evaluated with a positive sign.
121 to 162 The operation modes 21 to 62 with evaluation of the frequency signal, but with a negative sign.
Tab. 134
The signal frequency on the selected repetition rate input must be scaled by means of the Divider 497 parameter.
The parameter value is comparable with the pulse number per revolution of a rotary encoder. The limit frequency of
the programmed digital input must be taken into account for the frequency of the input signal.
Parameters Setting
497 Divider 1 8192 1024
Tab. 135
The many possibilities of reference value specification within the different functions allow to use the repetition
frequency input as percentage. The signal frequency of 100 Hz on the repetition frequency input corresponds to
100% or 1 Hz corresponds to 1%. The Divider 497 parameter can be used in the same way as for rotary encoder
simulation.
13.13 ProHub function
13.13.1 General
If a drive operating at rated speed is subjected to a load less than its rated torque, the speed of the drive may be
increased beyond the rated speed in the field weakening range. For hoist units, the hoist speed may be increased
above the rated value with low loads and, therefore, process times may be reduced.
With the ProHub function, the torque is measured and used to calculate the Valid max. frequency 861 to which
the unit may accelerate.
21471644/220808
This Valid max. frequency 861 is saved until the unit drops below a programmable frequency at which the
torque is also measured.
116
Up to 4 different hoist units can be operated by one frequency inverter by switching between data sets.
The ProHub function is only available in the 210 – "FOR speed control with encoder" configuration.
Reference value step SW-Step 1+ must be used for the lifting motion. Reference value step SW-Step 1- must be
used for the lowering motion.
The ProHub function is activated by means of the Operation mode 850 parameter with selection 1 (On).
The torque is then measured, the Valid max. frequency 861 value is determined and the corresponding output
frequency of the relevant hoist unit with the load is limited.
Before field weakening is enabled, the Lifting correction value 853 and
Lowering correction value 854 parameters must be adjusted while the motor is warmed up and the ProHub
function is active. To do this, a defined load must be suspended from the hoist unit. This load should approximately
correspond to half of the rated load of the hoist unit. The exact ratio of this load to the rated load must be determined.
Lifting correction value 853 or Lowering correction value 854 must be set in such a way that the
Current measuring value 860 actual value corresponds to the ratio during the lifting or lowering operation.
If the ProHub function operation mode is switched off, the output frequency is only limited by the
Maximum frequency 419 parameter.
The Maximum frequency 419 parameter must be set in such a way that the drive is not operated in field weak‐
ening mode when the ProHub function is switched off in hoist applications.
The field weakening range of a motor usually begins at the rated frequency of the motor. However, the start of field
weakening may differ for drives with frequency inverters. On the one hand, a lower output voltage (e.g. due to a low
line voltage) results in a shift in the field weakening range; on the other hand, the output frequency is higher than
the rated frequency specified on the motor rating plate due to the automatic slip compensation of the field-oriented
control.
The start of field weakening is defined by the product of Rated frequency 375 with the
Field weakening start 852 parameter.
The frequency calculated in this way is the limit frequency when the ProHub function is activated if field weakening
operation is not enabled.
Case 1:
Field weakening operation is not enabled when the ProHub function is activated
Field weakening operation is not enabled if the Field weakening enable 851 input function is not set or is 0 or
if measurement of the torque has not been completed.
The reference frequency is limited to the product of the Rated frequency 375 with the
Field weakening start 852 parameter and to the Maximum frequency 419 parameter.
The lower of the two frequency limits applies.
Case 2:
Field weakening operation is enabled when the ProHub function is activated
Field weakening operation is enabled if the Field weakening enable 851 input function is set or is 1 or if
measurement of the torque has been completed.
The reference frequency is limited to the calculated Valid max. frequency 861 parameter of the ProHub function
and to the Maximum frequency 419 parameter.
Torque measurement
Dedrive Compact units measure the torque in order to determine the Valid max. frequency 861 value of the
ProHub function. The torque is determined while the drive is in operation. Start of the measurement is specified by
the Start of measurement 855 parameter.
21471644/220808
The lower of the two frequency limits applies.
117
13.13.2 ProHub function operation mode

0- Off (factory setting) The ProHub function is switched off.
1- On The ProHub function is switched on.
Tab. 136
It can only be activated when the modulation is switched off.
13.13.3 Field weakening enable
The link to the logic signals, e.g. to the digital inputs, is established with the Field weakening enable 851
parameter, ⇒ "Digital inputs", Page 135.
The Field weakening enable 851 input function has to be set, the ProHub function has to be activated and
measurement of the torque has to be completed in order to enable field weakening operation. Completion of the
measurement can be reported via the digital outputs, ⇒ "Digital outputs", Page 130.
13.13.4 Field weakening start
The Field weakening start 852 parameter refers to the Rated frequency 375 of the motor. If field weak‐
ening operation is not enabled when the ProHub function is activated, the output frequency is limited to the product
of these two parameters.
The Field weakening start 852 parameter must be set in such a way that the product of
Rated frequency 375 with the Field weakening start 852 parameter is higher by at least approx. 0.1 Hz
than the Start of measurement 855 parameter, as the measurement cannot otherwise be carried out.
Parameters Setting
852 Field weakening start 50% 200% 100%
Tab. 137
13.13.5 Lifting correction value
Lifting correction value 853 refers to the rated torque of the motor.
Lifting correction value 853 must be set during a lifting motion at constant speed in such a way that the
value shown for the Current measuring value 860 parameter corresponds to the actual load on the hoist.
This adjustment should be carried out at approximately half of the rated load of the hoist unit.
Parameters Setting
853 Lifting correction value 0% 50% 10%
Tab. 138
13.13.6 Lowering correction value
Lowering correction value 854 refers to the rated torque of the motor.
Lowering correction value 854 must be set during a lowering motion at constant speed in such a way that
the value shown for the Current measuring value 860 parameter corresponds to the actual load on the hoist.
This adjustment should be carried out at approximately half of the rated load of the hoist unit.
Parameters Setting
854 Lowering correction value 0% 50% 1%
21471644/220808
Tab. 139
118
13.13.7 Start of measurement
The Start of measurement 855 parameter determines the frequency at which the torque is measured.
The value has to be approx. 0,1Hz lower than the product of the Rated frequency 375 and
Field weakening start 852, parameters, as otherwise the measurement cannot be carried out.
When the measurement has been completed, the internal logic signal "60 – End of ProHub measurement" is acti‐
vated, which can be programmed to a digital output, for example.
Parameters Setting
855 Start of measurement 5.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 49.90 Hz
Tab. 140
13.13.8 Field weakening factor
The Field weakening factor 856 parameter is included in calculation of the Valid max. frequency 861
parameter.
If the value of the Field weakening factor 856 parameter is equal to 1.00, the motor is operated in the field
weakening range with constant output..
A correspondingly smaller factor must be selected for motors whose breakdown torque is much lower in the field
weakening range.
If the value of the Field weakening factor 856 parameter is equal to 0.50, the motor must provide half of the
output in the field weakening range.
Parameters Setting
856 Field weakening factor 0,50 1,00 0,50
Tab. 141
13.13.9 Current measuring value
The Current measuring value 860 actual value parameter indicates the measured load in percent with refer‐
ence to the rated load of the hoist unit.
The torque is measured, Valid max. frequency 861 is determined and the Current measuring value
860 is also calculated if field weakening operation is not enabled.
The Current measuring value is specified as 100.00, if the measurement has not yet been completed.
The Current measuring value is specified as 100.00, if the ProHub function is switched off by means of
Operation mode 850.
13.13.10 Valid maximum frequency
The Valid maximum frequency 861 actual value parameter specifies the maximum reference frequency of the
ProHub function.
If measurement of the torque has not yet been completed, the Valid maximum frequency 861 parameter is set
to the product of the Rated frequency 375 and Field weakening start 852.
13.14 Additional setpoint value
13.14.1 General
21471644/220808
Certain applications, e.g. load-sway damping systems or synchronous operation control systems, work with a sep‐
arate control device, which supplies the frequency inverter with an additional setpoint value. This additional setpoint
value is added to the ramp output of the basic setpoint value via a separate ramp in the Dedrive Compact unit.
119
The default value for the additional setpoint value can be provided by an analog signal, field bus or a three-step
controller with 2 digital inputs.
The additional setpoint value function can be activated or deactivated by the Operation mode 840 parameter. In
addition, the function must be released via the Additional setpoint value release 802 digital input function,
⇒ "Additional setpoint value release", Page 138.
13.14.2 Additional setpoint value operation mode

0- Off (factory setting) The additional setpoint value function is switched off.
1- On The additional setpoint value function is switched on.
Tab. 142
13.14.3 Additional control
The Additional setpoint value source 841 parameter determines the additional setpoint value input. The
value selected here should not already be used for the regular Drive control 475.

0- Zero Additional setpoint value is zero
50 - Analog MFI1A Additional setpoint value via analog input MFI1A
53 - Analog EM-S1INA Additional setpoint value via analog input EM-S1INA
480 - Bus operation P.846 Additional setpoint value is written into parameter 846 via field bus
481 - Additional fixed frequencies Additional setpoint value via fixed frequencies
708
- RxPDO Control via system bus
729
Tab. 143
13.14.4 Additional setpoint value frequency limits
The frequency range of the additional setpoint value is defined by the

Max. additional frequency negative 842 and Max. additional frequency positive 843 param‐
eters.
Parameters Setting
842 Max. additional frequency negative -300.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz
843 Max. additional frequency positive 0.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 0.00 Hz
Tab. 144
13.14.5 Additional setpoint value frequency ramps
The Acceleration additional setpoint value 844 and

Deceleration additional setpoint value 845 frequency ramps define how quickly the output frequency
changes when the additional setpoint value is changed. The maximum permissible ramp steepness must be selected
corresponding to the application and the motor power consumption.
The additional setpoint value frequency ramps must be set much steeper than the Acceleration 420 and
Deceleration 421 parameters.
Parameters Setting
844 Acceleration additional setpoint 0.01 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 25.00 Hz/s
value
21471644/220808
845 Deceleration additional setpoint 0.01 Hz/s 999.99 Hz/s 25.00 Hz/s
value
Tab. 145
120
13.14.6 Additional setpoint value bus operation
The Additional setpoint value bus operation 846 frequency can be described by means of a field bus
application. In this case, the value is only saved in the temporary RAM memory, but not in the EEPROM of the
frequency inverter. The initial value when the frequency inverter is switched on is 0.00 Hz.
The Additional setpoint value source 841 parameter must be set to 480 in order to use this frequency.
For Profibus applications, the value is specified via the PZD3 in PPO type 2. The notation is identical to the regular
setpoint value in the PZD2.
(See also section "PZD2, Sollwert/Istwert" of the CM-PDP 214 769 44 operating instructions)
For CAN-Bus applicatioms, the value is specified via the RxPDO1.
Parameters Setting
846 Additional setpoint value bus oper‐ -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 0.00 Hz
ation
Tab. 146
13.14.7 Additional fixed frequencies
The Additional fixed frequency 1 847 and Additional fixed frequency 2 848 frequencies can be
used like a three-step controller with the help of the Additional fixed frequency selection 1 800 and
Additional fixed frequency selection 2 801 digital input functions.
The Additional setpoint value source 841 parameter must be set to 481 in order to use this frequencies.
Additional fixed frequency 1 847 is added as an additional setpoint value when the
Additional fixed frequency selection 1 800 digital input is applied.
Additional fixed frequency 2 848 is added as an additional setpoint value when the
Additional fixed frequency selection 2 801 digital input is applied, ⇒ "Additional fixed frequency se‐
lection", Page 138.
Parameters Setting
847 Additional fixed frequency 1 -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 0.00 Hz
848 Additional fixed frequency 2 -300.00 Hz 300.00 Hz 0.00 Hz
Tab. 147
21471644/220808
121
14 Control inputs and outputs
14.1 General
The modular structure of the frequency inverters offers a wide range of applications on the basis of the available
hardware and software functions. The control inputs and outputs described in the following are to be used via con‐
necting terminals X210A and X210B and to be freely combined with software modules by means of the described
parameters.
14.2 Multi-function input MFI1
14.2.1 General
The multi-function input MFI1 can optionally be configured as voltage or current input or as digital input. Depending
on the Operation mode 452 selected, a combination with different software functions is possible. The operation
modes which are not used are connected to the signal value zero (LOW).

1- Voltage input (factory setting) Voltage signal (MFI1A), 0 V ... ... 10 V
2- Current input Current signal (MFI1A), 0 mA ... 20 mA
3- Digital input Digital signal (MFI1D), 0 V / 24 V
Tab. 148
14.2.2 Analog input MFI1A
14.2.2.1 General
The multi-function input MFI1 is factory-set for an analog reference value source with a voltage signal from 0 V to
10 V.
As an alternative the operation mode analog current signal from 0 mA to 20 mA can be programmed. The current
signal is continuously monitored and if the maximum value is exceeded, error message "F1407" is displayed.
14.2.2.2 Characteristic curve
The analog input signals can be transferred into a frequency or percentage reference value in order to meet different
requirements. The parameters can be set via two points of the linear characteristic of the reference value channel.
Characteristic point 1, having the coordinates X1 and Y1, and characteristic point 2, having the coordinates X2 and
Y2 are to be set in the four data sets.
Parameters Setting
454 Point X1 0,00% 100,00% 2,00%
455 Point Y1 -100,00% 100,00% 0,00%
456 Point X2 0,00% 100,00% 98,00%
457 Point Y2 -100,00% 100,00% 100,00%
Tab. 149
The coordinates of the characteristic points are a percentage of the analog signal of 10 V or 20 mA and the parameter
Maximum frequency 419 or Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The direction of rotation can be reversed
via the digital inputs or by selecting the characteristic points.
For monitoring the analog input signal by means of the Error/warning Behaviour 453 parameter, the
Point X1 454 parameter must be checked.
21471644/220808
122
Y
( X2/Y2)
1
0V +10V X
( X1/Y1)
(0mA) (+20mA)
43200844_xml.eps
Fig. 85 Factory setting of the characteristic curve
(1) pos. maximum

(2) neg. maximum
Point 1:
X1 = 2.00% · 10V = 0.20V
Y1 = 0.00% · 50.00Hz = 0.00Hz
Point 2:
X2 = 98.00% · 10V = 9.80V
Y2 = 100.00% · 50.00Hz = 50.00Hz
The characteristic curve shown above is set in the factory and can be adapted to the application by means of the
above-mentioned parameters.
Y
1
100%
(X1/Y1)
+10V
(+20mA)
0V X
(0mA)
- 80%
(X2/Y2)
43200944_xml.eps
21471644/220808
Fig. 86 Example: Freely configured characteristic curve for inverse refer‐

ence value specification
(1) pos. maximum

123
Point 1:
X1 = 2.00% · 10V = 0.20V
Y1 = 100.00% · 50.00Hz = 50.00Hz
Point 2:
X2 = 98.00% · 10V = 9.80V
Y2 = -80.00% · 50.00Hz = -40.00Hz
The characteristic curve which can be freely configured makes it possible to set a tolerance at the ends as well as
to define two directions of rotation. The example above shows an inverse reference value specification with an
additional reversal of the direction of rotation.
In this example the direction of rotation is reversed at an analog input signal of 5.5V.
The definition of the analog input characteristic can be calculated by means of the two-point form of the line equation.
Speed Y of the drive is controlled according to the analog control signal X.
Y2 - Y1
Y= (X-X1)+Y1
X2 - X1
43201044_xml.eps
Fig. 87
Additionally the characteristic curve of the analog input can be set by means of the parameter
Characteristic type 870. Thus the drive at lower frequencies can be set to smoother characteristics.
Characteristic type 870 Functions

1- Linear (factory setting) Linear characteristic as shown above.
2- Square Square characteristic. At lower frequencies voltage changes result in low frequency changes.
3- Cubic Cubic characteristic. At lower frequencies voltage changes result in very low frequency
changes.
Tab. 150
14.2.2.3 Scaling
The analog input signal is mapped to the characteristic curve which can be freely configured. The maximum ad‐
missible control range of the drive must be set by means of the frequency or percentage limits depending on the
configuration selected. When a bipolar characteristic is programmed, the minimum and the maximum limit are taken
over for both directions of rotation. The percentages of the characteristic points are related to the limits selected.
Parameters Setting
Tab. 151
The control uses the maximum value of the output frequency which is calculated from the Maximum frequency
419 and the compensated slip of the drive. The frequency limits define the speed range of the drive and the per‐
centage limits amend the scaling of the analog input characteristic depending on the functions configured.
Parameters Setting
518 Minimum reference percentage 0,00% 300,00% 0,00%
519 Maximum reference percentage 0,00% 300,00% 100,00%
21471644/220808
Tab. 152
124
14.2.2.4 Tolerance range and hysteresis
The analog input characteristic with a change of the reference value sign can be adapted to the application by means
of the parameter Tolerance band 450. The tolerance band to be defined extends the zero crossing of the speed
related to the analog control signal. The percentage parameter value is related to the maximum current or voltage
signal.
Parameters Setting
450 Tolerance band 0,00% 25,00% 2,00%
Tab. 153
(X2/Y2)
1
0V +10V
(0mA) (+20mA)
(X1/Y1)
2
43201144_xml.eps
Fig. 88 Without tolerance band
(1) pos. maximum
(2) neg. maximum

21471644/220808
125
(X2/Y2)
1
0V +10V
(0mA) (+20mA)
3
(X1/Y1)
2
43201244_xml.eps
Fig. 89 With tolerance band
(1) pos. maximum
(2) neg. maximum
(3) zero crossing tolerance band
(X2/Y2)
1
5 +10V
(+20mA)
3
(X1/Y1)
2
43201344_xml.eps
Fig. 90 Tolerance band with set minimum frequency
(1) pos. maximum
(2) neg. maximum
(3) zero crossing tolerance band
(4) pos. minimum

21471644/220808
(5) neg. minimum
126
The Minimum frequency 418 or the Minimum reference percentage 518 extend the programmed tolerance
band to form a hysteresis.
Thus resulting from positive input signals, the output variable is kept on the positive minimum value, until the input
signal becomes lower than the value for the tolerance band in negative direction. Only then operation follows the
set characteristic curve.
14.2.2.5 Error and warning behaviour
For monitoring the analog input signal as required for the application, multi-function input MFI1 must be configured
by means of the parameter Error/warning behaviour 453.
Error/warning behaviour 453 Functions

0- Off (factory setting) The input signal is not monitored.
1- Warning < 1V/2 mA If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, warning A0800 is displayed.
2- Shutdown < 1V/2 mA If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, a warning is displayed.
The drive decelerates.
3- Error-Switch-Off < 1V/2 mA If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, a warning and error message is displayed.
The drive coasts to a stop.
Tab. 154
The monitoring function of the analog input signal is active independent of the release of the frequency inverter
according to the operation mode selected.
In operation mode 2 the drive is decelerated down the current ramp. Subsequently error message F1401 is displayed.
The drive can be restarted after the error has been acknowledged.
Operation mode 3 defines the cut-off of the modulation and the deactivation of the "Release brake" message.
For monitoring the analog input signal by means of the Error/warning Behaviour 453 parameter, the
Point X1 454 parameter must be checked.
14.3 Multi-function output MFO1
14.3.1 General
Multi-function output MFO1 can optionally be configured as digital output, analog output or as an output for the
repetition frequency. Depending on the Operation mode MFO1 550 selected, a combination with different software
functions is possible. The operation modes which are not in use are deactivated internally.
Operation Mode MFO1 550 Functions

0- Off The output has the logic signal LOW.
1- Digital, (factory setting) Digital output 0 / 24 V
2- Analog Analog output, 0 ... 24 V
3- Repetition frequency Repetition frequency output, 0 / 24 V, fmax = 150 kHz
Tab. 155
14.3.2 Operation mode analog MFO1A
14.3.2.1 General
The actual values to be selected by means of the parameter Operation mode analog MFO1A 553 depend on
the configuration selected.
Operation mode analog MFO1A 553 Functions

0- Off Operation mode analog MFO1A switched off
21471644/220808
1- Abs. Fs Absolute stator frequency, 0.00 Hz ... Maximum frequency 419
2- Abs. Fs betw. fmin/fmax Absolute stator frequency, Minimum frequency 418 ... Maximum frequency 419
3- Abs. Speed Sensor 1 Absolute value of rotary encoder signal 1, 0.00 Hz ... Maximum frequency 419
127
Operation mode analog MFO1A 553 Functions
4- Abs. Speed Sensor 2 Absolute value of rotary encoder signal 2, 0.00 Hz ... Maximum frequency 419
7- Abs. Actual Frequency Absolute actual frequency value, 0.00 Hz ... Maximum frequency 419
(Factory setting)
10 - Abs. Reference Percentage Absolute reference percentage
11 - Abs. Ref. Percent. betw. %min/% Absolute reference percentage, 0,00% ... Maximum Reference Percentage 519
max
20 - Abs. Iactive Absolute actual active current IACT, 0,0 A ... FI rated current
21 - Abs. Isd Absolute flux-forming current component ,

0.0 A ... FI rated current
22 - Abs. Isq Absolute torque-forming current component ,
30 - Abs. Pactive Absolute value of the actual active output PACT, 0.0 kW ... Rated mech. power 376
31 - Abs. M Absolute calculated torque M,

0.0 Nm ... Rated torque
32 - Abs. Inside Temperature Absolute inside temperature measured,
0 °C ... 100 °C
33 - Abs. Heat Sink Temperature Absolute heat sink temperature measured,
0 °C ... 100 °C
40 - Abs. Analog Input MFI1A Absolute signal on the analog input MFI1A, 0.0 V ... 10.0 V
41 - Abs. Analog Input EM-S1INA Absolute signal on the analog input EM-S1INA, 0.0 V ... 10.0 V
only with extension module EM-I/O-02 or EM-ENC-02
50 - Abs. I Absolute output currents measured,
51 - DC-Link Voltage Link voltage Ud, 0.0 V ... 1000.0 V
52 - Voltage Output voltage U,

0.0 V ... 1000.0 V
53 - Volume Flow Absolute volumetric flow calculated 0.0 m3/h ... Nominal volumetric flow 397
54 - Pressure Absolute pressure calculated 0.0 kPa ... Nominal Pressure 398
101 to 141 Operation modes at analog operation with sign

Tab. 156
21471644/220808
128
14.3.2.2 Output characteristic
The application of the analog output signal to the programmed Operation mode analog MFO1A 553 is possible
for different applications via Voltage 100% 551 and Voltage 0% 552.
Parameters Setting
551 Voltage 100% 0.0 V 24.0 V 10.0 V
553 Voltage 0% 0.0 V 24.0 V 0.0 V
Tab. 157
+24V
+10V
0V
0% 50% 100%
43201444_xml.eps
Fig. 91 Absolute actual value operation mode analog 553
+24V
+10V
+5V
0V
-100% 0% 100%
43201544_xml.eps
Fig. 92 Operation mode analog MFO1A 553 with sign
By means of the parameters Voltage 100% 551 and Voltage 0% 552 the voltage range is adjusted at 100% or
0% of the variable to be output. If the output value exceeds the reference value, the output voltage also exceeds the
value of the parameter Voltage 100% 551 up to the maximum value of 24V.
14.3.3 Operation mode repetition frequency MFO1F
Multi-function output MFO1 can be used as frequency output depending on the selected
Operation mode MFO1 550. The 24V output signal is allocated to the absolute speed or frequency by means of
the parameter Operation mode repetition frequency MFO1F 555.
Operation mode repetition frequency MFO1F 555 Functions

0- Off Operation mode repetition rate MFO1F switched off
21471644/220808
1- Actual Frequency (factory setting) Absolute Actual frequency 241
2- Stator Frequency Absolute Stator frequency 210
129
Operation mode repetition frequency MFO1F 555 Functions
3- Frequency Speed Sensor 1 Absolute Encoder 1 frequency 217
5- Repetition Frequency Input Absolute Repetition frequency input 252

Tab. 158
Scaling
The mapping of the programmed Operation mode repetition freq. MFO1F 555 corresponds to an incre‐
mental encoder. The Division marks 556 parameter must be programmed to consider the output frequency.
Parameters Setting
556 Division marks 30 8192 1024
Tab. 159
The limit frequency of fmax=150kHz must not be exceeded when calculating the Division marks 556.
lfl = Absolute frequency

150000Hz
Smax = f
43201644_xml.eps
Fig. 93
14.4 Digital outputs
14.4.1 General
Digital output 1 S1OUT with the parameter Op. mode digital output 1 S1OUT 530 and relay output S3OUT
with the Op. Mode Digital Output 3 S3OUT 532 parameter combine the digital outputs with different functions.
When multi-function output MFO1 is used as a digital output, Operation Mode MFO1 550 must be set to "1 –
Digital" and linked to Operation mode digital MFO1D 554.

0- Off Digital output is switched off
1- Ready The frequency inverter is initialized, ready and the controller enable is activated.
S1OUT (Factory setting)
2- Modulation on Signal controller enable and a start command are applied, output voltage applied
3- Error The message is displayed via the parameter Current error 259 or Warnings 269
MFO1D (Factory setting)
4- Setting Frequency Stator Frequency 210 is higher than the set Setting Frequency 510
5- Reference Frequency reached Actual frequency 241 of the drive has reached Internal reference frequency 228
6- Reference Percentage reached The Actual percentage value 230 has reached the
Reference percentage value 229
7- Ixt-Warning Warning limit short term Ixt 405 or Warning limit long term Ixt 406 has
been reached
8- Warning Heat Sink Temperature The max. heat sink temperature TK of 80 °C minus Warning limit heat sink temp.
407 has been reached
9- Warning Inside Temperature The max. inside temperature TK of 65 °C minus Warning limit inside temp. 408 has
been reached
10 - Warning Motor Temperature Warning after programmed Motor-PTC operation mode 570 at max. motor temperature
TPTC
11 - Warning, General The message is displayed via the parameter Warnings 269
12 - Warning Overtemperature The selected limit values Warning limit heat sink temp. 407,
Warning limit inside temp. 408 or the max. motor temperature have been exceeded.
21471644/220808
13 - Mains Failure Failure of the line voltage and back-up active according to Operation mode 670
14 - Warning Motor Protect. Switch Programmed Operation mode 571 has been actuated
15 - Warning Current Limitation A controller or Operation mode 573 limit the output current
130
16 - Controller Current Limit. The overload reserve for 60 s has been used up and the output current is limited.
Long Term Ixt
17 - Controller Current Limit. The overload reserve for 10 s has been used and the output current is limited.
Short Term Ixt
18 - Controller Current Limit. Max. heat sink temperature TK reached, Operation mode 573 active
Tc
19 - Controller Current Limit. M-PTC Max. motor temperature TPTC reached, Operation mode 573 active
20 - Comparator 1 The comparison according to the selected Op. Mode Comparator 1 540 is true
21 - Comparator 2 The comparison according to the selected Op. Mode Comparator 2 543 is true
22 - Warning Fieldbus-Toggle-Bit-OFF Field bus monitoring reports failure of the bus system. See operating instructions for the ex‐
tension modules.
23 - Timer 1 The selected Operation mode timer 1 790 creates an output signal of the function
24 - Timer 1 The selected Operation mode timer 2 793 creates an output signal of the function
25 - Warning Mask Message of the configurable Warning mask 536
30 - Flux-Forming finished Magnetic field has been applied.

41 - Release brake Control of an electrical brake
S3OUT (Factory setting)
43 - External fan Switch-on temperature 39 has been reached
60 - End of ProHub measurement Torque measurement for the ProHub function is completed.
See ⇒ "Field weakening enable", Page 118
70 - Logic Function 1 Output of Operation mode 198
... ... ...

79 - Logic Function 10 Output of Operation mode 891
80 - Warning Load Spectrum The load spectrum function signals that 90% of the safe working period of the hoist unit have
elapsed.
See ⇒ "Load spectrum calculation", Page 93
100 to 180 Operation modes inverted (LOW active)
Tab. 160
14.4.2 Setting Frequency
If Operation mode 4 is selected, the corresponding output becomes active when Stator frequency 210 has
exceeded the value set under the Setting frequency 510 parameter.
The corresponding output is deactivated as soon as the Stator frequency 210 falls below the set value.
Parameters Setting
510 Setting Frequency 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 3.00 Hz
Tab. 161
14.4.3 Reference value reached
In Operation mode 5 or 6 a message is sent via the corresponding output when the actual frequency or percentage
value has reached the reference value. The maximum deviation of the adjustable range (max. - min.) in percent can
be set via the parameter Max. control deviation 549.
Parameters Setting
549 Max. control deviation 0,01% 20,00% 5,00%
Tab. 162
14.4.4 Flux-Forming finished

21471644/220808
When Operation mode 30 is selected, the corresponding output becomes active when the flux-forming is finished.
The flux-forming time results from the operating status of the motor and the parameters programmed for magneti‐
sation of the motor. The magnetisation must be defined via the starting behaviour and is influenced by the
programmed starting current level. 131
14.4.5 Release brake
The "Release brake" function in Operation mode 41 makes it possible to control an electrical brake via a digital
control output.
See ⇒ "Brake control", Page 89
14.4.6 Current limitation
Operation modes 15 to 19 link the digital outputs and the relay output with the functions of the intelligent current
limits. The reduction of the output by the value set in percent of the rated current depends on the selected operation
mode. Correspondingly, the event that leads to activation of the current limitation can be output by means of the
operation mode of the digital outputs. If the function of the intelligent current limits is deactivated within the control
without encoders, Operation modes16 to19 are also switched off.
14.4.7 Comparator
Different comparisons of actual values with fixed percentage values can be carried out by means of the software
functions comparator 1 and 2. The actual values to be compared can be selected by means of the
Comparator 1 540 and Comparator 2 543 parameters according to the following table.

0- Off The comparator is switched off
1- Absolute Current Motor current 211 (100% ≙ rated current 371)
2- Ab. Active Current Active current 214 (100% ≙ rated current 371)
3- Abs. Stator Frequency Stator frequency 210 (100% ≙ Maximum frequency 419)
4- Abs. Actual Speed 1 Encoder 1 Speed 218 (100% ≙ Maximum speed , calculated from Maximum frequency
419 and No. of pole pairs 373)
5- Abs. Actual Repetition Freq. Repetition frequency input 252 (100% ≙ Maximum frequency 419)
6- Winding Temp. Winding temperature 226 (100% ≙ temperature 100 °C)
7- Abs. Actual Frequency Actual frequency 241 (100% ≙ Maximum frequency 419)
8- Abs. Actual Speed 2 Only with extension module EM-I/O-02 or EM-ENC-02!

Encoder 2 Speed 220 (100% ≙ Maximum speed , calculated from Maximum frequency
419 and No. of pole pairs 373)
9- DC-Link Voltage Link voltage 222 (100% ≙ DC 1000 V)
10 - Abs. Isq Torque current share Isq 216 (100% ≙ rated current 371)
11 - Abs. Filtered Active Current Filtered Active current 214 (100% ≙ rated current 371)
12 - Abs. Internal Ref. Frequency Internal reference frequency 228 (100% ≙ Maximum frequency 419)
13 - Abs. Ref. Percentage Value Reference percentage value 229 (100% ≙ Maximum reference percentage 519)
14 - Abs. Actual Percentage Value Actual percentage value 230 (100% ≙ Maximum reference percentage 519)
15 - Abs. Analog Input MFI1A Analog input MFI1A 251 (100% ≙ input signal10 V or 20 mA)
16 - Abs. Analog Input EM-S1INA Only with extension module EM-I/O-02 or EM-ENC-02!
Analog input EM-S1INA 251 (100% ≙ input signal10 V or 20 mA)
100 to 116 Operation modes with sign (+/-)

Tab. 163
The thresholds for switching on and off comparators 1 and 2 are set by means of the parameters
Comparator 1 on above 541, 544 and Comparator 1 off below 542, 545.
The percentage limits are specified for the corresponding reference values.
Parameters Setting
541 Comparator 1 on above - 300,00% 300,00% 100,00%
542 Comparator 1 off below - 300,00% 300,00% 50,00%
21471644/220808
544 Comparator 2 on above - 300,00% 300,00% 100,00%

545 Comparator 2 off below - 300,00% 300,00% 50,00%
Tab. 164
132
Setting of the comparator percentage limits enables the following logic operations. A comparison with sign is possible
in the corresponding operation modes of the comparators.
Logic operations
1 1
0 0
% %
1 2 2 1
43201744_xml.eps
Fig. 94
1 off below
2 on above
14.4.8 Warning mask
The logic signals of different monitoring and control functions can be set in the configurable
Create Warning Mask 536. Depending on the application any number of warnings and controller status mes‐
sages can be combined enabling the internal or external control with a common output signal.

0- No Change The configured warning mask is not changed.
1- Activate everything The warnings and controller status messages listed are combined in the warning
mask.
2- Activate all Warnings The warnings listed are combined in the warning mask.
3- Activate all Controller States The controller status messages listed are combined in the warning mask.
10 - Warning Ixt The frequency inverter is overloaded.
11 - Warning Short Term Ixt Overload reserve for 10 s minus Warning limit short term Ixt 405 has been
reached.
12 - Warning Long Term Ixt Overload reserve for 60 s minus Warning limit long term Ixt 406 has been
reached.
13 - Warning Heat Sink Temperature The max. heat sink temperature TK of 80 °C minus
Warning limit heat sink temp. 407 has been reached
14 - Warning Inside Temperature The max. inside temperature TK of 65 °C minus Warning limit inside temp.
408 has been reached
15 - Warning Limit The controller listed in the Controller Status 355 limits the reference value.
16 - Warning Load Spectrum The load spectrum function signals that 90% of the safe working period of the hoist
unit have elapsed.
⇒ "Load spectrum calculation", Page 93
17 - Warning Motor Temperature Warning after programmed Motor-PTC operation mode 570 at max. motor tem‐
perature TPTC
18 - Warning Mains Failure The Phase supervision 576 signals a phase failure in the power supply.
19 - Warning Motor Protective Switch Programmed Operation Mode 571 has been actuated.
20 - Warning Fmax The Maximum frequency 419 has been exceeded. The frequency limitation is ac‐
21471644/220808
tive.
21 - Warning Analog Input MFI1A The input signal is lower than 1V / 2 mA depending on the operation mode
Error/Warning behaviour 453
133
22 - Warning Analog Input EM-S1INA The input signal is lower than 1V / 2 mA depending on the operation mode
Only with extension module!
23 - Warning Systembus A slave on the system bus signals an error, warning only relevant with EM-SYS option.
24 - Warning Udc The link voltage has reached the minimum value which depends on the type.
25 - Warning Fieldbus-Toggle-Bit-OFF Field bus monitoring reports a failure of the bus connection.
30 - Controller Udc Dynamic Operation The controller is active depending on the Operation Mode 670
31 - Controller Shutdown The output frequency at power failure is below the Shutdown threshold 675.
32 - Controller Mains Failure Failure of the line voltage and back-up active according to Operation mode 670
33 - Controller Udc Limitation The link voltage has exceeded the Reference DC link limitation 680.
34 - Controller Voltage Pre-Control The Dyn. voltage pre-control 605 accelerates the control behaviour.
35 - Controller I abs. The output current is limited.

36 - Controller Torque Limitation The output power or the torque is limited on the speed controller.
37 - Controller Torque Control Change-over of the FOR between speed and torque control
38 - Ramp Stop The Operation Mode 620 selected in the starting behaviour limits the output current.
39 - Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. LT-Ixt The overload limit of the long term Ixt (60 s) is reached, intelligent current limits active.
40 - Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. ST-Ixt The overload limit of the short term Ixt (10 s) is reached, intelligent current limits active.
41 - Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. Tc Max. heat sink temperature TK reached, Operation mode 573 active
42 - Control. Intel. Curr. Lim. M-PTC Max. motor temperature TPTC reached, Operation mode 573 active
43 - Controller Freq. Limitation The reference frequency has reached the Maximum frequency 419. The frequency
limitation is active.
101 to 143 Removing or deactivating the operation mode within the warning mask
Tab. 165
The selected warning mask can be read out via the Actual warning mask 537. The operation modes above,
which are set in the configurable Create Warning Mask 536, are coded in the Actual warning mask 537.
The code results from the hexadecimal addition of the individual operation modes and the associated acronym.
Warning code Operation mode 536

A FFFF FFFF - 1- Activate everything
A 0000 FFFF - 2- Activate all Warnings
A FFFF 0000 - 3- Activate all Controller States
A 0000 0001 Ixt 10 Warning Ixt
A 0000 0002 IxtSt 11 - Warning Short Term Ixt
A 0000 0004 IxtLt 12 - Warning Long Term Ixt
A 0000 0008 Tc 13 - Warning Heat Sink Temperature
A 0000 0010 Ti 14 - Warning Inside Temperature
A 0000 0020 Lim 15 - Warning Limit
A 0000 0040 LK 16 - Warning Load Spectrum
A 0000 0080 PTC 17 - Warning Motor Temperature
A 0000 0100 Mains 18 - Warning Mains Failure
A 0000 0200 PMS 19 - Warning Motor Protective Switch
A 0000 0400 Flim 20 - Warning Fmax
A 0000 0800 A1 21 - Warning Analog Input MFI1A
A 0000 1000 A2 22 - Warning Analog Input EM-S1INA
A 0000 2000 Sysbus 23 - Warning Systembus
A 0000 4000 UDC 24 - Warning Udc
A 0000 8000 Toggle bit 25 - Warning fieldbus-toggle-bit
21471644/220808
A 0001 0000 UDdyn 30 - Controller Udc Dynamic Operation

A 0002 0000 UDstop 31 - Controller Shutdown
A 0004 0000 UDctr 32 - Controller Mains Failure
134
Warning code Operation mode 536
A 0008 0000 UDlim 33 - Controller Udc Limitation
A 0010 0000 Boost 34 - Controller Voltage Pre-Control
A 0020 0000 Ilim 35 - Controller I abs.
A 0040 0000 Tlim 36 - Controller Torque Limitation
A 0080 0000 Tctr 37 - Controller Torque Control
A 0100 0000 Rstp 38 - Ramp Stop
A 0200 0000 IxtLtlim 39 - Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. LT-Ixt
A 0400 0000 IxtStlim 40 - Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. ST-Ixt
A 0800 0000 Tclim 41 - Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. Tc
A 1000 0000 PTClim 42 - Control. Intel. Curr. Lim. M-PTC
A 2000 0000 PTClim Flim 43 - Controller Freq. Limitation
Tab. 166
⇒ "Warning status", Page 178
14.5 Digital inputs
14.5.1 Assignment
The allocation of the control signals to the available software functions can be adapted to the corresponding appli‐
cation. The allocation set in the factory or the selected operation mode is different depending on the
Configuration 30. In addition to the digital control inputs available, further internal logic signals can be used as
sources. The individual software functions are allocated to the different signal sources via programmable inputs.
This provides for a flexible and versatile use of the digital control signals.
Operation Mode Functions

6- On The signal input is switched on.
7- Off The signal input is switched off.
61 - Error Signal Output An error has occurred.
70 - S1IND Digital signal on contact input 1 (X210A.3);
invariably linked with the controller enable
71 - S2IND Signal on digital input 2 (X210A.4)
75 - S6IND Signal on digital input 6 (X210B.1)
76 - MFI1D Signal on multi-function input 1 (X210A.3) in Operation Mode 452 = 3 - Digital input
157 - Warning Mask The defined Actual Warning Mask 537 signals a critical working point.
158 - Timer 1 Output signal of the timer function corresponding to input link Timer 1 83
159 - Timer 2 Output signal of the timer function corresponding to input link Timer 2 84
160 - Message Ready Signal when ”Ready” message is active

161 - Message Modulation on Signal when ”Modulation on” message is active
162 - Message Error Signal when ”Error” message is active
163 - Reference Frequency reached Signal, when the Actual frequency 241 has reached the frequency reference value.
164 - Setting Frequency Signal, when the Setting Frequency 510 is smaller than or equal to the Actual frequency 241
165 - Warning Ixt The monitoring functions signal frequency inverter overload
166 - Warning Heat Sink Temperature The max. heat sink temperature TK of 80 °C minus Warning limit heat sink temp. 407 has
been reached
21471644/220808
167 - Warning Inside Temperature The max. inside temperature TK of 65 °C minus Warning limit inside temp. 408 has been
reached
168 - Warning Motor Temperature Warning after programmed Motor-PTC operation mode 570 at max. motor temperature TPTC
169 - General Warning Signal, when Warnings 269 are displayed in the event of a critical working point
135
Operation Mode Functions
170 - Warning Overtemperature The selected limit values Warning limit heat sink temp. 407,
Warning limit inside temp. 408 or the max. motor temperature have been exceeded.
171 - Output Comparator 1 The comparison according to the selected Op. Mode Comparator 1 540 is true
172 - Negated Output Operation mode 171 with inverted logic

Comparator 1 (LOW active)
173 - Output Comparator 2 The comparison according to the selected Op. Mode Comparator 2 543 is true
174 - Negated Output Operation mode 173 with inverted logic

Comparator 2 (LOW active)
175 - Digital Signal 1 Signal corresponding to the programmed Op. mode digital output 1 S1OUT 530
176 - Digital Signal 2 Signal corresponding to the programmed Operation mode digital MFO1D 554
177 - Digital Signal 3 Signal corresponding to the programmed Op. mode digital output 3 S1OUT 532
178 - Reference Percentage reached Signal, when the Actual percentage value 230 has reached the reference percentage value
180 - Warning Motor Protective Switch Programmed Operation mode 571 has been actuated
220 - Logic Function 1 Output signal of logic function 1

221 - Logic Function 1 inverted Inverted output signal of logic function 1
270 to 276 Operation modes 70 to 76 of the digital inputs inverted
(LOW active)
700 - RxPDO1 Boolean1 Signal with optional extension module with system bus
710 to 713 Operation modes 700 to 703 for RxPDO2 with extension module with system bus
720 to 723 Operation modes 700 to 703 for RxPDO3 with extension module with system bus
730 - Sysbus Emergency Signal with optional extension module with system bus
... ... ...
With plugged-in extension module further functions are available.
Tab. 167
14.5.2 Starting command
The parameters SW-Step 1+ 68 and SW-Step 1- 69 must be linked with the available digital control inputs or with
the internal logic signals. The drive is only accelerated according to the control and regulation process after a starting
command. The logic functions are used for specifying the direction of rotation as well as for making use of the
programmed Operation Mode 620 and Operation Mode 630 verwendet.
14.5.3 Data set change-over
The different software parameters must be stored in four different data sets as permitted by the function. This allows
the use of different parameter values depending on the current working point of the frequency inverter. The change‐
over between the four data records is carried out via the logic signals allocated with the parameter
21471644/220808
Data set change-over1 70 and Data set change-over 2 71.
The actual value parameterActive data setz 249 shows the selected data set.
136
Data set change-over
Data set change-over 1 Data set change-over 2 Function / active data set
0 0 Data set 1 (DS1)
Tab. 168
0 = Contact open
1 = Contact closed
14.5.4 SOST reference value step change-over
In configurations with variable speed control the reference values are specified by the allocation of the
Drive control 475. A changeover between reference value steps is possible by linking the logic signals with the
parameters (SOST) Step 2 66 or (SOST) Step 3/4 67.
SOST
(SOST) Step 2 (SOST) Step 3/4 Function / active reference value step
0 0 SOST Step 1 480
1 0 SOST Step 2 481
1 1 SOST Step 3 482
0 1 SOST Step 4 483
Tab. 169
0 = Contact open
1 = Contact closed
14.5.5 Fixed percentage value change-over
In configurations with torque control the reference values are specified by the allocation of the
Reference percentage source 476. A changeover between fixed percentage values is possible by linking the
logic signals with the parameters Fixed percent change-over 1 75 or Fixed percent change-over 2
76.
Fixed percent change-over

Fixed percent change-over 1 Fixed percent change-over 2 Function / active fixed value
0 0 Fixed percentage 1 520
Tab. 170
0 = Contact open
1 = Contact closed
14.5.6 SOSP reference value memory function
The parameter Drive control 475 includes the operation mode SOSP reference value memory. The parameter
SOSP function 474 defines the behaviour of the reference value memory function and the parameter
(SOSP) Acceleration 62 defines the link with the available logic signals, ⇒ "SOSP reference value memory",
Page 114.
14.5.7 Motor thermal contact

21471644/220808
The monitoring of the motor temperature forms part of the error and warning behaviour which is freely configurable.
The parameter Motor thermal contact 204 links the digital input signal with the defined
Motor-PTC operation mode 570, ⇒ "Motor temperature", Page 100.
137
The temperature is monitored via a digital input in the inverter without extension module. Therefore a thermal
contact or, if a thermistor is used, an additional circuit must be used.
If an EM-I/O-02 or EM-ENC-02 extension module is used, a PTC thermistor can also be evaluated.
14.5.8 Timers
The timer functions must be programmed by means of the parameters Operation mode timer 1 790 and
Operation mode timer 2 793. The sources of the logic signals are selected with the parameters Timer 1 83
and Timer 2 84 and processed according to the timer function selected.
14.5.9 Additional fixed frequency selection
With the help of the digital input functionsAdditional fixed frequency selection 1 800 and
Additional fixed frequency selection 2 801, the additional reference value function can be operated
like a three-step controller , ⇒ "Additional fixed frequencies", Page 121.
Additional fixed frequency selection

Additional fixed frequency selec‐ Additional fixed frequency selection Active additional fixed frequency
tion 1 2
0 0 Additional reference value = 0 Hz
1 0 Additional fixed frequency 1 847
0 1 Additional fixed frequency 2 848
1 1 Additional reference value = 0 Hz
Tab. 171
0 = input parameter logically OFF
1 = input parameter logically ON
14.5.10 Additional setpoint value release
The additional setpoint value function must be released by means of the

Additional setpoint value release 802 digital input function. The function must additionally be activated
by means of the Operation mode 840, ⇒ "Additional setpoint value", Page 119.
14.5.11 Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation
14.5.11.1 General
Limitation of the reference value is activated when the relevant digital input is logically OFF when the fast-to-slow
limit switch is approached.
If no fast-to-slow limit switches are wired, the input parameters

Fast to slow limit switch limitation 1+ 803, Fast to slow limit switch limitation 1-
804 and Fast to slow limit switch limitation 2 805 must be set to the value "6 - ON", ⇒ "Limit switch
functions", Page 96.
14.5.11.2 Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1+ and

fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1-
The Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1+ 803 and

Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1-804 input parameters can be programmed independently of
each other with two different digital inputs, ⇒ "Setpoint val. limit 1+ and setpoint val. limit 1-", Page 97.
Reference value limitation

Fast-to-slow limit switch Fast-to-slow limit switch Active limitation on
21471644/220808
Reference value limitation 1+ Reference value limitation 1-

0 0 Limitation
1 0 Limitation 1- 871
138
Fast-to-slow limit switch Fast-to-slow limit switch Active limitation on
Reference value limitation 1+ Reference value limitation 1-
0 1 Limitation 1+ 872
1 1 No limitation
Tab. 172
14.5.11.3 Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 2
The Fast to slow limit switch limitation 2 805 input function can be programmed with one digital
input ⇒ "Setpoint val. limit 2+ and Setpoint val. limit 2-", Page 97.

Setpoint value limitation 2 Active limitation
0 Limitation 2- 874
Limitation 2+ 873
1 No limitation
Tab. 173
14.5.11.4 Operating limit switches
The Operating limit switch + 806 and Operating limit switch - 807 input parameters can be pro‐
grammed independently of each other with two digital inputs.
The drive is brought to standstill when the relevant digital input is logically OFF when the fast-to-slow limit switch is
approached (input open).
If no operating limit switches are connected, the Operating limit switch + 806 and
Operating limit switch- 807 input parameters must be set to "6 – ON".
The frequency is monitored when the operating limit switches are approached. Error 1120 "Limit switch monitoring
frequency exceeded" is generated when the limits are exceeded, ⇒ "Limit switch monitoring frequency", Page 97.
14.5.12 Error acknowledgment
Frequency inverters have certain monitoring functions which can be adapted via the error and warning behaviour.
Setting parameters depending on the application should avoid that the frequency inverter is switched off at the
different working points.
In the case of a disconnection on fault, the following possibilities of error acknowledgement are available:
– Briefly de-activating the digital input S1IND (factory setting of parameter 103))
– Disconnect and restore the line power supply. The waiting time depends on the type of unit. If power is restored
too soon, the error will not be acknowledged. When the power is restored, the unit will re-initialize. Dedrive
Compact inverters may only be connected to the line supply every 60 seconds.
– Actuating the stop key on the operating unit
– Setting the Program 34 parameter to value 123
14.5.13 n-/M-control change-over
The field-oriented regulation processes include functions for controlling the drive depending on the speed or torque.
21471644/220808
The change-over can be carried out during operation of the drive, since the transfer between the two control modes
is monitored by an additional function. Corresponding to the n-/M-control change-over 164 the speed con‐
troller or the torque controller is active.
139
14.5.14 Percent motor potentiometer
The parameter Reference percentage source 476 includes operation modes with percent motor potentiom‐
eter. The parameter SOSP function 474 defines the behaviour of the percent motor potentiometer function and
the parameters Percent motorpoti up 72 and Percent motorpoti down 73 define the link with the available
logic signals.
Drive control
Motor poti up Motor poti down Functions
0 0 Output signal does not change
1 0 Output value increases with set ramp
0 1 Output value decreases with set ramp
1 1 Output value reset to initial value
Tab. 174
0 = Contact open
1 = Contact closed
14.6 Timer function
14.6.1 General
The timer function can be linked with different functions for the sequence control of digital signals as a function of
time.
The Timer 1 083 and Timer 2 084 parameters define the link with the available logic signals to start the timers.
The Operation mode timer 1 790 and Operation mode timer 2 793 parameters define evaluation of the
digital input signals and the unit of time of the timer function.

0- Off The signal output is switched off.
1- Normal, Rising Edge, Sec. Positive signal edge starts timer (trigger),
time 1 delays the output signal,
time 2 defines the signal duration
2- Retrigger, Rising Edge, Sec. Positive signal edge starts timer (trigger),
new positive signal edge within time 1 starts the time delay again (retrigger),
time 2 defines the signal duration
3- AND-Connect., Rising Edge, Positive signal edge starts timer (trigger),
Sec. (factory setting) no input signal within time 1 starts the time delay again (retrigger),
no input signal within time 2 finishes the signal duration
11 to 13 Negative signal edge starts timer
101 to 113 Operation mode with unit of time in minutes
201 to 213 Operation mode with unit of time in hours
Tab. 175
The output signal of the timer function is available as a logic operation for the digital inputs and outputs.
14.6.2 Timer time constant
The logic sequence of input and output signal can be set separately by the time constants for both timer functions.
The parameter values set in the factory lead to a direct link of input and output signal without a time delay.
Parameters Setting
791 Time 1 Timer 1, signal delay 0.00 s/m/h 650.00 s/m/h 0.00 s/m/h
21471644/220808
792 Time 2 Timer 1, signal duration 0.00 s/m/h 650.00 s/m/h 0.00 s/m/h
140
Parameters Setting
793 Time 1 Timer 2, signal delay 0.00 s/m/h 650.00 s/m/h 0.00 s/m/h
794 Time 2 Timer 2, signal duration 0.00 s/m/h 650.00 s/m/h 0.00 s/m/h
Tab. 176
Examples of the timer function depending on the selected operation mode and on the input signal.
Example 1
1
t1 t2
43201844_xml.eps
Fig. 95 Normal, Rising Edge
1 Input
2 Output
Parameter Operation mode timer = 1
With the positive signal edge applied to the input time 1 starts. After the time delay has elapsed, the output signal
is applied for the signal duration time 2.
Example 2
1
t1 t1 t2
43201944_xml.eps
Fig. 96 Retrigger, Rising Edge
1 Input
2 Output

21471644/220808
With the positive signal edge applied to the input time 1 starts. If a positive signal edge is detected within the time
delay, time 1 starts again. After the time delay has elapsed, the output signal is applied for the signal duration time
2.
141
Example 3
1
t1 t1 t2
43202044_xml.eps
Fig. 97 AND-Connect., Rising Edge
1 Input
2 Output
With the positive signal edge applied to the input time 1 starts. If a positive signal edge is detected within the time
delay, time 1 starts again. After the time delay has elapsed, the output signal is applied for the signal duration time
2. Within signal duration time 2 the output with the input signal is switched off.
14.7 Logic function

A logic function can be used for binary logic operations between digital signals. Ten logic functions are available.
Each function has two logic inputs.
The following table shows the assignment of parameters to the logic functions.
Logic function Operation mode Input 1 Input 2

1 198 199 200
2 201 202 203
3 205 206 207
4 503 504 505
5 817 818 819
6 857 858 859
7 877 878 879
8 882 883 884
9 885 886 887
10 891 892 893
Tab. 177
The operation mode of the logic functions parameter define the type of logic operation between the two logic inputs
Input 1 and Input 2.
The logic functions are processed by the software of the unit in the sequence logic function 1 to logic function 10.

0- Off (factory setting) Logic function is switched off.
21471644/220808
1- AND AND operation between input 1 and input 2

2- OR OR operation between input 1 and input 2
3- XOR Exclusive OR operation between input 1 and input 2
10 - RS-Flip-Flop Input 1 (set) sets the output of the logic function to HIGH. Input 2 (reset) resets the output to LOW.
142
20 - Toggle-Flip-Flop The first positive edge on input 1 sets the output of the logic function to HIGH. The next positive edge
on input 2 resets the output to LOW.
30 - D-Flip-Flop A positive edge on input 2 (clock) leads to the transfer of the signal from input 1 (D) to the output.
Tab. 178
The output signal of the logic function is available as logic operation for the digital inputs and outputs.
21471644/220808
143
15 V/f characteristic
15.1 General
The V/f characteristic in configurations 110 and 111 is based on the proportional change of the output voltage in
relation to the output frequency according to the characteristic configured.
The voltage of the asynchronous motor connected is frequency-controlled by means of the V/f characteristic set.
The torque to be built up in the corresponding working point of the motor requires that the output voltage is controlled
in proportion to the frequency. At a constant ratio between the output voltage and the output frequency of the fre‐
quency inverter, the magnetisation in the nominal range of the asynchronous motor is constant. The rated working
point of the motor or vertex of the V/f characteristic is set by means of the parameters Cut-off voltage 603 and
the parameter Cut-off frequency 604.
The lower frequency range is critical, since an increased voltage is required for starting the drive. The voltage at an
output frequency = zero is set by means of the parameter Boost for f=0 600. A voltage boost deviating from the
linear V/f characteristic can be defined by means of the parameters Voltage Rise 601 and Rise frequency
602. The parameter value in percent is calculated from the linear V/f characteristic. The working range of the motor
or the V/f characteristic is determined by means of the parameters Minimum frequency 418 and
Maximum frequency 419.
V/f characteristic
U 418 (FMIN)
419 (FMAX)
1
603 (UC)
601 (UK)
600 (US)
602 (FK) 604 (FC) f
43202144_xml.eps
Fig. 98
1 Working Range
Parameters Setting
600 Boost for f=0 0.0 V 100.0 V 5.0 V
601 Voltage rise -100% 200% 10%
602 Rise frequency 0% 100% 20%
603 Cut-Off Voltage 60.0 V 560.0 V 400.0 V
604 Cut-Off Frequency 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 50.00 Hz
Tab. 179
When the V/f characteristic is pre-set during the guided set-up, the rated motor parameters and the rated data of
the frequency inverter are taken into account. The rated speed of asynchronous motors can be increased at a
constant torque, if the motor winding can be switched over from star connection to delta connection. If the data for
the delta connection from the type plate of the asynchronous motor have been entered, the cut-off frequency is
automatically increased by the square root of three.
21471644/220808
144
The Cut-off voltage 603 (UC) and Cut-off frequency 604 (FC) set in the factory are derived from the motor
data Rated voltage 370 or Rated frequency 375. The line equation of the V/f characteristic results from the
set Boost for f=0 600 (US).
Line equation of the V/f characteristic
UC - US . f + US = 400,0V - 5,0V . f + 5,0V

U=
FC - 0 50,00Hz - 0,00Hz
43202244_xml.eps
Fig. 99
The Rise frequency 602 (FK) is entered as a percentage of the Cut-off frequency 604 (FC) and is set in
the factory to f = 10Hz. For setting the Voltage rise 601 (UK) in the factory, the output voltage is calculated with
U = 92.4V.
Calculation of the voltage rise
UC - US 400V - 5V . (0,2 . 50Hz) + 5V .1,1 = 92,4V

U= .(FK . FC) + US . (1+UK) =
FC - 0 50Hz - 0Hz
43202344_xml.eps
Fig. 100
15.2 Dynamic voltage pre-control

The Dynamic voltage pre-control 605 accelerates the regulation process of Operation mode 610 and
Operation mode 670. The value of the output voltage resulting from the V/f characteristic is changed by adding
the calculated voltage pre-control.
Parameters Setting
605 Dynamic voltage pre-control 0% 200% 100%
Tab. 180
21471644/220808
145
16 Control functions
16.1 General
Frequency inverters offer a variety of established control and regulation processes in different Configurations
30. The selected controller structure is freely programmable and can be optimised for the application by means of
further functions.
16.2 Intelligent current limits

The current limits to be set depending on the application avoid the impermissible loading of the load connected and
the disconnection on fault of the frequency inverter. This function extends the current controller available in the
control process. The overload reserve specified for the frequency inverter can be used optimally by means of the
intelligent current limits, particularly for applications with dynamic load changes. The criterion to be selected by
means of the parameter Operation mode 573 defines the threshold for activating the intelligent current limit. The
programmed rated motor current or rated current of the frequency inverter is followed up as a limit value by the
intelligent current limits.

0- Off (factory setting) The function is switched off.
1- Ixt Limitation to the overload of the frequency inverter (Ixt)
10 - Tc Limitation to the max. heat sink temperature (TK)
11 - Ixt + Tc Operation modes 1 and 10 (Ixt + TK)
20 - PTC Limitation to the motor temperature (TPTC)
21 - PTC + Ixt Operation modes 20 and 1 (TPTC + Ixt)
30 - Tc + PTC Operation modes 10 and 20 (TK + TPTC)
31 - Tc + PTC + Ixt Operation modes10, 20 and 1 (TK + TPTC + Ixt)

Tab. 181
The threshold selected by means of the parameter Operation mode 573 is monitored by the intelligent current
limits. In the operation modes with monitoring of the motor and heat sink temperature the derating selected with the
parameter Power limit 574 is effected, when the limit value is reached. In motor operation this is achieved by
reducing the output current and the speed. For a useful application of the intelligent current limits, the load charac‐
teristic of the machine connected must depend on the speed. In addition to the cooling time the total time of derating
due to an increased motor or heat sink temperature also includes the defined Limitation Time 575.
The power limit should be defined as low as possible in order to give the motor sufficient time to cool down. The
reference value is the rated power of the frequency inverter or the rated power set for the motor.
Parameters Setting
574 Power Limit 40,00% 95,00% 80,00%
575 Limitation Time 5 min 300 min 15 min
Tab. 182
In the operation modes with an overload reserve (Ixt) the output current is reduced, when the threshold is exceeded.
Here a distinction is made between long-term and short-term overload reserve. After the short-term overload (10 s)
has been used, the output current is reduced to the long-term overload current depending on the current switching
frequency. After the long-term overload (60 s) has been used, the output current is reduced to the rated current
which also depends on the switching frequency. If the output current has already been reduced, since the long-term
overload has been used, the short-term overload is no longer available, even if it has not been used before. The
defined overload reserve (Ixt) of the frequency inverter is again available after a derating of 10 minutes.
21471644/220808
146
16.3 Voltage controller
16.3.1 General
The voltage controller includes the necessary functions for monitoring the link voltage.
● The voltage controller adjusts the link voltage which rises during regenerative operation or braking of the asyn‐
chronous motor to the set limit value.
● The mains support uses the rotational energy of the drive for buffering short-term mains failures.
The voltage controller is adjusted according to the application by means of the Operation mode 670 parameter.

0- Off The function is switched off.
1- Udc-Llimitation active Overvoltage controller switched on
2- Mains Support active Mains support switched on
3- Udc-Limit & Mains Supp. active Overvoltage controller and mains support switched on
Tab. 183
16.3.2 Operation mode overvoltage controller
Ud, f
1
680
Ud
f
2
681
43202444_xml.eps
Fig. 101 Parameter Operation mode 670 (UDSEL) = 1
1 Overvoltage controller active

2 421 or 423
The overvoltage control prevents the frequency inverter from being switched off in regenerative operation. When
the drive speed is reduced by a ramp gradient selected by means of the parameters Deceleration 421 or
21471644/220808
Deceleration anticlockwise 423 an overvoltage may occur in the link. If the voltage exceeds the value set
by means of the parameter Reference DC link limitation 680, the deceleration is reduced so that the link
voltage is adjusted to the set value. If the link voltage cannot be adjusted to the set reference value by reducing the
147
deceleration, deceleration is stopped and the output frequency is increased. The output frequency is calculated by
adding the parameter Max. frequency rise 681 to the frequency at the working point of controller action.
Parameters Setting
680 Reference DC link limitation Udmin+25 V Udmax-25 V Ud
681 Max. frequency rise 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 10.00 Hz

Tab. 184
16.3.3 Operation mode mains support
Short-term mains failure
Ud, f
Ud
672
671
4 5
t
2 3
43202544_xml.eps
Fig. 102 Short-term mains failure, Parameter Operation mode 670 = 2
1 Line voltage 4 Steepness limited by 673 or 683

2 Mains failure 5 Standard ramp or 674
3 Mains resumption
The mains support can be used for buffering short-term mains failures. A mains failure is detected, when the link
voltage has fallen below the set value of the parameter Mains failure threshold 671. When a mains failure
is detected, the controller tries to adjust the link voltage to the value set with the parameter
Reference mains support value 672. For this purpose the output frequency is continuously reduced and the
motor with its rotating masses is set to regenerative operation. The maximum reduction of the output frequency
according to the configuration is according to the current set by the parameter Gen. ref. current limit 683
or to the ramp Mains support deceleration 673.
The threshold values of the voltage controller are calculated based on the current link voltage by means of the
21471644/220808
parameters Mains failure threshold 671 and Reference mains support value 672.
If the mains voltage returns before disconnection on mains undervoltage, the drive is accelerated to its reference
frequency with the set acceleration or according to the parameter Acceleration on mains resumption 674.
148
Parameters Setting
671 Mains failure threshold -200.0 V -50.0 V -100.0 V
672 Reference mains support value -200.0 V -10.0 V -40.0 V
Tab. 185
When the mains support is activated, the frequency inverter reacts to the signals applied to the control inputs as
during normal operation. The application of externally supplied control signals is only possible with an uninterrup‐
tible power system. As an alternative the supply via the frequency inverter must be used.
Mains failure
Ud ,f
676
Ud
672
671
4
f
675
1
t
2 3
43202644_xml.eps
Fig. 103 Mains failure, Parameter Operation mode 670 = 2
1 Line voltage 3 Off

2 Mains failure 4 673 or 683
The link voltage available in the case of a mains failure is supplied by the motor. The output frequency is continuously
reduced and the motor with its rotating masses is set to regenerative operation. The maximum reduction of the output
frequency is according to the current set by the parameter Gen. ref. current limit 683 or to the ramp
Mains Support Deceleration 673 up to the frequency limit Shutdown threshold 675. If the energy of the
system is not sufficient for buffering the mains failure, deceleration is carried out at maximum ramp steepness from
the Shutdown threshold 675. The time until standstill of the motor results from the regenerative energy of the
system which increases the link voltage. The link voltage set by means of the parameter
Reference shutdown value 676 is used as a controlled variable and kept constant by the voltage controller.
The voltage boost can be used for optimising the braking behaviour and the time until shutdown. The behaviour of
the control is comparable to run-out behaviour 2 (shutdown + holding), since the voltage controller shuts down the
drive at the maximum deceleration ramp and supplies the remaining link voltage to the drive.
21471644/220808
In the case of mains resumption, after the drive has been shut down, however the disconnection on undervoltage
has not yet been reached, the frequency inverter signals an error. The operating unit displays error message "F0702".
149
If the mains failure without shutdown (Shutdown threshold 675 = 0 Hz) lasts as long as the frequency has been
lowered to 0 Hz, the drive is accelerated to the reference frequency on mains resumption.
If the mains failure with or without activated shutdown lasts as long as the frequency inverter is totally switched off
(LEDs = OFF), the frequency inverter will be in the "Ready" state on mains resumption. When the enable signal is
sent again, the drive starts up. If the enable signal is permanently applied and the drive is to start automatically after
mains resumption, Autostart 651 must be switched on.
Parameters Setting
675 Shutdown Threshold 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 0.00 Hz
676 Reference Shutdown Value Udmin Udmax Ud
Tab. 186
The voltage controller uses the limit values of the link voltage for controlling. The frequency change necessary for
this purpose is programmed by means of the regenerative reference current to be set or by means of the ramp. The
Gen. ref. current limit 683 or the ramp Mains support deceleration 673 defines the maximum
deceleration of the drive which is necessary to reach the Reference mains support value 672. The
Acceleration on mains resumption 674 replaces the set values of the ramp parameters Acceleration
420 or Acceleration anticlockwise 422. The voltage control on mains failure changes off the frequency limit
Shutdown Threshold 675 from Reference mains support value 672 to the
Reference shutdown value 676.
Parameters Setting
683 Gen. Ref. Current Limit 0.0 A ü·IFUN IFUN
673 Mains support deceleration 0.01 Hz/s 9999.99 Hz/s 50.00 Hz/s
674 Acceleration on Mains Resumption 0.00 Hz/s 9999.99 Hz/s 0.00 Hz/s
Tab. 187
The proportional as well as the integrating part of the voltage controller must be set by means of the parameters
Amplification 677 and Integral time 678. The control functions can be deactivated by setting the parameter
to zero. Depending on the setting, the controller is either a proportional-action controller or an integral-action con‐
troller.
Parameters Setting
677 Amplification 0,00 30,00 1,00
Tab. 188
16.4 Control functions of the V/f characteristic
16.4.1 General
The configurations of the V/f characteristic include the additional functions described in the following which supple‐
ment the behaviour according to the programmed V/f characteristic.
16.4.2 Slip compensation
The slip is defined as the load-dependent difference between the reference and the actual speed of the asynchronous
motor . This dependency can be compensated by measuring the current in the output phases of the frequency
inverter. Operation Mode 660 makes it possible to control the speed without any feedback. The stator frequency
or speed is corrected depending on the load.
21471644/220808

0- Off The slip compensation is switched off.
1- On The load-dependent slip speed is compensated.
150 Tab. 189

The regulation process of the slip compensation can only be optimised by means of the parameters for special
applications. The parameter Amplification 661 determines the correction of the speed or the effect of the slip
compensation in proportion to the load change. The Max. slip ramp 662 defines the max. frequency change per
second, in order to avoid an overcurrent in the case of a load change.
The parameter Minimum frequency 663 determines from which frequency on the slip compensation will become
active.
Parameters Setting
661 Amplification 0,0% 300,0% 100,0%
662 Max. slip ramp 0.01 Hz/s 650.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s
663 Minimum Frequency 0.01 Hz 999.99 Hz 0.01 Hz
Tab. 190
16.4.3 Current limit controller
The current limit controller avoids any impermissible load on the drive system by means of load-dependent speed
control. This is extended by the intelligent current limits described in the previous chapter. The current limit controller
reduces, for example, the load on the drive during acceleration by stopping the acceleration ramp. This prevents
disconnection of the frequency inverter if the acceleration ramp is too steep. The current limit controller is switched
on and off by means of the Operation mode 610 parameter.

0- Off The functions of the current limit controller and the intelligent current limits are deactivated.
1- On The current limit controller is active.
Tab. 191
Behaviour during motor operation:
When the current set by means of the Current limit 613 parameter is exceeded, the activated current limit
controller will reduce the output frequency until the current limit is no longer exceeded. The output frequency is
maximally reduced down to the frequency set by means of the Frequency limit 614 parameter. When the current
falls below the Current limit 613, the output frequency is increased to the reference value again.
Behaviour during regenerative operation:
When the current set by means of the Current limit 613 parameter is exceeded, the current limit controller will
increase the output frequency until the current limit is no longer exceeded. The output frequency is maximally in‐
creased up to the set Maximum frequency 419. When the current falls below the Current limit 613, the output
frequency is reduced to the reference value again.
Parameters Setting
613 Current Limit 0.0 A ü·IFUN ü·IFUN
614 Frequency limit 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz 0.00 Hz

Tab. 192
The control behaviour of the current limit controller must be set via the proportional part, i.e. the Amplification
611 parameter and the integrating part, i.e. the Integral time 612 parameter. If, in exceptional cases, the con‐
troller parameters must be optimised, a setting should be made by a sudden variation of the parameter
Current limit 613.
Parameters Setting
611 Amplification 0,01 30,00 1,00
21471644/220808
Tab. 193
The dynamic response of the current limit controller and of the voltage controller is influenced by the setting of the
Dyn. voltage pre-control 605 parameter.
151
16.4.4 Technology controller
16.4.4.1 General
1 3
-
43202744_xml.eps
Fig. 104 Structure diagram: Technology controller
1 Reference percentage source 476 2 Actual percentage source 478

3 Actual values: Actual percentage value
230; Reference percentage value 229
The technology controller the behaviour of which corresponds to a proportional-plus-integral controller is available
as an additional function in configuration 111. The combination of reference and actual value of the application with
the frequency inverter functions provides for the process control without any further components. Thus applications
as e.g. the control of pressure, volumetric flow or speed can be implemented without any problems.
Particular attention must be paid to the configuration of the reference percentage source and to the link of the actual
percentage source.
Apart from the reference value the technology controller requires the link of an analog application variable with the
parameter Actual percentage source 478. The technology controller uses the difference between the refer‐
ence and the actual value for controlling the drive system. The actual value measured is mapped to the input signal
of the actual percentage source via a measuring transducer.

1- Analog input MFI1A The analog signal on the multi-function input 1 in the Operation mode 452 - analog
operation.
32 - Repetition frequency input (F3) The frequency signal on the digital input acc. to the selected Operation mode 496
Tab. 194
The function selected by means of the parameter Operation mode 440 defines the behaviour of the technology
controller.

0- Off The technology controller is switched off, the reference value is specified via the ref‐
erence percentage channel.
1- Standard For controlling the pressure and volumetric flow with linear operating characteristic
and actual value monitoring
2- Liquid Level 1 Level control with defined motor speed when the actual value is not available
3- Liquid Level 2 Level control with defined behaviour when the actual value is not available or the
system deviation is high
4- Speed Controller Speed control with analog feedback of the actual speed
5- Indirect Volume Flow Control Controlling the pressure or volumetric flow with reduced actual value
Tab. 195
CAUTION
21471644/220808
Particular attention must be paid to the factory-set link between the parameter SW-Step 1+ 68 and the logic signal
of the technology controller.
Hazard of injury or material damage.
152
By the controller enable on digital input S1IND, the technology controller becomes active.
The behaviour of the technology controller corresponds to a proportional-plus-integral controller. The proportional
part is optimised by means of the Amplification 444 parameter and the integral part by means of the
Integral time 445 parameter. The sign of the amplification determines the direction of control, i.e. the output
frequency is decreased with rising actual value and positive sign of the amplification (e.g. when controlling the
pressure). The output frequency is increased with rising actual value and negative sign of the amplification (e.g. with
temperature control, refrigerating machines, evaporators). The Max. P-component 442 parameter limits the fre‐
quency change at the controller output. This prevents system vibration when large acceleration ramps have been
selected. Hysteresis 443 limits the deviation of the output variable of the technology controller from the current
stator frequency of the motor in the operation modes standard and level 2.
Parameters Setting
441 Fixed Frequency -999.99 Hz +999.99 Hz 0.00 Hz
442 Max. P-component 0.01 Hz 999.99 Hz 50.00 Hz
443 Hysteresis 0,01% 100,00% 10,00%
444 Amplification -15,00 +15,00 1,00
446 Ind. volume flow control factor 0,10 2,00 1,00
Tab. 196
Programming the technology controller in the individual data sets makes it possible to adapt the system to different
working points of the application by means of the data set change-over via control contacts.
16.4.4.2 Operation mode standard
Parameter Operation mode 440 = 1
This operation mode is, for example, suitable for controlling pressure or volumetric flow with a linear operating
characteristic. If the actual value is not available (less than 0.5 %), the output frequency is set to the frequency
programmed with the Minimum frequency 418 parameter by means of the programmed Deceleration 421
parameter.
This function prevents that the drive starts up when the actual value is not available. When the actual value is
restored, the controller will automatically continue to operate. By means of the Hysteresis 443 parameter, an
overswing of the technology controller can be prevented by limiting its output value in relation to the stator frequency.
This means that the output value of the controller cannot be higher or lower than the current actual value plus the
limit values of the set hysteresis.
16.4.4.3 Operation mode level 1
This operation mode is e.g. suitable for controlling a level. If the actual value is not available (less than 0.5 %), the
output frequency is set to the frequency programmed with the Fixed frequency 441 parameter by means of the
programmed Deceleration 421 parameter. The Fixed frequency 441 must be programmed to a value higher
than or equal to the set Minimum frequency 418, otherwise the frequency is limited to 418.
If the actual value is not available, this function sets the drive to an adjustable frequency which may be in the control
range between the Minimum frequency 418 and the Maximum frequency 419 (FMAX).
When the actual value is restored, the controller will automatically continue to operate.
16.4.4.4 Operation mode level 2

21471644/220808
This operation mode is e.g. suitable for controlling a level. If the actual value is not available (less than 0.5%), the
output frequency is set to the Fixed frequency 441. If the system deviation becomes zero or negative, the output
frequency is set to the Minimum frequency 418 with the set Deceleration 421.
153
This function prevents that the drive starts up when the actual value is not available. If the system deviation becomes
zero or negative and the Minimum frequency 418 is set to 0 Hz, the drive is shut down. The power section is
switched off, i.e. no current is supplied to the motor, until the actual value is restored or the system deviation exceeds
the positive hysteresis 443.
16.4.4.5 Operation mode speed control
This operation mode is e.g. suitable for controlling the speed with an analog actual value encoder (e.g. analog
tachometer). If the actual value is not available (less than 0.5 %), the output frequency is set to the
Maximum frequency 419 with the programmed Acceleration 420. When the actual value is restored, the con‐
troller will automatically continue to operate.
16.4.4.6 Operation mode indirect volumetric flow control
This operation mode extends the functions of pressure and volumetric flow control in operation mode 1. The root-
extracted actual value in operation mode 5 makes it possible, for example, to measure the differential pressure
directly in the installation via the intake nozzle of the fan. The differential pressure has a square-law ratio to the
volumetric flow and is thus the controlled variable of the volumetric flow control. The calculation corresponds to the
"proportionality law", which generally applies to gyroscopic machines.
The adaptation to the individual application and the measurement are made via the
Ind. volume flow control factor 446. The actual values are calculated from the installation data rated
pressure and volumetric flow to be set according to the worst point process.
Structure diagram volumetric flow control
1 4
-
2 x
43202844_xml.eps
Fig. 105
1 Reference percentage source 476 3 Actual percentage source 478

2 Ind. volume flow control factor 446 4 Actual values: Volumetric flow 285;
Pressure 286
21471644/220808
154
16.5 Functions of field-oriented regulation
16.5.1 General
The field-oriented regulating processes are based on a cascade control and on the calculation of a complex machine
model. During the guided set-up an image of the machine is created by parameter identification which is transferred
to different parameters. These parameters are partially visible and can be optimised for different working points.
16.5.2 Current controller
The internal control loop of the field-oriented regulation consists of two current controllers. Thus the field-oriented
regulation applies the motor current to the machine via two components to be controlled. This is done by controlling
the flux-forming current component Isd and by controlling the torque-forming current component Isq.
By the separate control of these two components, the system is de-coupled equivalent to a DC machine with external
excitation.
The structure of the two current controllers is identical and makes it possible to set the amplification and the integral
time for both controllers together. For this purpose the parameters Amplification 700 and Integral time
701 are available. The integrating and the proportional part of the current controllers can be de-activated by setting
the parameter to zero.
Parameters Setting
700 Amplification 0,00 2,00 0,13
701 Integral time 0.00 ms 10.00 ms 10.00 ms
Tab. 197
The guided set-up has selected the parameters of the current controller so that they can be used without any mod‐
ifications in most application cases.
If, in exceptional cases, the current controller characteristics must be optimised, the reference value step change
during the flux-forming phase can be used for this purpose. If programmed appropriately, the reference value of the
flux-forming component rises in a step to the Current during Flux-Formation 781 value and after the
Maximum flux build-up time 780 has elapsed, it is regulated to the magnetisation current. The working point
necessary for an adjustment requires the setting of the parameter Minimum frequency 418 to the frequency value
0.00 Hz, since the drive is accelerated after magnetisation. The sudden response, which is defined by the ratio of
the currents mentioned above, should be measured in the motor supply line by means of a measuring current
transformer with a suitable range.
The output of the actual value calculated internally for the flux-forming current component via the analog output
cannot be used for this measurement, since the time resolution of the measurement is not sufficient.
For setting the parameters of the PI controller first the Amplification 700 is increased until the actual value shows
a clear overswing during the control process. Subsequently the amplification is reduced to half and the
Integral time 701 is followed up until the actual value shows a slight overswing during the regulation process.
The setting of the current controller should not be too dynamical, in order to ensure a sufficient control reserve. If
the control reserve is reduced, the control tends to increased vibration.
The dimensioning of the current controller parameters by calculating the time constant must be made for a modulation
frequency of 2 kHz. For all other modulation frequencies the values are adapted internally so that the setting may
remain unchanged for all modulation frequencies. The dynamic properties of the current controller improve with
increasing modulation and scanning frequency.
The following scanning frequencies of the current controller result from the fixed time interval for the modulation via
the parameter Modulation frequency 400.
Setting
Modulation frequency Scanning frequency
21471644/220808
4 kHz 4 kHz
8 kHz 8 kHz
155
Setting
Modulation frequency Scanning frequency
12 kHz 8 kHz
16 kHz 8 kHz
Tab. 198
16.5.3 Torque controller
The torque-controlled configurations frequently require that the speed is limited in the working points without load
torque. The control increases the speed for reaching the reference torque value until the
Frequency upper limit 767 or Frequency lower limit 768 is reached. From the limit value the speed is
set to the maximum, which corresponds to the behaviour of a speed controller. Thus the controller is limited to the
Maximum frequency 419.
Parameters Setting
767 Frequency upper limit -999.99 Hz 999.99 Hz 999.99 Hz
768 Frequency lower limit -999.99 Hz 999.99 Hz 999.99 Hz
Tab. 199
16.5.4 Limit value sources
Apart from fixed values, the frequency can also be limited by linking it to an analog input variable. The analog value
is limited by the Minimum reference percentage 518, Maximum reference percentage 519 parameters,
however it does not take the Gradient percentage ramp 477 of the reference percentage channel into account.
The allocation for the torque controller is made by means of the parameters
Frequency upper limit source 769 and Frequency lower limit source 770.

101 - Analog Input MFI1A The source is multi-function input 1 in an analog Operation mode 452
110 - Fixed Limit The selected parameter values are taken into account for limiting the speed controller.
201 - Inv. Analog Input MFI1A Inverted operation mode 101
210 - Inv. Fixed Limit Inverted operation mode 110
Tab. 200
16.5.5 Speed controller
16.5.5.1 General
The torque-forming current component is controlled by the speed controller in the external control loop. The speed
controller must be used in different operation modes specifically for the application which are selected by means of
the parameter Operation mode 720. The setting of the operation mode defines the use of the limits to be set in
relation to the direction of rotation or to the direction of the torque depending on the configuration selected.

0- Speed Controller Off The controller is deactivated or the torque-forming current component is equal to zero.
1- Limits The limitation of the speed controller assigns the upper limit to motor operation of the drive.
for Motor/Generator Op. (factory The same limit is used independent of the direction of rotation. The same applies to the lower
setting) limit for regenerative operation.
2- Limits pos./neg. Torque The limit is allocated by the sign of the variable to be limited. The positive limitation of the upper
limit is made independent of the working points of the drive at motor or regenerative operation.
The lower limit is considered as negative limit.
Tab. 201
21471644/220808
156
A B
a b a b
2 1 2 1
n n
1 2 1 2
43202944_xml.eps
Fig. 106
A Operation mode 1 2 Generator

B Operation mode 2 3 Motor current limit 728
a Counter-clockwise rotation 4 Generative current limit 729
b Clockwise rotation
1 Motor
The properties of the speed controller can be adapted for adjusting and optimising the control. The amplification and
the integral-action time of the speed controller must be set by means of the Amplification 721,
Integral time 722 parameters and for the second speed range by means of the Amplification f > f um
723, Integral time f > f um 724 parameters. A distinction between the speed ranges is made by means of
the value selected with the Switch-over frequency f um 738 parameter. The Amplification f > f um
723 and Integral time f > f um 724 parameters are taken into account for frequencies which are higher than
the selected Switch-over frequency f um 738 parameter.
The amplification set for the current working point can be additionally evaluated depending on the control deviation
via the Backlash damping 748 parameter. Particularly the behaviour of low-level signals in applications with a
gearbox can be improved by a value above zero.
Parameters Setting
721 Amplification 0,00 200,00 Depending on config.
722 Integral time 0 ms 60000 ms Depending on type
723 Amplification f > f um 0,00 200,00 5,00
724 Integral time f > f um 0 ms 60000 ms Depending on type
738 Switch-over frequency f um 0.00 Hz 999.99 Hz Depending on motor
748 Backlash damping 0% 300 % 0%
Tab. 202
The parameter Amplification 721 is automatically set to the following values after parameter identification:
Configuration 2xx : 10.00
Configuration 4xx : 5.00

21471644/220808
Therefore, any previously set values that deviate must be set again.
The factory-set integral-action time is related to the set machine data. This provides for a first function test in many
applications. The parameters for the current frequency range are distinguished by the software according to the limit
value selected. 157
The speed controller can be optimised by means of a reference value step change. The level of the step change is
defined by the set ramp or limitation. The PI controller should be optimised with the maximum permissible reference
value change. First the amplification is increased until the actual value shows a clear overswing during the control
process. This is perceptible from a strong speed vibration or from running noise. In the next step, the amplification
is reduced (1/2 ... 3/4 etc) and subsequently the integral time is also reduced (higher I share), until the actual value
only shows a slight overswing during the control process.
If required, the speed control adjustment for dynamic processes, i.e. accelerating and decelerating, is checked in a
second step. The frequency at which the controller parameters are switched over can be set by means of the
Switch-over frequency f um 738 parameter.
16.5.5.2 Limitation of the speed controller
The output signal of the speed controller is the torque-forming current component Isq. The output and the I share of
the speed controller are limited by the Motor current limit 728, Generative current limit 729,
Motor torque limitation 730, Generative torque limitation 731 or
Power limit motor operation 739, Power limit generator operation 740 parameters. The limits of
the proportional share are set by means of the P share motor torque limitation 732 and
P share generative torque limitation 733 parameters.
● The output value of the controller is limited by an upper and a lower current limit by the
Motor current limit 728 and Generative current limit 729 parameter. The limit values are specified
in amps. Apart from the fixed limits, the current limits of the controller also must be linked to analog input variables.
The allocation is made by means of the Isq limit source motor operation 734 and
Isq limit source generator op. 735 parameters.
● The output value of the controller is limited by an upper and a lower torque limit by the
Motor torque limitation 730 and Generative torque limitation 731 parameters. The limit values
are specified as a percentage of the motor rated torque. The allocation of fixed values or analog limit values is
made by means of the Torque limit source motor op. 736 and Torque limit source gen. op.
737 parameters.
● The output value of the proportional share is set by means of the P share motor torque limitation
732 and P share generative torque limitation 733 parameters. The limit values are specified as
torque limits in percent of the motor rated torque.
● The motor output power is proportional to the product of speed and torque. This output power can be limited by
means of a Power limit motor operation 739 and Power limit generator operation 740. The
power limits are specified in kilowatts.
Parameters Setting
728 Motor current limit 0.0 A ü·IFUN ü·IFUN
729 Generative current limit 0.1 A ü·IFUN ü·IFUN
730 Motor torque limitation 0,00% 650,00% 650,00%

731 Generative torque limitation 0,00% 650,00% 650,00%
732 P share motor torque limitation 0,00% 650,00% 100,00%
733 P share generative torque limita‐ 0,00% 650,00% 100,00%
tion
739 Power Limit Motor Operation 0.00 kW 2·ü·PFUN 2·ü·PFUN
740 Power limit generator operation 0.00 kW 2·ü·PFUN 2·ü·PFUN

Tab. 203
16.5.5.3 Limit value sources
As an alternative to the limitation of output values by a fixed value, the link with an analog input variable is also
possible. The analog value is limited by the Minimum reference percentage 518,
Maximum reference percentage 519 parameters, however it does not take the
21471644/220808
Gradient percentage ramp 477 of the reference percentage channel into account. The allocation is made by
means of the Isq limit source motor operation 734 and Isq limit source generator op. 735
parameters.
158
The sources for the torque limits are specified in the same way by means of the
Torque limit source motor op. 736 and Torque limit source gen. op 737 parameters.
Source 734 ... 735 Functions

101 - Analog input MFI1A The source is multi-function input 1 in an analog Operation mode 452
105 - Repetition frequency input (F3) The frequency signal on the repetition rate input acc. to the Operation mode 496
110 - Fixed limit value (Factory setting) The selected parameter values are taken into account for limiting the speed controller.
Tab. 204
The data sets for the selected limit values and links with different limit source values can be changed. If the data
set change-over is used, the corresponding parameters must be checked.
16.5.6 Acceleration pre-control
The acceleration pre-control is active in the speed-controlled configurations and can be activated by means of the
Operation mode 725 parameter.

0- Off (factory setting) The control behaviour is not influenced.
1- On Depending on the limit values the acceleration pre-control is active.
Tab. 205
The acceleration pre-control controlled in parallel to the speed controller reduces the response time of the drive in
the case of a reference value change. The minimum acceleration time defines the speed of change of the speed
reference value from which a torque necessary for accelerating the drive is pre-controlled. The acceleration of the
mass depends on the Mech. time constant 727 of the system. The value calculated from the gradient of the
reference value and the multiplier of the required torque is added to the output signal of the speed controller.
Parameters Setting
726 Minimum Acceleration 0.1 Hz/s 6,500.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s
727 Mech. time constant 1 ms 60000 ms 10 ms
Tab. 206
For an optimum setting the acceleration pre-control is switched on and the mechanical time constant is set to the
minimum value. During the acceleration processes the output value of the speed controller is compared to the
minimum acceleration time. The frequency ramp must be set to the highest value occurring during operation at which
the output value of the speed controller is not yet limited. Subsequently the value of the
Minimum acceleration 726 is set to half the set acceleration ramp, in order to ensure that the acceleration pre-
control becomes active. Acceleration pre-control is increased by increasing the Mech. time constant 727 until
the output value corresponds to the time change of the drive during the acceleration processes.
16.5.7 Field controller
16.5.7.1 General
The flux-forming current component is controlled by the field controller in the external control loop. The guided set-
up optimises the parameters of the field controller by measuring the time constant and magnetisation curve of the
asynchronous machine connected. The field controller parameters are selected in such a way that they can be used
without any modifications in most applications. The proportional as well as the integrating part of the field controller
must be set by means of the Amplification 741 and Integral time 742 parameters.
Parameters Setting
717 Flow correction factor 0,01% 300,00% 100,00%
741 Amplification 0,0 100,0 5,0
21471644/220808

Tab. 207
159
The control parameters of the field controller should be optimised in the basic speed range. The frequency to be set
should be shortly before the limit of the modulation controller selected by means of the
Reference modulation 750 parameter so that is does not become active. Flow correction factor 717
should only be optimised in exceptional cases. The adjusted percentage value changes the flux-forming current
component as a ratio of the torque-forming current component. Therefore, correction of the magnetisation current
by means of the Flow correction factor 717 changes the torque of the drive. If the
Flow correction factor 717 parameter is decreased in a step (switching over from 100% to 50%), the con‐
trolled variable Isd can be measured by means of an oscillograph. After one oscillation the signal curve of the flux-
forming current Isd should reach the stationary value without oscillations. The integral time of the field controller
should be selected according to half the rotor time constant calculated by the software. The actual value to be read
out via the Current rotor time constant 227 parameter divided by two must be used for the
Integral time 742 in a first approach. If the application requires a faster transfer into field-weakening, the integral
time should be reduced. In order to obtain a good dynamic performance of the controller, a relatively high amplifi‐
cation should be selected. Please note that controlling a load with low-pass behaviour as in the case of an
asynchronous motor requires an increased overswing to obtain good control behaviour.
CAUTION
Brake does not release:

Increased brake wear
For KB motors it must be checked whether the brake has released safely. If required, the parameter
Flow correction factor 717 must be increased.
16.5.7.2 Limitation of the field controller
The output signal of the field controller, consisting of the integrating and the proportional component, is limited by
means of the parameters Ref. Isd upper limit 743 or Ref. Isd lower limit 744. The guided set-up has
set the parameter Ref. Isd upper limit 743 according to the parameter Rated current 371.
Parameters Setting
743 Ref. Isd upper limit 0.1·IFUN ü·IFUN IFUN
744 Ref. Isd lower limit - IFUN IFUN 0,0

Tab. 208
Apart from the maximum current which occurs, the limits of the field controller define the dynamic performance of
the controller. The upper and the lower limit limit the speed of change of the motor flux and the torque resulting from
it. Particularly the speed range above the rated frequency must be taken into account for the change of the flux-
forming component. The upper limit must be estimated from the product of the set magnetisation current and the
Flow correction factor 717, however, the limit must not exceed the overload current of the drive.
16.5.7.3 KB de-magnetization time
For cylindrical rotor motors, e.g. Demag Z motors, the KB de-magnetisation time must be set to 0.
Owing to the design, the Demag KB brake motor starts to run on when it is stopped. Run-on is reduced by means
of the KB de-magnetization feature. It becomes effective when the brake of the KB motor is applied. This function
maintains the torque for the duration of the KB de-magnetisation time 813 which, however, reduces magnet‐
isation of the motor as a consequence of which the rotor slides into the brake.
To optimise, increase the KB de-magnetisation time 813 from 0 ms in 20 ms increments until run-on is sig‐
nificantly reduced. Then increase in 5 ms increments until no further reduction of the run-on is achieved.
Parameters Setting
21471644/220808
813 KB de-magnetization time 0 ms 200 ms 0 ms

Tab. 209
160
16.5.8 Modulation controller
16.5.8.1 General
The modulation controller designed as an integral-action controller automatically adapts the output value of the
frequency inverter to the machine behaviour in the basic speed range and in the field-weakening range. If the mod‐
ulation exceeds the value set by means of the parameter Reference modulation 750, the flux-forming current
component and thus the flux in the machine are reduced.
In order to use the available voltage as effectively as possible, the variable selected by means of the parameter
Operation mode 753 is set in a proportion to the link voltage. This means that a high output voltage is available
for a high line voltage and the drive reaches the field-weakening range later and produces a higher torque.

0- Usq-Control The output voltage ratio is calculated from the ratio of the torque-building voltage component
Usq and the link voltage.
1- V-Absolute Value Control The modulation is calculated from the ratio of the absolute voltage value and the link voltage.
Tab. 210
The integrating part of the modulation controller can be set by means of the parameter Integral time 752.
Parameters Setting
750 Reference modulation 3,00% 105,00% 102,00%
Tab. 211
The percentage setting of the Reference modulation 750 mainly depends on the leakage inductance of the
motor. The default value is selected so that in most cases the remaining difference of 5% is sufficient as control
reserve for the current controller. In order to optimise the controller parameters, the drive is accelerated into the field-
weakening range along a flat ramp, so that the modulation controller is engaged. The limit is set by means of the
parameter Reference modulation 750. Subsequently the control loop can be activated with a jump function
(switching between 95% and 50%) by changing the reference modulation. The control process of the modulation
controller can be evaluated by measuring the flux-forming current component by means of an oscillograph at the
analog output of the frequency inverter. After one oscillation the signal curve of the flux-forming current Isd should
reach the stationary value without oscillations. Oscillations in the current curve must be dampened by increasing
the integral time. The parameter Integral time 752 should approximatively correspond to the actual value
Current rotor time constant 227.
16.5.8.2 Limitation of the modulation controller
The output signal of the modulation controller is the internal flux reference value. The controller output and the
integrating part are limited by means of the parameters Reference Imr lower limit 755 or by the product of
Idle current 716 and Flow correction factor 717. The magnetising current parameter building the upper
limit must be set to the rated value of the motor. For the lower limit a value must be selected which builds up a
sufficient flux in the motor also in the field-weakening range. The limitation of the control deviation at the input of the
modulation controller prevents possible vibration of the control loop in the case of load impulses. The parameter
Control deviation limitation 756 is specified as an absolute value and acts as a positive as well as a
negative limit value.
Parameters Setting
755 Reference Imr lower limit 0.01·IFUN ü·IFUN 0.01·IFUN
756 Control deviation limitation 0,00% 100,00% 10,00%

Tab. 212
21471644/220808
161
17 Special functions
17.1 General
The different software configurations provide for a wide range of applications of the frequency inverter, since the
functions in the individual control and regulating processes are freely configurable. Additional application-specific
functions facilitate the integration into the application.
17.2 Pulse width modulation

Motor noise can be reduced by switching over the parameter Modulation frequency 400. The modulation fre‐
quency should be reduced up to a ratio of max. 1:10 of the frequency of the sinusoidal output signal. The maximum
modulation frequency depends on the drive output and on the ambient conditions. The necessary technical data can
be seen from the table and the diagrams for the corresponding type.
Parameters Setting
400 Modulation frequency 2 kHz 16 kHz 4 kHz
Tab. 213
In configuration 410 only modulation frequencies from 4 kHz on can be used.
See ⇒ "Configuration", Page 63
Heat loss increases in proportion to the load point of the frequency inverter and to the modulation frequency. The
automatic reduction adapts the modulation frequency to the current operating status of the frequency inverter, in
order to make available the output power required for the drive application at maximum dynamic performance and
minimum noise.
The modulation frequency is adapted between the limits which can be set by means of the parameters
Modulation frequency 400 and Min. modulation frequency 401. If the
Min. modulation frequency 401 is higher than or equal to the Modulation frequency 400, the automatic
reduction is deactivated.
Parameters Setting
401 Min. modulation frequency 2 kHz 16 kHz 4 kHz
Tab. 214
The modulation frequency is changed depending on the cut-off limit of the heat sink temperature and on the output
current. The temperature limit, which if exceeded reduces the modulation frequency, can be set by means of the
parameter Reduction limit Ti/Tc 580. If the heat sink temperature falls by more than 5°C below the threshold
set by means of the parameter Reduction limit Ti/Tc 580, the modulation frequency is increased in steps.
Parameters Setting
580 Reduction limit Ti/Tc -25 °C 0 °C -4 °C
Tab. 215
The limit value for the reduction of the modulation frequency is influenced by the intelligent current limits depending
on the selected Operation mode 573 and on the output current. If these are switched off or make available the
full overload current, the modulation frequency is reduced, when the output current exceeds the limit value of 87.5%
of the long-term overload current (60 s). The modulation frequency is increased, when the output current falls below
the rated current of the next higher modulation frequency.
17.3 Fan
The switch-on temperature of the heat sink fan can be set by means of the parameter
Switch-on temperature 39.
21471644/220808
When the temperatur is set to 0 °C, the fan is permanently switched on.
When the heat sink temperature exceeds the set temperature value in the "Ready" status of the frequency inverter
162 (green LED flashes), the fan is switched on.
When the heat sink temperature falls by more than 5 °C below the set temperature value, the fan is switched off
after a delay of one minute.
If the warnings TC or TI are applied or the modulation is switched on, the fan is switched on and switched off again
after a delay of one minute.
This "43 - External fan" function can be additionally linked to a digital output to control an external fan. See ⇒ "Digital
outputs", Page 130
Parameters Setting
39 Switch-on temperature 0 °C 60 °C 0 °C
Tab. 216
17.4 Brake chopper

Frequency inverters are supplied ex works with an integrated brake chopper transistor. The external braking resistor
is connected to terminals Rb1 and Rb2. The parameter Trigger threshold 506 defines the switch-on threshold
of the brake chopper. The regenerative output of the drive resulting in an increase of the link voltage is converted
into heat by the external braking resistor from the trigger threshold on. The monitoring of the resistor temperature
must be integrated in the safety circuit.
Parameters Setting
506 Trigger threshold Ud-min+25V 1,000.0 V UdBC = 780.0 V
Tab. 217
The resistors mentioned in section ⇒ "Braking resistors", Page 208 are rated for a voltage of 780 V. For these
resistors the parameter Trigger threshold 506 can remain unchanged.
If a deviating trigger threshold is required for resistors rated otherwise, the parameter must be set so that it is between
the maximum link voltage which the mains supply can produce and the maximum admissible link voltage of the
frequency inverter.
UAC .1,1. 2 < UdBC < 800,0V
43203044_xml.eps
Fig. 107
When the parameter Trigger threshold 506 is set higher than the maximum admissible link voltage, the brake
chopper cannot become active, it is switched off.
17.5 Motor chopper

Field-oriented regulation includes the function for appropriately converting a part of the regenerative energy into heat
in the asynchronous machine connected. This allows the implementation of a dynamic speed change at minimum
system cost. The torque and speed characteristics of the drive system are not influenced by the programmed type
of braking. The parameter Trigger threshold 507 of the link voltage defines the switch-on threshold of the motor
chopper function.
Parameters Setting
21471644/220808

507 Trigger threshold Udmin+25 V 1,000.0 V UdMC
Tab. 218
163
The parameter Trigger threshold 507 must be set so that it is between the maximum link voltage which the
mains supply can produce and the maximum admissible link voltage of the frequency inverter.
UAC .1,1. 2 < UdMC < 800,0V
43203144_xml.eps
Fig. 108
When the parameter Trigger threshold 507 is set higher than the maximum admissible link voltage, the motor
chopper cannot become active, it is switched off.
17.6 Motor protective switch
2h
100
40
1 10
1
40
20
2 10
5
2
1
200
G
R L K
U
50
3
20
2
1,5 2 3 5 10 30
4
43203244_xml.eps
21471644/220808
Fig. 109
1 minutes
2 seconds
164
3 mill. seconds
4 x rated current
Motor circuit-breakers are used for protecting the motor and its supply line against overheating due to overload.
Depending on the amount of overload, their instantaneous tripping is used as a protection against short circuits and
their slow tripping as overload protection.
Conventional motor circuit breakers are commercially available for different applications with different tripping char‐
acteristics (L, G/U, R and K) according to the diagram on the right. Since frequency inverters are mostly used for
supplying motors which are classified as equipment with very high starting currents, the K characteristic is exclusively
used for this function.
In contrast to the mode of operation of a conventional motor circuit breaker, which immediately isolates the equipment
to be protected when reaching the tripping threshold, this function provides for the possibility of sending a warning
message, instead of immediately isolating the motor.
The rated current of the motor circuit-breaker is related to the rated current of the motor which is specified by means
of the Rated current 371 parameter of the corresponding data set. The rated values of the frequency inverter
must be taken into account when dimensioning the application.
The function of the motor circuit breaker can be switched over to different data sets. Thus different motors can be
operated at one frequency inverter. Each motor can be equipped with its own motor circuit-breaker.
In case the frequency inverter is operated with a motor for which some variables, as e.g. the minimum and the
maximum frequency, are changed via the data set change-over, only one motor circuit-breaker may be used. This
function can be specified for single-motor or multi-motor operation by selecting the parameter Operation mode
571.

0- Off The function is de-activated.
1- K-Char.,Mul.Motor Op.,Err.Sw.Off The rated values are monitored in each of the four data sets. Overload of the drive is
avoided by disconnection on fault "F0401".
2- K-Char.,Sing.Motor,Err.Sw.-Off The rated values of the first data set are used independent of the active data set.
Overload of the drive is avoided by disconnection on fault "F0401".
11 - K-Char.,Multi-Motor Op., Wwarning The rated values are monitored in each of the four data sets. Overload of the drive is
signalled by warning message "A0200".
22 - K-Char.,Single-Motor,Warning The rated values of the first data set are used independent of the active data set.
Overload of the drive is signalled by warning message "A0200".
Tab. 219
Multi-motor operation:
Parameter Operation mode 571 = 1 or 11
In multi-motor operation it is assumed that an associated motor is used for each data set. For this purpose a motor
and a motor circuit-breaker are assigned to each data set. In this operation mode the rated values of the active data
set are monitored. The current output current of the frequency inverter is only taken into account for the motor circuit-
breaker activated by the data set. The currents in the motor circuit-breakers of the other data sets are calculated as
zero, thus taking the thermal decay into account. In connection with the data set changeover, the function of the
motor circuit-breakers equals the behaviour of motors with their own circuit-breakers which are alternately connected
to the mains supply.
Single-motor operation:
Parameter Operation mode 571 = 2 or 22
In single motor operation only one motor circuit breaker is active monitoring the output current of the frequency
inverter. With a data set changeover only the cut-off limits resulting from the rated machine data are switched over.
Accumulated thermal values are further used after the change-over. When changing over data sets it must be en‐
sured that the motor data are specified identically for all data sets. In connection with the data set changeover, the
function of the motor circuit-breakers equals the behaviour of motors with a common circuit-breaker which are al‐
ternately connected to the mains supply.
21471644/220808
Motor protection particularly of non-ventilated motors is improved by the Frequency limit 572. The output current
measured in working points below the frequency limit is evaluated higher by factor 2 when calculating the tripping
characteristic.
165
Parameters Setting
572 Frequency limit 0% 300% 0%
Tab. 220
17.7 Bus controller

Frequency inverters can be extended with various options for data communication and can thus be integrated into
an automation and control system. Programming and set-up can be made via the optional communication interface
board , the operating unit or the interface adapter. The serial communication protocols are set to a transmission rate
of 9600 Baud. The parameter Local/Remote 412 defines the operating behaviour and a change between the
control via contacts or operating unit and the interface.
Local/Remote 412 Functions

0- Control via Contacts The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation are
transmitted via digital signals.
1- Control via Statemachine The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation are
transmitted via the DRIVECOM state machine of the communication interface.
2- Control via Remote-Contacts The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation are
transmitted via logic signals through the communication protocol.
3- Ctrl. KP The start and stop command is given from the operating unit and the specification of
, direction Contacts the direction of rotation via digital signals.
4- Ctrl. KP+Cont., direction Cont. The start and stop command is given from the operating unit or via digital signals. The
direction of rotation is only specified via digital signals.
13 - Control via KP The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation given
, Direction KP via the operating unit.
14 - Control KP+Cont., Direction KP The start and stop command is given from the operating unit or via digital signals. The
direction of rotation is only specified via the operating unit.
20 - Control Contacts The start and stop command is transmitted via digital signals. The direction of rotation
23 - Control Keypad The start and stop command is given from the operating unit. The direction of rotation
24 - Control Cont. + KP The start and stop command is given from the operating unit or via digital signals. The
, Clockw. direction of rotation is fixed to clockwise rotation.
30 to 34 Operation mode 20 to 24, only anti-clockwise rotation
43 - Crtl. KP The start and stop command is given from the operating unit. The direction of rotation
, Dir. Cont. + KP is specified via the operating unit or via digital signals.
44 - Ctrl. Cont.+KP, Dir. Cont.+KP The start and stop command and the specification of the direction of rotation are given
from the operating unit or via digital signals.
Tab. 221
17.8 Temperature adjustment

Only for field-oriented regulation, configuration 2xx and 4xx
Field-oriented regulation processes are based on the calculation of a machine model which must be as precise as
possible. The rotor time constant is an important machine variable for the calculation. The value to be read out by
means of the parameter Current rotor time constant 227 is calculated from the inductance of the rotor
circuit and the rotor resistance. In the case of a very large temperature range or very demanding requirements
regarding accuracy, the dependency of the rotor time constant from the motor temperature can be taken into account
by a suitable measurement. Different methods and actual value sources for temperature measurement can be se‐
lected via the parameter Operation mode 465.

21471644/220808

1- Temp. measurement on MFI1A Temperature correction (0 ... 200 °C => 0/2 ... 10 V),
actual temperature value on multi-function input 1
166
2- Temp. measurement on EM-S1INA Temperature correction (0 ... 200 °C => 0/2 ... 10 V),
actual temperature value on the analog input of the extension module
4- Temp. measurement when starting Temperature measurement by calculating the winding resistance when starting the
drive
Tab. 222
The operating modes 1, 2 and 2 require an external measurement of the temperature which evaluates the temper‐
ature sensor (PT100) and supplies an image of the temperature range from 0 ... 200 °C in form of an analog voltage
or current signal.
In operation mode 4 – only available in configurations 210 and 230 – the winding resistance is measured when the
controller enable is applied to input S1IND and a travel signal is applied to input SW-Step1+ or SW-Step 1- and thus
the Winding temperature 226 and the Current rotor time constant 227 are corrected. The measure‐
ment is only carried out, when no current was applied to the motor before the travel command for a period of 5 times
theCurrent rotor time constant 227.
The material used for the rotor winding of the motor is taken into account by means of the parameter
Temperature coefficient 466. This value defines the change of the rotor resistance as a function of the tem‐
perature for a certain material of the rotor winding. Typical temperature coefficients are 39%/100 °C for copper and
36%/100 °C for aluminium at a temperature of 20 °C.
The temperature characteristic is calculated by the software by means of the above-mentioned temperature coeffi‐
cient and the Adjusting temperature 467 parameter. Apart from the parameter
Rotor time constant correction factor 718 the adjusting temperature is an additional means for opti‐
mising the rotor time constant.
Parameters Setting
466 Temperature coefficient 0.00% / 100 °C 300.00% / 100 °C 39.00% / 100 °C
467 Adjusting temperature -50 °C 300 °C 100 °C
Tab. 223
The correction of the rotor time constant depending on the winding temperature can be adjusted. Normally the values
set in the factory should be sufficiently accurate that neither any adjustment of the rotor time constant via the
Rotor time constant correction factor 718 nor any adjustment of the temperature correction by means
of the Temperature coefficient 466 are necessary. For the adjustment it must be taken into consideration
that the rotor time constant is calculated from the motor data during the guided set-up. The
Adjusting temperature 467 must be set to the temperature at which the parameter identification has been
carried out. The temperature must be read out via the actual value parameter Winding temperature 226 and
can be used for the parameter during optimisation.
17.9 Rotary encoder monitoring

Only for field-oriented regulation, configuration 210 and 230
Malfunctions of the rotary encoder will lead to drive faults, since the control process is based on the measured speed.
Encoder monitoring continuously monitors the rotary encoder signal, the channel signals and the division marks
(pulse number per revolution). When the frequency inverter is released and a faulty signal longer than the time-out
is detected, this will result in a disconnection on fault. If the parameter Operation mode 760 is set to zero, the
monitoring function is deactivated.

2- Error Depending on the set time-out, an error message is displayed.
Tab. 224
The parameters for the partial functions of encoder monitoring must be set accordding to the application. The mon‐
21471644/220808
itoring function becomes active with the release of the frequency inverter and the starting command being applied.
The time-out defines the monitoring time during which the condition for a disconnection on fault must be continuously
fulfilled. If one time-out is set to zero, the monitoring function is deactivated.
167
Parameters Setting
761 Time-out: Signal fault 0 ms 65000 ms 150 ms
762 Time-out: Channel fault 0 ms 65000 ms 150 ms
763 Time-out: Direction fault 0 ms 65000 ms 500 ms
Tab. 225
Timeout: Signal fault
The actual speed value measured is compared to the output value of the speed controller. If the actual speed value
is exactly zero for the time set by means of the parameterTimeout: Signal fault 761, although a reference
value is applied, the error is displayed by means of the "F1430" message.
Timeout: Channel fault
The actual speed value determination monitors the time sequence of the signals in the operation mode quadruple
evaluation. If the rotary encoder signal is faulted for the time set by means of the parameter
Timeout: Channel fault 762, the error is displayed by means of the "F1431" message.
Timeout: Direction fault
The actual speed value measured is continuously compared to the speed reference value. If the sign between
reference value and actual value is different for the time set by means of the parameter
Timeout: Direction fault 763, the error is displayed by means of the "F1432" message. The monitoring
function is reset as soon as the drive has turned by a quarter of a revolution in the direction of the reference value.
21471644/220808
168
18 Actual Values
18.1 General
The different control and regulating processes include controlled electrical variables and different calculated actual
values of the motor or installation. The manifold actual values can be used for an operation and error diagnosis via
a communication interface or in the menu branch VAL of the operating unit.
18.2 Actual frequency inverter values

Depending on the selected configuration and the extension cards installed, only certain actual values can be dis‐
played.
Actual frequency inverter values

No. Description Functions
222 Link Voltage DC voltage in the link
223 Output voltage ratio Output voltage of the frequency inverter related to the mains voltage (100% = UFUN)
228 Internal reference frequency Sum of Drive controls 475 as reference value from the frequency reference
channel
229 Reference percentage value Sum of Reference percentage source 476 as the reference value from the ref‐
erence percentage channel
230 Actual percentage value Actual value signal at the Actual percentage source 478
244 Working hours counter Working hours in which the power output stage is active
245 Operation hours counter Operation hours of the frequency inverter in which the supply voltage is applied
249 Active data set Depending on the Data set change-over 1 70 and
Data set change-over 2 71 the active data set used
250 Digital inputs Decimal-coded status of the six digital inputs and of the multi-function input 1 in
Operation mode 452 "3 – digital input"
251 Analog input MFI1A Input signal on the multi-function input 1 in Operation mode 452 "1 – voltage input"
or "2 – current input"
252 Repetition frequency input Signal on the repetition frequency input acc. to Operation mode 496
253 Analog input EM-S1INA Signal on analog input EM-S1INA of the EM extension module
254 Digital outputs Decimal-coded status of the two digital outputs and of the multi-function output 1 in
Operation mode 550 - digital
255 Heat sink temperature Measured heat sink temperature

256 Interior temperature Temperature measured inside housing
257 Analog output MFO1A Output signal on multi-function output 1 in Operation mode 550 "2 – Analog"
259 Current Error Error message with error code and acronym
266 Analog output EM-S1OUTA Signal on analog output EM-S1OUTA of the EM extension module
269 Warnings Warning message with warning code and acronym
275 Controller status The reference value signal is limited by the controllers coded in the controller status.
278 Frequency MFO1F Output frequency on multi-function output MFO1 in Operation mode 550 "3 – rep‐
etition frequency"
282 Reference bus frequency Internal reference frequency
283 Reference Ramp Frequency Internal reference frequency
Tab. 226
18.3 Actual machine values

The frequency inverter controls the behaviour of the machine in different working points. Depending on the selected
configuration and the extension cards installed, controlled variables and further actual value parameters of the motor
can be displayed.
21471644/220808
Actual machine values

210 Stator frequency The output frequency (motor frequency) of the frequency inverter
211 Motor current Calculated root-mean-square output current (motor current) of the frequency inverter 169
Actual machine values
212 Motor voltage Calculated root-mean-square value of the phase-to-phase output voltage (motor volt‐
age) of the frequency inverter.
213 Active power Active power calculated from voltage, current and controlled variables
214 Active current Active power calculated from the rated motor parameters, current and controlled var‐
iables
215 Flow current share Isd The magnetic flux-forming current component of the field-oriented regulation
216 Torque current share Isq The torque-forming current component of the field-oriented regulation
217 Encoder 1 frequency Calculated from the data of rotary encoder 1, the No. of pole pairs 373 and the
rotary encoder signal
218 Encoder 1 speed Calculated from the encoder 1 frequency
Only with EM extension module!
220 Encoder 2 speed Calculated from the encoder 2 frequency
Only with EM extension module!
221 Slip frequency Difference to the synchronous frequency calculated from the rated motor parameters,
controlled variables and current
224 Torque Torque calculated from voltage, current and controlled variables at the current output
frequency
225 Rotor flux Current magnetic flux related to the rated motor parameters
226 Winding temperature Temperature of the motor winding measured according to Operation mode 465 of
the temperature adjustment
227 Current rotor time constant Time constant calculated from the rated motor parameters and the measured and
controlled variables for the working point of the motor
235 Flux-forming voltage The magnetic flux-forming voltage component of the field-oriented regulation
236 Torque-forming voltage The torque-forming voltage component of the field-oriented regulation
238 Flux value Magnetic flux calculated according to the rated values and the working point of the
motor
239 Reactive current Reactive current calculated from the rated motor parameters, the controlled variables
and the current
240 Actual speed Measured or calculated speed of the drive
241 Actual frequency Measured or calculated frequency of the drive
Tab. 227
18.4 Actual system values

Certain actual value parameters are converted into system data in the Dedrive Compact
Actual system values

242 Actual value system Product of actual frequency and parameter Factor actual value system 389
Tab. 228
18.5 Actual value memory

The evaluation and maintenance of the frequency inverter in the corresponding application is facilitated by the saving
of different actual values. The actual value memory ensures the monitoring of the individual variables over a defined
period of time. The parameters of the actual value memory can be read out via a communication interface and
displayed via the operating unit. Additionally the peak and mean values can be monitored in the menu branch VAL
of the operating unit.
21471644/220808
170
Actual value memory
231 Peak value long term Ixt The utilisation of the overload of 60 s depending on the unit
232 Peak value short term Ixt The utilisation of the overload of 10 s depending on the unit
287 Peak value Udc The max. link voltage measured
288 Average value Udc The average link voltage calculated for the specified period of time
289 Peak value heat sink temp. The highest heat sink temperature measured on the frequency inverter
290 Average value heat sink temp. The average heat sink temperature calculated for the specified period of time
291 Peak value inside temperature The max. inside temperature measured on the frequency inverter
292 Average value inside temperature The average inside temperature calculated for the specified period of time
293 Peak value Irms The highest absolute current value calculated from the measured motor phases
294 Average value Irms The average absolute current value calculated for the specified period of time
295 Peak value active power pos. The highest active power calculated in motor operation
296 Peak value active power neg. Max. active power in generator operation calculated from voltage, current and con‐
trolled variables
297 Average value active power The average active power calculated for the specified period of time
301 Energy, positive The energy calculated for the motor in motor operation
302 Energy, negative The energy calculated for the motor in generator operation
Tab. 229
The Reset memory 237 parameter to be selected in the PARA menu branch of the operating unit makes it possible
to reset the specific individual average and peak values. The peak value and average value with the values stored
over the specified period of time are overwritten with the parameter value zero.
Reset memory 237 Functions

0- No Reset Values of the actual value memory remain unchanged
1- Peak value long term Ixt Reset Peak value long term Ixt 231
2- Peak value short term Ixt Reset Peak value short term Ixt 232
3- Peak value Udc Reset Peak value Udc 287
4- Average value Udc Delete Average value Udc 288
5- Peak value Tc Reset Peak value heat sink temp. 289
6- Average value Tc Delete Average value heat sink temp. 290
7- Peak value Ti Reset Peak value inside temperature 291
8- Average value Ti Delete Average value inside temperature 292
9- Peak value Iabs. Reset Peak value Irms 293
10 - Average value Iabs. Delete Average value Irms 294
11 - Peak value Pactive pos. Reset Peak value active power pos. 295
12 - Peak value Pactive neg. Reset Peak value active power neg. 296
13 - Average value Pactive Delete Average value active power 297
16 - Energy, positive Reset Energy, positive 301 parameter
17 - Energy, negative Reset Energy, negative 302 parameter
100 - All peak values Reset all saved peak values

101 - All average values Delete average and saved values
102 - All values Delete entire actual value memory
Tab. 230
21471644/220808
171
19 Error protocol
19.1 General
The different control and regulating processes and the hardware of the frequency inverter include functions which
continuously monitor the application. The operation and error diagnosis is simplified by the information stored in the
error protocol.
19.2 Error list
19.2.1 General
The last 16 error messages which have occurred with the modulation switched on are stored in the error list in
chronological order and the No. of Errors 362 shows the total number of errors which have occurred.
Error messages 0700 , 1102 , 2100 and 2150 are additionally entered in the error list, even if the modulation is
switched off.
The error code Fxxxx is shown in menu branch VAL of the operating unit and the operation hours (h), the operation
minutes (m) and the error message can additionally be read out via the PC user interface. The current operating
hours can be read out via the Operation hours counter 245. The error message must be acknowledged via
the keyboard of the operating unit according to the link Error acknowledgment 103.
Error list
310 Last error hhhhh:mm ; Fxxxx error message
311 Last error but one hhhhh:mm ; Fxxxx error message
312 to 325 Error 3 to error 16
362 No. of Errors Number of errors occurred after putting the frequency inverter into operation
Tab. 231
The behaviour of the frequency inverter in the case of errors and warnings can be programmed variously. Automatic
error acknowledgement makes it possible to acknowledge the Overcurrent F0500, Overcurrent F0507 and Over‐
voltage F0700 errors without any intervention by a higher-level control system or by a user. The
No. of self acknowledged errors 363 shows the total number of automatic error acknowledgements.
Error list
363 No. of self acknowledged errors Total number of automatic error acknowledgements with synchronisation
Tab. 232
19.2.2 Error messages
The error code stored after an error is made up of fault group FXX and the following code number XX.
For error messages SFxxx, ⇒ "Plausibility check", Page 65 and ⇒ "Parameter identification", Page 66.
Error messages
Code Meaning
F00 00 No fault has occurred
Overload
F01 02 Frequency inverter overloaded (60 s), check load beahviour
03 Short-term overload (10 s), check the motor and application parameters
Heat sink
F02 00 Heat sink temperature too high, check the cooling and fan
01 Temperature sensor defective or ambient temperature too low
Interior
21471644/220808
F03 00 Interior temperature too high, check the cooling and fan
01 Interior temperature too low, check the electrical cabinet heating
Motor connection
172
Error messages
Code Meaning
F04 00 Motor temperature too high or sensor defective, check motor thermal contact or EM-PTC connection.
01 The motor circuit-breaker has been actuated. Check drive
03 Motor phase failure, check the motor and wiring.
Output current
F05 00 Overloaded, check the load conditions and ramps
03 Short circuit or earth fault, check the motor and wiring
04 Overloaded, check the load conditions and current limit controller
05 Asymmetrical motor current, check the motor and wiring
06 Motor phase current too high, check the motor and wiring.
07 Message of the phase supervision, check the motor and wiring
Link voltage
F07 00 Link voltage too high, check deceleration ramps and connected braking resistor
01 Link voltage too low, check line voltage
02 Mains failure, check line voltage and circuit
03 Phase failure, check line voltage and circuit
04 Reference DC link limitation 680 too low, check line voltage
05 Brake chopper Trigger threshold 506 too low, check line voltage
06 Motor chopper Trigger threshold 507 too low, check line voltage
Electronics voltage
F08 01 Electronics voltage 24 V too low, check the control terminals
04 Electronic voltage too high, check wiring of control terminals
Optional components
F0B 13 The communications module at slot B was installed without disconnection from the mains supply, disconnect the mains supply.
Output frequency
F11 00 Output frequency too high, check control signals and settings
01 Mx. frequency reached by control, check deceleration ramps and connected braking resistor
02 Max. frequency deviation exceeded
20 Limit switch monitoring frequency exceeded
Motor connection
F13 00 Earth fault at output, check the motor and wiring.
01 Set limit IDC compensation limit 415 reached, check the motor and wiring, increase limit as required
10 Minimum current control, check the motor and wiring.

Control connection
F14 01 Reference value signal at multi-function input 1 not available, check the signal
02 Setpoint value signal not available at analog input EM-S1INA, check the signal
07 Overcurrent at multi-function input 1, check the signal
30 Encoder signal is defective:
- Check connections S4IND and S5IND
- Check connections on EM-xxx expansion module
- Encoder 2 is active, but the expansion module is not fitted
31 One encoder signal track not available, check the connections
32 Incorrect direction of rotation from the rotary encoder, check connections
40 No rotary encoder activated, although configuration 2xx is selected
Field bus communication
F20 10 Communication watchdog RS232/RS485
61 Failure Profibus module
21471644/220808
62 Profibus OFF (failure DP master)

65 Profibus configuration error
173
Error messages
Code Meaning
F21 00 Field bus toggle OFF: Field bus monitoring reports the failure of the bus system.
nn Error message on system bus master with error system bus slave nn = node ID of the slave (hex)
F22 00 Communication error system bus, timeout SYNC telegram
01 Communication error system bus, timeout RxPDO1
10 Communication error system bus, bus OFF
Tab. 233
Apart from the error messages mentioned above there are further error messages which, however, can only be used
for internal purposes and are not listed here. If you receive error messages which are not listed here, please contact
the after-sales-service of Demag Cranes & Components.
19.3 Error environment

The parameters of the error environment facilitate trouble shooting. The error environment records the operating
behaviour of the frequency inverter at the point of time of the last four errors.
Error environment
330 Link voltage DC voltage in the link
331 Output voltage Calculated output voltage (motor voltage) of the frequency inverter.
332 Stator frequency The output frequency (motor frequency) of the frequency inverter
334 Encoder 2 frequency Only with EM extension module
Calculated from the data of rotary encoder 1, the No. of pole pairs 373 and the
335 Phase current Ia Current measured in motor phase U
336 Phase current Ib Current measured in motor phase V
337 Phase current Ic Current measured in motor phase W
338 R.m.s Current Calculated root-mean-square output current (motor current) of the frequency inverter
339 Flow current share Isd The magnetic flux-forming current component or the calculated reactive current
340 Torque current share Isq The torque-forming current component or the calculated active current
341 Rotor magnetizing current Magnetising current related to the rated motor parameters and the working point
342 Torque Torque calculated from voltage, current and controlled variables
343 Analog input MFI1A Input signal on the multi-function input 1 in Operation mode 452
„1 – voltage input“ or „2 – current input“
344 Analog input EM-S1INA Signal on analog input EM-S1INA
346 Analog output MFO1A Output signal on multi-function output 1 in Operation mode 550 "2 – Analog"
347 Analog output EM-S1OUTA Signal on analog output EM-S1OUTA only with EM-I/O-02 extension module
348 Analog output EM-S1OUTA Signal on analog output EM-S1OUTA only with EM-ENC-02 extension module
349 Repetition frequency output Signal on the repetition frequency output acc. to the
Operation mode repetition freq. MFO1F 555
350 Status of digital inputs Decimal-coded status of the six digital inputs and of the multi-function input 1 in
Operation mode 452 "3 – digital input"
351 Status of digital outputs Decimal-coded status of the two digital outputs and of the multi-function output 1 in
Operation mode 550 "1 – Digital"
352 Time since Release The point of time of the error in hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s) after the release
21471644/220808
signal: hhhhh:mm:ss . sec/10 sec/100 sec/1000
353 Heat sink temperature Measured heat sink temperature

354 Housing temperature Temperature measured inside housing
174
Error environment
355 Controller status The reference value signal is limited by the controllers coded in the controller status.
356 Warning status Warning messages coded in the warning status
357 Int. value 1 Software service parameter
358 Int. value 2 Software service parameter
359 Long value 1 Software service parameter
360 Long value 2 Software service parameter
Tab. 234
The Checksum 361 parameter shows whether the error environment has been saved correctly (OK) or incompletely
(NOK).
Error environment
361 Checksum Check-log of the error environment
Tab. 235
21471644/220808
175
20 Operation and error diagnosis
20.1 General
The operation of the frequency inverter and the connected load is continuously monitored. Different functions record
the operating behaviour and simplify operation and error diagnosis.
20.2 Status display
43203344_xml.eps
Fig. 110
The red green LED’s provide information on the operational point of the frequency inverter. If the operating unit is
plugged in, status messages are also displayed by display elements RUN, WARN and FAULT.
Status display
Green LED Red LED Display Description
Off Off - No supply voltage
On On - Initialization and self-test
Flashes Off RUN flashes With S1IND=LOW: Ready, no modulation
Flashes Off RUN flashes With S1IND=HIGH: Ready, no modulation
On Off RUN Operational message
On Flashes RUN + WARN Operational message, current Warnings 269
Flashes Flashes RUN + WARN Ready for operation, current Warnings 269
Off Flashes FAULT flashes Current error 259 of the frequency inverter
Off On FAULT Current error 259, acknowledge error

Tab. 236
21471644/220808
176
20.3 Status of the digital signals
The status display of the digital input and output signals makes it possible to check the different control signals and
the link with the corresponding software functions particularly when the system is put into operation.
Coding of the status of the digital signals

Allocation: Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Control signal 8
Control signal 7
Control signal 6
Control signal 5
Control signal 4
Control signal 3
Control signal 2
Control signal 1
Tab. 237
The display shows a decimal value which is converted into a binary number and indicates the status of the digital
signals bit by bit.
Example:
The display shows a decimal value of 33. The conversion into the binary system results in the bit combination
OOIOOOOI. Thus the following contact inputs or outputs are actuated:
● Control signal on digital input or output 1
● Control signal on digital input or output 6
20.4 Controller status

The controller status can be used to determine which control functions are active. If more than one controller is active
at that point of time, a controller code is displayed which is a combination of the individual codes. The display of the
controller status via the operating unit and the LED’s can be programmed by means of the parameter
Controller status message 409.
Coding of the controller status

CXXXX ABCDE
I I
Controller code Controller acronym
Code Controller status
C 00 00 - No controller active
C 00 01 UDdyn Voltage controller is in the rise phase according to Operation mode 670
C 00 02 UDstop The output frequency at power failure is below the Shutdown threshold 675.
C 00 04 UDctr Failure of the mains voltage and mains support active according to Operation mode 670 of the voltage
controller
C 00 08 UDlim The link voltage has exceeded the Reference DC link limitation 680.
C 00 10 Boost The Dyn. voltage pre-control 605 accelerates the control behaviour.
C 00 20 Ilim The output current is limited by the current limit controller or speed controller.
C 00 40 Tlim The output power or the torque is limited on the speed controller.
C 00 80 Tctr Change-over of the FOR between speed and torque control
21471644/220808
C 01 00 Rstp The Operation Mode 620 selected in the starting behaviour limits the output current.
C 02 00 IxtLtLim The overload limit of the long term Ixt (60s) has been reached, intelligent current limits active according to
Operation mode 573
177
Coding of the controller status
CXXXX ABCDE
I I
Controller code Controller acronym
Code Controller status
C 04 00 IxtStLim The overload limit of the short term Ixt (10s) has been reached, intelligent current limits active according to
Operation mode 573
C 08 00 Tclim Max. heat sink temperature TK reached, intelligent current limits active according to Operation mode 573
C 10 00 PTClim Max. motor temperature TPTC reached, intelligent current limits active 573 according to
Operation mode 573
C 20 00 Flim The reference frequency has reached the Maximum frequency 419. The frequency limitation is active.
Tab. 238
Example:
The controller status displayed is
C0024 UDctr Ilim
The controller status results from the hexadecimal sum of the controller codes (0004+0020 = 0024). Simultaneously
the mains support as well as the current limitation of the speed controller is active.
20.5 Warning status

The current warning is displayed by a message in the warning status and can be used for displaying a critical
operating status at an early point of time. The combination of different warnings can be created by means of the
parameter Create warning mask 536. In the case of a warning, it is displayed by the flashing red LED and the
WARN display field of the operating unit. In the case of several warnings the warning status is displayed as the sum
of the individual warning codes.
Coding of the warning status

AXXXX ABCDE
I I
Warning code Warning acronym
Code Warning status
A 00 00 - No warning messages.
A 00 01 Ixt Frequency inverter overloaded, (A0002 or A0004)
A 00 02 IxtSt Short-term overload for 10 s related to the rated output of the frequency inverter
A 00 04 IxtLt Overload for 60 s related to the rated output of the frequency inverter
A 00 08 Tc The max. heat sink temperature TK of 80 °C minus the Warning limit heat sink temp. 407 has been
reached
A 00 10 Ti The max. inside temperature TK of 65 °C minus the Warning limit inside temp. 408 has been reached
A 00 20 Lim The controller listed in the Controller Status 275 limits the reference value.
A 00 40 LK The load spectrum function signals that 90% of the safe working period of the hoist unit have elapsed, ⇒ "Load
spectrum calculation", Page 93.
A 00 80 PTC Warning after programmed Motor-PTC operation mode 570 at max. motor temperature TPTC
A 01 00 Mains The Phase supervision 576 signals a phase failure in the power supply.
A 02 00 PMS The internal software motor circuit-breaker has been tripped according to the programmed
Operation mode 571
A 04 00 Flim The Maximum frequency 419 has been exceeded. The frequency limitation is active.
A 08 00 A1 The MFI1A input signal is lower than 1V / 2 mA depending on the operation mode
21471644/220808
A 10 00 A2 Only with extension module EM-I/O-02 or EM-ENC-02

The MFI1A input signal is lower than 1V / 2 mA depending on the operation mode
A 20 00 Sysbus A slave on the system bus signals an error, warning only relevant with EM-SYS option.
178
Coding of the warning status
AXXXX ABCDE
I I
Warning code Warning acronym
Code Warning status
A 40 00 UDC The link voltage has reached the minimum value which depends on the type.
A 80 00 Toggle bit Field bus monitoring reports the failure of the bus system.
Tab. 239
⇒ "Warning mask", Page 133
Example:
The warning status displayed is
A008D Ixt IxtLt Tc PTC
The warning status results from the hexadecimal sum of the warning codes (0001+0004+0008+0080 = 008D).
The warning overload (60 s), the warning limit heat sink temperature and the warning limit motor temperature are
applied.
21471644/220808
179
21 Parameter list
21.1 General
The parameter list is divided into the menu branches of the Parcom Compact programming software
To provide a more detailed overview, the parameters are marked with pictograms.
⌸ The parameter is available with data set change-over in the four data sets
☑ The parameter value is interrogated by the SETUP routine
ID The parameter value is set by the parameter identification. It should only be changed manually by trained personnel.
Ⓧ This parameter cannot be written during operation of the frequency inverter (modulation on).
Tab. 240
The EM reference in the Chapter column indicates that the corresponding parameter is described in the operating
instructions of the extension module.
21.2 Actual value menu (VAL)

No. Description Unit Display range Chapter
Actual values ➜ Actual machine values
210 Stator frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99
211 Motor current A 0,0 ... Imax
212 Motor voltage V 0,0 ... UFUN
213 Active power kW 0,0 ... Pmax
214 Active current A 0,0 ... Imax ⇒ "Actual frequency inverter values", Page 169
215 Flow current share Isd A 0,0 ... Imax
216 Torque current share Isq A 0,0 ... Imax
217 Encoder 1 frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99

218 Encoder 1 speed rpm 0 ... 60000
219 Encoder 2 frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 EM
220 Encoder 2 speed rpm 0 ... 60000 EM
221 Slip frequency Hz 0,0 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Actual machine values", Page 169
Tab. 241

Actual values➜ Actual frequency inverter values
222 Link voltage V 0,0 ... Udmax-25 ⇒ "Actual frequency inverter values", Page 169
223 Output voltage ratio % 0 ... 100

Tab. 242

224 Torque Nm ± 9999,9 ⇒ "Actual machine values", Page 169
225 Rotor flux % 0 ... 100
226 Winding temperature deg.C 0 ... 999
227 Current rotor time constant ms 0 ... Ƭmax
Tab. 243

228 Internal reference frequency Hz 0,00 ... fmax
229 Reference percentage value % ± 300,00 ⇒ "Actual frequency inverter values", Page 169
21471644/220808
230 Actual percentage value % ± 300,00

Tab. 244
180
Actual values ➜ actual value memory
231 Peak value long term Ixt % 0,00 ... 100,00
⇒ "Actual value memory", Page 170
232 Peak value short term Ixt % 0,00 ... 100,00
Tab. 245

235 Flux-forming voltage V 0,0 ... UFUN
236 Torque-Forming Voltage V 0,0 ... UFUN
238 Flux value % 0,0 ... 100,0

⇒ "Actual machine values", Page 169
239 Reactive current A 0,0 ... Imax
240 Actual speed rpm 0 ... 60000
241 Actual frequency Hz 0,0 ... 999,99
Tab. 246

Actual values ➜ Actual system values
242 Actual value system - ⇒ "Actual system values", Page 170
Tab. 247

244 Working hours counter h 99999
⇒ "Actual frequency inverter values", Page 169
245 Operation hours counter h 99999
249 Active Data Set - 1 ... 4 ⇒ "Data set change-over", Page 136
250 Digital inputs - 00 ... 255 ⇒ "Status of the digital signals", Page 177
251 Analog input MFI1A % ± 100,00 ⇒ "Analog input MFI1A", Page 122
252 Repetition frequency input Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Repetition frequency input", Page 116
253 Analog input EM-S1INA % -100 ... +100 EM
254 Digital outputs - 00 ... 255 ⇒ "Status of the digital signals", Page 177
255 Heat sink temperature deg.C 0 ... Tkmax ⇒ "Actual frequency inverter values", Page 169
256 Interior temperature deg.C 0 ... Timax
257 Analog output MFO1A V 0,0 ... 24,0 ⇒ "Operation mode analog MFO1A", Page 127
259 Current Error - FXXXX ⇒ "Actual frequency inverter values", Page 169
266 Analog output EM-S1OUTA V 0,0 ... 10,0 EM-I/O
267 Analog output EM-S1OUTA MA 0,0 ... 20,0 EM-ENC
269 Warnings - AXXXX ⇒ "Actual frequency inverter values", Page 169
271 Interior temperature 24 h deg.C 0 ... Tkmax ---
272 Duty factor % 0,0 ... 100,0 ---

275 Controller status - CXXXX ⇒ "Actual frequency inverter values", Page 169
278 Frequency MFO1F Hz 0,00 ... fmax ⇒ "Operation mode repetition frequency MFO1F",
Page 129
281 DP-Master OUT - String CM-PDP
282 Reference bus frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99
283 Reference Ramp Frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99
284 DP-Master IN - String CM-PDP
Tab. 248
21471644/220808
181
287 Peak value Udc V 0,0 ... Udmax
288 Average value Udc V 0,0 ... Udmax
289 Peak value heat sink temp. deg.C 0 ... Tkmax
290 Average value heat sink temp. deg.C 0 ... Tkmax
291 Peak value inside temperature deg.C 0 ... Timax
292 Average value inside tempera‐ deg.C 0 ... Timax

ture
⇒ "Actual value memory", Page 170
293 Peak value Irms A 0,0 ... ü·IFUN
294 Average value Irms A 0,0 ... ü·IFUN
295 Peak value active power pos. kW 0,0 ... ü·PFUN
296 Peak value active power neg. kW 0,0 ... ü·PFUN
297 Average value active power kW 0,0 ... ü·PFUN
301 Energy, positive kWh 0 ... 99999

302 Energy, negative kWh 0 ... 99999
Tab. 249

Error protocol ➜ Error list
310 Last error h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
311 Last error but one h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
312 Error 3 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
313 Error 4 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
314 Error 5 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
315 Error 6 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
316 Error 7 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
317 Error 8 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
⇒ "Error list", Page 172
318 Error 9 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
319 Error 10 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
320 Error 11 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
321 Error 12 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
322 Error 13 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
323 Error 14 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
324 Error 15 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
325 Error 16 h:m; F 00000:00; FXXXX
Tab. 250
21471644/220808
182
Error protocol ➜ Error environment
⌸ 330 Link voltage V 0,0 ... Udmax
⌸ 331 Output voltage V 0,0 ... UFUN
⌸ 332 Stator frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99

⌸ 333 Encoder 1 frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99
⌸ 334 Encoder 2 frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99
⌸ 335 Phase current Ia A 0,0 ... Imax
⌸ 336 Phase current Ib A 0,0 ... Imax
⌸ 337 Phase current Ic A 0,0 ... Imax
⌸ 338 R.m.s Current A 0,0 ... Imax
⌸ 339 Flow current share Isd A 0,0 ... Imax ⇒ "Error environment", Page 174
⌸ 340 Torque current share Isq A 0,0 ... Imax
⌸ 341 Rotor magnetizing current A 0,0 ... Imax
⌸ 342 Torque Nm ± 9999,9

⌸ 343 Analog input MFI1A % ± 100,00
⌸ 344 Analog input EM-S1INA % ± 100,00
⌸ 346 Analog output MFO1A V 0,0 ... 24,0
⌸ 347 Analog output EM-S1OUTA V 0,0 ... 10,0
⌸ 348 Analog output EM-S1OUTA mA 0,0 ... 20,0
⌸ 349 Repetition frequency output Hz 0,00 ... 999,99
⌸ 350 Status of digital inputs - 00 ... 255 ⇒ "Status of the digital signals", Page 177
⌸ 351 Status of digital outputs - 00 ... 255
⌸ 352 Time since Release h:m:s.m 00000:00:00.000 ⇒ "Error environment", Page 174
s
⌸ 353 Heat sink temperature deg.C 0 ... Tkmax
⌸ 354 Housing temperature deg.C 0 ... Timax
⌸ 355 Controller status - C0000 ... CFFFF ⇒ "Controller status", Page 177
⌸ 356 Warning status - A0000 ... AFFFF ⇒ "Warning status", Page 178
⌸ 357 Int. value 1 - ± 32768
⌸ 358 Int. value 2 - ± 32768
⌸ 359 Long value 1 - ± 2147483647 ⇒ "Error environment", Page 174
⌸ 360 Long value 2 - ± 2147483647
⌸ 361 Checksum - OK / NOK
Tab. 251

Error protocol ➜ Error list
362 No. of Errors - 0 ... 32767 ⇒ "Error list", Page 172
363 No. of self-acknowledged er‐ - 0 ... 32767
rors
Tab. 252

Operational behaviour ➜ Positioning
470 Rotations U 0,000 ... 1 106 ⇒ "Positioning", Page 84
Tab. 253

21471644/220808
Control inputs/outputs ➜ Digital outputs

537 Actual warning mask - AXXXXXXXX ⇒ "Warning mask", Page 133
Tab. 254
183
Motor data ➜ Setup
797 Status of motor parameter - OK / NOK ⇒ "Set-up by means of the communication interface",
identification Page 69
Tab. 255

Operational behaviour ➜ Load spectrum calculation
835 Actual duration of service % 0,0 ... 100000,0 ⇒ "Actual duration of service", Page 95
836 Remaining service life % 0,00 ... 100,00 ⇒ "Remaining service life", Page 95
837 Relative torque % 0,00 ... 300,00 ⇒ "Relative torque", Page 96
Tab. 256

Reference values ➜ ProHub function
860 Current measuring value % 0,00 ... 650,00 ⇒ "Current measuring value", Page 119
861 Valid maximum frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Valid maximum frequency", Page 119
Tab. 257

862 Maximum interior temperature deg.C 0 ... Timax ---
863 Maximum Interior temperature deg.C 0 ... Timax ---
24h
864 Time of maximum interior tem‐ h 99999 ---
perature
Tab. 258

Actual values ➜ System bus
978 Node state - 1 ... 3 System bus
979 CAN state - 1 ... 3
Tab. 259
21.3 Parameter menu (PARA)

No. Description Unit Setting range Chapter
Inverter Data
0 Serial number - Reference ⇒ "Serial number", Page 72
1 Optional modules - Reference ⇒ "Optional modules", Page 72
⌸ 10 Baud rate - Selection -
12 Inverter software version - Reference ⇒ "Frequency inverter software version", Page 72
27 Set password - 0 ... 999 ⇒ "Set password", Page 72
28 Control Level - 1 ... 3 ⇒ "Control Level", Page 73
29 User Name - 32 characters ⇒ "User Name", Page 73
☑ Ⓧ 30 Configuration - Selection ⇒ "Configuration", Page 73
33 Language - Selection ⇒ "Language", Page 74
Ⓧ 34 Program - 0 ... 9999 ⇒ "Programming", Page 74
Tab. 260

21471644/220808
Positioning ➜ Axle positioning

37 Start positioning of axle - Selection ⇒ "Axle positioning", Page 87
Tab. 261
184
Special functions ➜ Fan
39 Switch-on temperature deg.C 0 ... 60 ⇒ "Fan", Page 162
Tab. 262

Special functions ➜ Tandem
40 Source reference fre‐ - Selection -
quency
Tab. 263

Control inputs/outputs ➜ Digital inputs
62 (SOSP) Acceleration - Selection ⇒ "SOSP reference value memory function", Page 137
66 (SOST) Step 2 - Selection ⇒ "SOST reference value step change-over",
67 (SOST) Step 3/4 - Selection Page 137
68 SW step 1+ - Selection
⇒ "Starting command", Page 136
69 SW-Step 1 - - Selection
70 Data set change-over 1 - Selection
⇒ "Data set change-over", Page 136
71 Data set change-over 2 - Selection
72 Percent Motorpoti Up - Selection
⇒ "Percent motor potentiometer", Page 140
73 Percent Motorpoti Down - Selection
75 Fixed percent change- - Selection
over 1
⇒ "Fixed percentage value change-over", Page 137
76 Fixed percent change- - Selection
over 2
83 Timer 1 - Selection
⇒ "Timers", Page 138
84 Timer 2 - Selection
99 Remote Control Word - Selection -
103 Error Acknowledgment - Selection ⇒ "Error acknowledgment", Page 139
Tab. 264

Special functions ➜ Electronic gearbox
125 Source el. gear - -
Tab. 265

131 (SOST) Step 5-8 - Selection EM
Tab. 266

Special functions ➜ Tandem
137 Source Reference Line - Selection -
Value
Tab. 267

Special functions ➜ Electronic gearbox
147 Source Position Refer‐ - Selection -
ence Value
148 Source Position Actual - Selection -
Value
21471644/220808
Tab. 268
185
164 n-/M-control change-over - Selection ⇒ "n-/M-control change-over", Page 139
Tab. 269

Timer and logic functions ➜ Logic function 1
198 Operation mode - Selection
199 Input 1 - Selection ⇒ "Logic function", Page 142
200 Input 2 - Selection
Tab. 270

Tab. 271

204 Motor thermal contact - Selection ⇒ "Motor thermal contact", Page 137
Tab. 272

Tab. 273

237 Reset memory - Selection ⇒ "Actual value memory", Page 170
Tab. 274

Motor data ➜ Additional motor data
ID ⌸ 368 Rated voltage correction % ---
factor
Tab. 275

Motor data ➜ Rated motor parameters
☑ ⌸ 370 Rated voltage V 0,17·UFUN ... 2·UFUN
☑ ⌸ 371 Rated current A 0,01·IFUN ... 10·ü·IFUN
☑ ⌸ 372 Rated speed rpm 96 ... 60000

⌸ 373 No. of pole pairs - 1 ... 24 ⇒ "Rated motor parameters", Page 75
☑ ⌸ 374 Rated cosinus Phi - 0,01 ... 1,00

☑ ⌸ 375 Rated frequency Hz 10,00 ... 1000,00
☑ ⌸ 376 mech. mech. power kW 0,1·PFUN ... 10·PFUN
Tab. 276
21471644/220808
186
ID ⌸ 377 Stator resistance mOhm 0 ... 65535 ⇒ "Additional motor data", Page 75
ID ⌸ 378 Leakage factor % 1,0 ... 20,0
Tab. 277

System data
⌸ 389 Factor actual value sys‐ ⇒ "System data", Page 79
tem
Tab. 278

Special functions ➜ Profibus
⌸ 390 Profibus reference Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 CM-PDP
391 Profibus Node-ID - 1 ... 126 CM-PDP
Tab. 279

Special functions ➜ Bus controller
392 State-transition 5 - Selection ---
Tab. 280

Special functions ➜ Profibus
⌸ 393 Profibus PPO-Type - 1 ... 4 CM-PDP
Tab. 281

Special functions ➜ RS485 / RS 232
⌸ 394 RS232/RS485 NodeID - Selection
Tab. 282

Special functions ➜ Pulse width modulation
ID ⌸ 399 Voltage Drop Compensa‐ - - -
tion
400 Modulation frequency - Selection ⇒ "Pulse width modulation", Page 162
401 Min. modulation frequen‐ - Selection
cy
402 Switching Compensation % 0 ... 200 % -
Tab. 283

Error/warning Behaviour
405 Warning Limit Short Term % 6 ... 100 ⇒ "Overload Ixt", Page 99
Ixt
406 Warning Limit Long Term % 6 ... 100
Ixt
407 Warning Limit Heat Sink deg.C -25 ... 0 ⇒ "Temperature", Page 99
Temp.
408 Warning Limit Inside deg.C -25 ... 0
Temp.
409 Controller-Status Mes‐ - Selection ⇒ "Controller status", Page 99
sage
21471644/220808
Tab. 284
187
Special functions ➜ Bus controller
410 Control word ---
411 Status word ---
⌸ 412 Local/Remote - Selection ⇒ "Bus controller", Page 166
413 RS232/RS485 Watchdog S 0 ... 10000 ---
Timer
Tab. 285

415 IDC compensation limit V 0,0 ... 1,5 ⇒ "IDC compensation limit", Page 100
417 Frequency switch-off limit Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Frequency switch-off limit", Page 100
Tab. 286

Reference values ➜ Frequency limits
☑ ⌸ 418 Min. frequency Hz 0,00 ... 300,00
⇒ "Frequency Limits", Page 103
☑ ⌸ 419 Maximum frequency Hz 0,00 ... 300,00
Tab. 287

Reference values ➜ Frequency ramps
☑ ⌸ 420 Acceleration Hz/s 0,01 ... 999,99
☑ ⌸ 421 Deceleration Hz/s 0,01 ... 999,99
⌸ 422 Acceleration anticlock‐ Hz/s -0,01 ... 999,99
wise
⌸ 423 Deceleration anticlock‐ Hz/s -0,01 ... 999,99
wise ⇒ "Frequency Ramps", Page 110
⌸ 424 Emergency stop clock‐ Hz/s 0,01 ... 999,99
wise
⌸ 425 Emergency stop anti‐ Hz/s 0,01 ... 999,99
clockwise
⌸ 426 Maximum leading Hz 0,01 ... 999,99
Tab. 288

⌸ 429 Max. frequency deviation Hz 0,01 ... 15,00 ⇒ "Max. frequency deviation", Page 102
Tab. 289

Reference values ➜ Frequency ramps
⌸ 430 Ramp rise time clockwise ms 0 ... 65000
⌸ 431 Ramp fall time clockwise ms 0 ... 65000
⌸ 432 Ramp rise time anticlock‐ ms 0 ... 65000
wise ⇒ "Frequency Ramps", Page 110
⌸ 433 Ramp fall time anticlock‐ ms 0 ... 65000
wise
⌸ 434 Ramp Setpoint - Selection
Tab. 290
21471644/220808
188
Control functions ➜ Technology controller
⌸ 440 Operation mode - Selection
⌸ 441 Fixed Frequency Hz -999,99 ... 999,99
⌸ 442 Max. P-Component Hz 0,01 ... 999,99
⌸ 443 Hysteresis % 0,01 ... 100,00
⇒ "Technology controller", Page 152
⌸ 444 Amplification - -15,00 ... 15,00
⌸ 445 Integral time ms 0 ... 32767
⌸ 446 Ind. Volume Flow Control - 0,10 ... 2,00
Factor
Tab. 291

Reference values ➜ Blocking frequencies
⌸ 447 1st blocking frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99
⌸ 448 2nd blocking frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Blocking frequencies", Page 113
⌸ 449 Frequency hysteresis Hz 0,00 ... 100,00
Tab. 292

Control inputs/outputs ➜ Multi-function input MFI1
⌸ 450 Tolerance band % 0,00 ... 25,00 ⇒ "Tolerance range and hysteresis", Page 125
452 Operation mode - Selection ⇒ "Multi-function input MFI1", Page 122
453 Error/warning behaviour - Selection ⇒ "Error and warning behaviour", Page 127
⌸ 454 Point X1 % 0,00 ... 100,00
⌸ 455 Point Y1 % -100,00 ... 100,00
⇒ "Characteristic curve", Page 122
⌸ 456 Point X2 % 0,00 ... 100,00
⌸ 457 Point Y2 % -100,00 ... 100,00
Tab. 293

Operational behaviour ➜ Positioning
459 Signal source - Selection
⌸ 460 Positioning distance U 0,000 ... 1 106
⌸ 461 Signal correction ms -327,68 ... 327,67 ⇒ "Positioning", Page 84
⌸ 462 Load correction - -327,68 ... 327,67
⌸ 463 Activity after positioning - Selection
⌸ 464 Time to wait ms 0 ... 3,6 106
Tab. 294
No. Designation Unit Setting range Chapter

Special functions ➜ Temperature adjustment
⌸ 465 Operation mode - Selection ⇒ "Temperature adjustment", Page 166
⌸ 466 Temperature coefficient %/100 0,00 ... 300,00
⌸ 467 Adjusting temperature deg.C -50,0 ... 300,0
Tab. 295

⌸ 468 Frequency monitoring - Selection ⇒ "Frequency monitoring", Page 101
21471644/220808
Tab. 296
189
⌸ 469 Reference orientation degree 0,0 ... 359,9
⌸ 471 Positioning Frequency Hz 1,00 … 50,00 ⇒ "Axle positioning", Page 87
⌸ 472 Max positional error degree 0,1 ... 90,0
Tab. 297

Reference values ➜ Keypad motor potentiometer
473 Ramp keypad motorpoti Hz/s 0,01 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Keypad motor potentiometer", Page 116
Tab. 298

Reference values ➜ SOSP function
474 SOSP function - Selection ⇒ "SOSP reference value memory", Page 114
Tab. 299

Reference values ➜ Reference frequency channel
☑ ⌸ 475 Drive control - Selection ⇒ "Reference frequency channel", Page 103
Tab. 300

Reference values ➜ Reference percentage value channel
⌸ 476 Reference percentage - Selection ⇒ "Reference percentage channel", Page 106
source
Tab. 301

Reference values ➜ Percentage value ramps
⌸ 477 Gradient percentage %/s 0 ... 60000 ⇒ "Percentage ramps", Page 113
ramp
Tab. 302

Control functions ➜ Technology controller
⌸ 478 Actual percentage - Selection ⇒ "Technology controller", Page 152
source
Tab. 303

⌸ 479 Time constant position‐ ms 1,00 ... 9999,00 ⇒ "Axle positioning", Page 87
ing contr.
Tab. 304

Reference values ➜ SOST parameters
☑ ⌸ 480 SOST step 1 Hz -300,00 ... 300,00
☑ ⌸ 481 SOST step 2 Hz -300,00 ... 300,00
⇒ "SOST reference value steps", Page 108
⌸ 482 SOST step 3 Hz -300,00 ... 300,00
⌸ 483 SOST step 4 Hz -300,00 ... 300,00
⌸ 485 SOST step 5 Hz -300,00 ... 300,00 EM
⌸ 486 SOST step 6 Hz -300,00 ... 300,00 EM
21471644/220808
⌸ 487 SOST step 7 Hz -300,00 ... 300,00 EM

⌸ 488 SOST step 8 Hz -300,00 ... 300,00 EM
489 JOG frequency Hz -300,00 ... 300,00 ⇒ "JOG frequency", Page 109
190 Tab. 305

Motor data ➜ Encoder 1
☑ Ⓧ 490 Operation mode encoder - Selection
⇒ "Operation mode encoder 1", Page 77
1
☑ Ⓧ 491 Division marks encoder 1 - 1 ... 8192 ⇒ "Division marks encoder 1", Page 78
Tab. 306

Ⓧ 493 Operation mode encoder - Selection EM
2
Ⓧ 494 Division marks encoder 2 - 1 ... 8192 EM
Ⓧ 495 Level Encoder 2 - Selection EM
Tab. 307

Reference values ➜ Repetition frequency input
Ⓧ 496 Operation mode - Selection
⇒ "Repetition frequency input", Page 116
Ⓧ 497 Divider - 1 ... 8192
Tab. 308

Tab. 309

Special functions ➜ Brake chopper
506 Trigger threshold V Udmin + 25 ... 1000,0 ⇒ "Brake chopper", Page 163
Tab. 310

Special functions ➜ Motor chopper
⌸ 507 Trigger threshold V Udmin + 25 ... 1000,0 ⇒ "Motor chopper", Page 163
ID ⌸ 508 Current Limit A

Tab. 311

⌸ 510 Setting frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Setting Frequency", Page 131
Tab. 312

Reference values ➜ Percentage limits
⌸ 518 Minimum reference per‐ % 0,00 ... 300,00
centage
⇒ "Percentage Limits", Page 103
⌸ 519 Maximum reference per‐ % 0,00 ... 300,00
centage
Tab. 313
21471644/220808
191
Reference values ➜ Fixed percentage values
⌸ 520 Fixed percentage 1 % -300,00 ... 300,00
⇒ "Fixed percentage values", Page 109
⌸ 523 Fixed percentage 4 -300,00 ... 300,00
Tab. 314

530 Op. mode digital output 1 - Selection
S1OUT
⇒ "Digital outputs", Page 130
532 Op. mode digital output 3 - Selection
S3OUT
533 Op. mode digital output 4 - Selection EM
EM-S1OUTD
536 Create Warning Mask - Selection ⇒ "Warning mask", Page 133
540 Op. mode comparator 1 - Selection
541 Comparator 1 on above % -300,00 ... 300,00
542 Comparator 1 off below % -300,00 ... 300,00
543 Op. mode comparator 2 - Selection ⇒ "Comparator", Page 132
544 Comparator 2 on above % -300,00 ... 300,00
545 Comparator 2 off below % -300,00 ... 300,00
549 Max. control deviation % 0,01 ... 20,00
Tab. 315

Control inputs/outputs ➜ Multi-function output MFO1
550 Operation mode MFO1 - Selection ⇒ "Multi-function output MFO1", Page 127
551 Voltage 100% V 0,0 ... 24,0
⇒ "Output characteristic", Page 129
552 Voltage 0% V 0,0 ... 24,0
553 Operation mode analog - Selection ⇒ "Operation mode analog MFO1A", Page 127
MFO1A
554 Operation mode digital - Selection ⇒ "Digital outputs", Page 130
MFO1D
555 Operation mode repeti‐ - Selection ⇒ "Operation mode repetition frequency MFO1F",
tion frequency MFO1F Page 129
Ⓧ 556 Division marks - 30 ... 8192 ⇒ "Output characteristic", Page 129
Tab. 316

Control inputs/outputs ➜ Digital port EM-S1IOD
558 Operation mode - Selection EM
559 Output Operation - Selection EM
Tab. 317

Control inputs/outputs ➜ Analog input EM-S1INA
⌸ 560 Tolerance band % 0,00 ... 25,00 EM
561 Filter time constant - Selection EM
562 Operation mode - Selection EM
563 Error/warning behaviour - Selection EM
21471644/220808
⌸ 564 Point X1 % -100,00 ... 100,00 EM

⌸ 565 Point Y1 % -100,00 ... 100,00 EM
⌸ 566 Point X2 % -100,00 ... 100,00 EM
192
⌸ 567 Point Y2 % -100,00 ... 100,00 EM
568 Adjustment - Selection EM
Tab. 318

570 Motor-PTC Operation - Selection ⇒ "Motor temperature", Page 100
Mode
Tab. 319

Special functions ➜ Motor protective switch
⇒ "Motor protective switch", Page 164
⌸ 572 Frequency limit % 0 ... 300
Tab. 320

Control functions ➜ Intelligent current limits
⌸ 574 Power Limit % 40,00 ... 95,00 ⇒ "Intelligent current limits", Page 146
⌸ 575 Limitation Time min 5 ... 300
Tab. 321

⌸ 576 Phase supervision - Selection ⇒ "Phase failure", Page 101
578 Allowed No. of Auto-Ac‐ - 0 ... 20
knowl. ⇒ "Automatic error acknowledgement", Page 101
579 Restart delay ms 0 ... 1000
Tab. 322

Special functions ➜ Pulse width modulation
580 Reduction limit Ti/Tc deg.C -25 ... 0 ⇒ "Pulse width modulation", Page 162
Tab. 323

Control inputs/outputs ➜ Analog output EM-S1OUTA
584 Operation mode - Selection EM-I/O
585 Offset % -100,00 ... +100,00 EM
586 Amplification % 5,0 ... 1000,0 EM
587 Adjustment V -15,00 ... 15,00 EM-I/O
590 Operation mode % Selection EM-ENC
599 Adjustment mA -10 ... +30,00 EM-ENC
Tab. 324

V/f characteristic
ID ⌸ 600 Boost for f=0 V 0,0 ... 100,0
ID ⌸ 601 Voltage rise % -100 ... 200
ID ⌸ 602 Rise frequency % 0 ... 100 ⇒ "V/f characteristic", Page 144
⌸ 603 Cut-Off Voltage V 60,0 ... 560,0
21471644/220808
⌸ 604 Cut-Off Frequency Hz 0,00 ... 999,99

⌸ 605 Dynamic voltage pre- % 0 ... 200 ⇒ "Dynamic voltage pre-control", Page 145
control
Tab. 325 193
Control functions ➜ Current limit controller
⌸ 611 Amplification - 0,01 ... 30,00
⌸ 612 Integral time ms 1 10000 ⇒ "Current limit controller", Page 151
⌸ 613 Current Limit A 0,0 ... ü·IFUN
⌸ 614 Frequency limit Hz 0,00 ... 999,99

Tab. 326

Operational behaviour ➜ Starting behaviour
⌸ 621 Amplification - 0,01 ... 10,00
⌸ 622 Integral time ms 1 ... 30000 ⇒ "Starting behaviour", Page 80
ID ⌸ 623 Starting current A 0,0 ... ü·IFUN
ID ⌸ 624 Frequency limit Hz 0,00 ... 100,00

Tab. 327

Operational behaviour ➜ Stopping behaviour
⌸ 630 Operation mode - Selection ⇒ "Stopping behaviour", Page 82
Tab. 328

Operational behaviour➜ Search run
⌸ 646 Brak. time after search s 0,0 ... 200,0
run
⌸ 647 Current / rated motor cur‐ % 1,00 ... 100,00 ⇒ "Search Run", Page 83
rent
⌸ 648 Amplification - 0,00 ... 10,00
Tab. 329

Operational behaviour ➜ Auto-start
651 Operation mode - Selection ⇒ "Auto-Start", Page 82
Tab. 330

Control functions ➜ Slip compensation
⌸ 661 Amplification % 0,0 ... 300,0
⇒ "Slip compensation", Page 150
⌸ 662 Max. slip ramp Hz/s 0,01 ... 650,00
⌸ 663 Minimum Frequency Hz 0,01 ... 999,99
Tab. 331
21471644/220808
194
Control functions ➜ Voltage controller
671 Mains failure threshold V -200,0 ... –50,0
672 Reference mains sup‐ V -200,0 ... –10,0
port value
⌸ 673 Mains support decelera‐ Hz/s 0,01 ... 9999,99
tion
⌸ 674 Acceleration on Mains Hz/s 0,01 ... 9999,99
Resumption
⌸ 675 Shutdown Threshold Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Voltage controller", Page 147
676 Reference Shutdown V Udmin+25 ... Udmax-25
Value
⌸ 677 Amplification - 0,00 ... 30,00
680 Reference DC-Link Limi‐ A Udmin+25 ... Udmax-25
tation
681 Max. frequency rise Hz 0,00 ... 999,99
⌸ 683 Gen. Ref. Current Limit A 0,0 ... ü·IFUN
Tab. 332

Control functions ➜ Current controller
ID ⌸ 700 Amplification - 0,00 ... 2,00
⇒ "Current controller", Page 155
ID ⌸ 701 Integral time ms 0,00 ... 10,00
ID ⌸ 702 Factor P, Ta=125us - - ---
ID ⌸ 703 Factor P, Ta=250us - - ---
ID ⌸ 704 Factor P, Ta=500us - - ---
ID ⌸ 705 Factor P, Ta=1000us - - ---
ID ⌸ 706 Factor Tn, Ta=125us - - ---
ID ⌸ 707 Factor Tn, Ta=250us - - ---
ID ⌸ 708 Factor Tn, Ta=500us - - ---
ID ⌸ 709 Factor Tn, Ta=1000us - - ---
Tab. 333

ID ⌸ 713 Magnetising Current % 1 ... 50
50% Flux
80% Flux ⇒ "Magnetising current", Page 76
110% Flux
ID ⌸ 716 Idle current A 0,01·IFUN ... ü·IFUN
Tab. 334

Control functions ➜ Field controller
⌸ 717 Flow correction factor % 0,01 ... 300,00 ⇒ "Field controller", Page 159
Tab. 335

21471644/220808
ID ⌸ 718 Rotor time constant cor‐ % 0,01 ... 300,00 ⇒ "Rotor time constant correction factor", Page 76
rection factor
Tab. 336
195
Reference values ➜ Frequency limits
⌸ 719 Slip limit % 0 ... 10000 ⇒ "Frequency Limits", Page 103
Tab. 337

Control functions ➜ Speed controller
ID ⌸ 721 Amplification - 0,00 ... 200,00
⌸ 722 Integral time ms 0 ... 60000 ⇒ "Speed controller", Page 156
⌸ 723 Amplification f > f um - 0,00 ... 200,00
⌸ 724 Integral time f > f um ms 0 ... 60000
Tab. 338

Control functions ➜ Acceleration pre-control
⌸ 726 Minimum Acceleration Hz/s 0,1 ... 6500,0 ⇒ "Acceleration pre-control", Page 159
⌸ 727 Mech. time constant ms 1 ... 60000
Tab. 339

⌸ 728 Motor current limit A 0,0 ... ü·IFUN
⌸ 729 Generative current limit A -0,1 ... ü·IFUN
⌸ 730 Motor torque limitation % 0,00 ... 650,00

⌸ 731 Generative torque limita‐ % 0,00 ... 650,00
⇒ "Limitation of the speed controller", Page 158
tion
⌸ 732 P share motor torque lim‐ % 0,00 ... 650,00
itation
⌸ 733 P share generative tor‐ % 0,00 ... 650,00
que limitation
⌸ 734 Isq Limit Source Motor - Selection
Operation
⌸ 735 Isq Limit Source Gener‐ - Selection
ator Op.
⇒ "Limit value sources", Page 158
⌸ 736 Torque Limit Source Mo‐ - Selection
tor Op.
⌸ 737 Torque Limit Source - Selection
Gen. Op.
ID ⌸ 738 Switch-over frequency f Hz 0,00 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Speed controller", Page 156
um
⌸ 739 Power Limit Motor Oper‐ kW 0,00 ... 2·ü·PFUN ⇒ "Limitation of the speed controller", Page 158
ation
⌸ 740 Power limit generator op‐ kW 0,00 ... 2·ü·PFUN
eration
Tab. 340

⌸ 741 Amplification - 0,0 ... 100,0
⇒ "Field controller", Page 159
ID ⌸ 742 Integral time ms 0,0 ... 1000,0
ID ⌸ 743 Ref. Isd Upper Limit A 0.1·IFUN ... ü·IFUN ⇒ "Limitation of the field controller", Page 160
21471644/220808
ID ⌸ 744 Ref. Isd Lower Limit A -IFUN ... IFUN

Tab. 341
196
ID ⌸ 745 Stator+Rotor Resistance mOhm 0 ... 65535 ---
Tab. 342

Control functions ➜ Current controller
ID ⌸ 746 Crosscouple Factor % 0,00 ... 300,00 % ---
Tab. 343

748 Backlash damping % 0 ... 300 ⇒ "Limit value sources", Page 156
Tab. 344

Control functions ➜ Modulation controller
⌸ 750 Reference modulation % 3,00 ... 105,00 ⇒ "Modulation controller", Page 161
⌸ 752 Integral time ms 0,0 ... 1000,00
⇒ "Modulation controller", Page 161
⌸ 755 Reference Imr lower limit A 0,01·IFUN ... ü·IFUN ⇒ "Limitation of the modulation controller", Page 161
⌸ 756 Control deviation limita‐ % 0,00 ... 100,00

tion
Tab. 345

Special functions ➜ Encoder monitoring
⌸ 761 Time-out: Signal fault ms 0 ... 65000
⇒ "Rotary encoder monitoring", Page 167
⌸ 762 Time-out: Channel fault ms 0 ... 65000
⌸ 763 Time-out: Direction fault ms 0 ... 65000
Tab. 346

⌸ 766 Source Actual Speed - Selection EM
Tab. 347

Control functions ➜ Torque controller
⌸ 767 Frequency upper limit Hz -999,99 ... 999,99
⇒ "Torque controller", Page 156
⌸ 768 Frequency lower limit Hz -999,99 ... 999,99
⌸ 769 Frequency Upper Limit - Selection
Source
⇒ "Limit value sources", Page 156
⌸ 770 Frequency Lower Limit - Selection
Source
Tab. 348

Operational behaviour ➜ Starting behaviour
⌸ 780 Max. flux build-up time ms 1 ... 10000
⌸ 781 Current during flux for‐ A 0.1·IFUN ... ü·IFUN ⇒ "Starting behaviour of the FOR", Page 81
mation
Tab. 349
21471644/220808
197
Timer and Logic Functions ➜ Timers
790 Operation mode timer 1 - Selection ⇒ "General", Page 140
791 Time 1 Timer 1 s/m/h 0 ... 650,00
⇒ "Timer time constant", Page 140
792 Time 2 Timer 1 s/m/h 0 ... 650,00
793 Operation mode timer 2 - Selection ⇒ "General", Page 140
794 Time 1 Timer 2 s/m/h 0 ... 650,00
⇒ "Timer time constant", Page 140
795 Time 2 Timer 2 s/m/h 0 ... 650,00
Tab. 350

SETUP
796 Motor parameter identifi‐ - Selection ⇒ "Set-up by means of the communication interface",
cation Page 69
Tab. 351

800 Additional fixed frequen‐ - Selection
cy selection 1
⇒ "Additional fixed frequency selection", Page 138
801 Additional fixed frequen‐ - Selection
cy selection 2
802 Additional setpoint value - Selection ⇒ "Additional setpoint value release", Page 138
release
803 Fast to slow limit switch - Selection
limitation 1+ ⇒ "Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1+ and
804 Fast-to-slow limit switch - Selection fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 1-", Page 138
limitation 1-
805 Fast-to-slow limit switch - Selection ⇒ "Fast-to-slow limit switch limitation 2", Page 139
limitation 2
806 Operating limit switch + - Selection
⇒ "Operating limit switches", Page 139
807 Operating limit switch - - Selection
Tab. 352

⌸ 813 KB de-magnetization ms- 0 ... 200 ⇒ "KB de-magnetization time", Page 160
time
Tab. 353

815 Filter time constant en‐ - Selection ⇒ "Filter time constant encoder 1", Page 79
coder 1
Tab. 354

816 Filter time constant en‐ - Selection EM
coder 2
Tab. 355

21471644/220808

Tab. 356
198
Operational behaviour ➜ Brake control
⌸ 820 Start delay ms 0 ... 1000 ⇒ "Start delay", Page 89
⌸ 821 DC pre-magnetisation ms 0 ... 1000 ⇒ "DC pre-magnetisation time", Page 90
time
⌸ 822 DC post-magnetization s 0,0 ... 10,0 ⇒ "DC post-magnetization time", Page 90
time
⌸ 823 DC magnetisation % 0 ... 250 ⇒ "DC magnetisation", Page 81
⌸ 824 Brake release delay ms 0 ... 5000 ⇒ "Brake release delay", Page 90
⌸ 825 Brake application time ms 0 ... 2000 ⇒ "Brake application time", Page 91
Tab. 357

Operational behaviour ➜ Load spectrum calculation
830 Operation mode - Selection ⇒ "Load spectrum calculation mode", Page 93
831 Theoretical duration of h 0,0 ... 100000,0 ⇒ "Theoretical duration of service", Page 94
service
832 Lifting correction factor % 30 ... 200 ⇒ "Lifting correction factor", Page 94
833 Lowering correction fac‐ % 30 ... 200 ⇒ "Lowering correction factor", Page 94
tor
834 Duration of service spec‐ h 0,0 ... 100000,0 ⇒ "Duration of service specification", Page 95
ification
838 Ramp factor - 0,0 … 1,0 ⇒ "Ramp factor", Page 96
Tab. 358

Reference values ➜ Additional setpoint value
⌸ 840 Operation mode - Selection ⇒ "Additional setpoint value", Page 119
⌸ 841 Additional setpoint value - Selection ⇒ "Additional control", Page 120
source
⌸ 842 Max. additional frequen‐ Hz -300,00 ... 0
cy negative ⇒ "Additional setpoint value frequency limits",
⌸ 843 Max. additional frequen‐ Hz 0,00 ... 300,00 Page 120
cy positive
⌸ 844 Acceleration additional Hz/s 0,01 … 999,99
setpoint value ⇒ "Additional setpoint value frequency ramps",
⌸ 845 Deceleration additional Hz/s 0,01 … 999,99 Page 120
setpoint value
⌸ 846 Additional setpoint value Hz -300,00 ... 300,00 ⇒ "Additional setpoint value bus operation", Page 121
bus operation
⌸ 847 Additional fixed frequen‐ Hz -300,00 ... 300,00
cy 1
⇒ "Additional fixed frequencies", Page 121
⌸ 848 Additional fixed frequen‐ Hz -300,00 ... 300,00
cy 2
Tab. 359

Reference values ➜ ProHub function
Ⓧ ⌸ 850 Operation mode - Selection ⇒ "ProHub function operation mode", Page 118
851 Field weakening enable - Selection ⇒ "Field weakening enable", Page 118
Ⓧ ⌸ 852 Field weakening start % 50 ... 200 ⇒ "Field weakening start", Page 118
Ⓧ ⌸ 853 Lifting correction value % 0 ... 50 ⇒ "Lifting correction value", Page 118
Ⓧ ⌸ 854 Lowering correction val‐ % 0 ... 50 ⇒ "Lowering correction value", Page 118
ue
Ⓧ ⌸ 855 Start of measurement Hz 5,00 ... 999,99 ⇒ "Start of measurement", Page 119
21471644/220808
Ⓧ ⌸ 856 Field weakening factor - 0,50 ... 1,00 ⇒ "Field weakening factor", Page 119
Tab. 360
199
Tab. 361

Operational behaviour ➜ Limit switch functions
866 State 1 - Selection
⇒ "Limit switch status", Page 98
Tab. 362

Control inputs/outputs ➜ Multi-function input MFI1
⌸ 870 Characteristic type - Selection ⇒ "Characteristic curve", Page 122
Tab. 363

Operational behaviour ➜ Limit switch functions
871 Setpoint val. limit 1+ Hz 0,00 ... 300,00 ⇒ "Setpoint val. limit 1+ and setpoint val. limit 1-",
872 Setpoint val. limit 1- Hz 0,00 ... 300,00 Page 97
873 Setpoint val. limit 2+ Hz 0,00 ... 300,00 ⇒ "Setpoint val. limit 2+ and Setpoint val. limit 2-",
874 Setpoint val. limit 2- Hz 0,00 ... 300,00 Page 97
875 Limit switch monitoring Hz 0,00 ... 300,00

freq. +
⇒ "Limit switch monitoring frequency", Page 97
876 Limit switch monitoring Hz 0,00 ... 300,00
freq. -
Tab. 364

Tab. 365

Special functions ➜ Field bus monitoring
⌸ 880 Toggle bit error behav‐ - Selection CM - CAN
iour
881 Toggle bit time ms 0 ... 5000 CM - CAN
Tab. 366

Tab. 367
21471644/220808
200
Tab. 368

Tab. 369

System bus
900 System bus parameter - Selection EM
... only with corresponding
989 optional module
Tab. 370
21471644/220808
201
22 Accessories for Dedrive Compact frequency inverters
22.1 Size 1 DIC - 4 - 002 to 004

Assignment of line fuses, line reactors, line filters, braking resistors, overcurrent relays
Dedrive Compact DIC - 4 - 002 003 004 Remark

frequency inverter Part no. 537 711 84 537 712 84 537 713 84
Part
3 fuse links Type D – in A (slow) 6
Fuse element 451 663 99
Fuse base 575 049 44
Screw cap Part no. 451 700 99
Close-tolerance bolt 504 905 99
Line reactor 380 V to 480 V ----- 537 739 84
up to 10 m Internal
Line filter 380 V to 480 V motor cable.
radio interference sup‐ Part no.
pression level B 10 m up to 50 m 537 748 84
motor cable
Type PWR R 200 PWR R 200 PWR R 200
R Ohm 470 330 220
Standard braking resistors
P kW 0,2 0,2 0,2
for travel applications
Operating figure % 30 20 15 PBr rated / Pgen
Part no. 537 728 84 537 729 84 537 730 84

Type 3RU1116 – 0HB1 3RU1116 – 0HB1
A 0,55 – 0,8 0,7 – 1,0 For braking resis‐
Overload relay tor
Setting A 0,65 0,78 0,95 item 4
Part no. 537 751 84 537 239 84
up to 60 Hz 537 757 84 537 759 84
Output filters
Part no. up to 87 Hz ----- ----- -----
(du/dt)
up to 200 Hz 537 758 84 537 760 84
EMC accessories
Assembly kit highly conductive clips Part no. 537 770 84
Parameter programming accessories
KP500 control unit 537 722 84
Parcom Compact parameter programming 537 752 84
software
KP 232 interface converter Part no. 537 769 84
PC data line 1.8 m 537 237 84
KP CMK switchgear cabinet fitting acces‐ 537 869 84
sories
Optional modules
RS 232 module CM - 232 537 723 84
RS 485 module CM - 485 537 724 84
Profibus module CM - PDP-24 kit 537 898 84
CAN bus module CM - CAN Part no. 537 726 84
System bus module EM-SYS 537 727 84
Extension module EM - I/O-02 537 867 84
Extension module EM - ENC-02-24 537 899 84
Further accessories
Analog PWM converter Part no. 537 782 84
Tab. 371
21471644/220808
202
22.2 Size 2 DIC - 4 - 006 to 009
frequency inverter
Part no. 537 714 84 537 715 84 537 716 84
Part
Line reactor 380 V to 480 V 537 740 84 537 741 84
up to 10 m Internal
motor cable
Type PWR R 400 PWR R 400 PWR R 600
R Ohm 150 120 100
P kW 0,4 0,4 0,6
Part no. 537 731 84 537 732 84 537 733 84

Type 3RU1116 – 1BB1 3RU1116-
1DB1
For braking resis‐
Overload relay A 1,4 – 2,0 2,2 – 3,2 tor
Setting A 1,63 1,83 2,45 item 4
Part no. 537 240 84 537 241 84

up to 60 Hz 537 763 84 537 765 84 537 767 84
Output filters
Part no. up to 87 Hz ----- ----- -----
(du/dt)
up to 200 Hz 537 764 84 537 766 84 537 768 84
EMC accessories
software
PC data line 1.8 m 537 237 84
sories
Optional modules
RS 232 module CM - 232 537 723 84
RS 485 module CM - 485 537 724 84
Further accessories
21471644/220808
Tab. 372
203
22.3 Size 3 DIC - 4 - 014 to 017
Dedrive Compact DIC - 4 - 014 017 Remark

frequency inverter Part no. 537 717 84 537 718 84
Part
3 fuse links Type D – in A (slow) 16 20
Fuse element 451 644 99 451 645 99
Close-tolerance bolt 504 907 99 504 908 99
up to 10 m Internal
motor cable
Type PWR R 600 FZG 500x65-56
R Ohm 68 56
P kW 0,6 0,8
Operating figure % 12 13 PBr rated / Pgen
Part no. 537 734 84 537 735 84

Type 3RU1116-1DB1 3RU1116-1FB1
A 2,2 – 3,2 3,5 – 5,0 For braking resistor
Overload relay
Setting A 2,97 3,78 item 4
Part no. 537 241 84 537 243 84

up to 60 Hz ----- -----
Output filters
Part no. up to 87 Hz 537 154 84 537 155 84
(du/dt)
up to 200 Hz 537 171 84 537 172 84
EMC accessories
software
PC data line 1.8 m 537 237 84
KP CMK switchgear cabinet fitting accesso‐ 537 869 84
ries
Optional modules
RS 232 module CM - 232 537 723 84
RS 485 module CM - 485 537 724 84
Further accessories
Tab. 373
21471644/220808
204
22.4 Size 4 DIC - 4 - 025 to 040

Part
3 fuse links Type D – in A (slow) 35 50
Fuse element 451 647 99 451 648 99
Close-tolerance bolt 504 910 99 504 911 99
Line reactor 380 V to 480 V 537 744 84 537 745 84 537 753 84
up to 10 m 537 747 84
motor cable
Type FZZG 400x65-33 FZZG 500x65-27 FZZG 600x65-27
R Ohm 33 27 27
P kW 1,2 1,6 2,0
Part no. 537 736 84 537 737 84 537 738 84

Type 3RU1116-1HB1 3RU1116-1JB1
A 5,5 – 8,0 7,0 – 10,0 For braking resis‐
Overload relay tor
Setting A 6,03 7,70 8,61 item 4
Part no. 537 245 84 537 246 84
up to 60 Hz ----- ----- -----
Output filters
Part no. up to 87 Hz 537 156 84 537 157 84 537 158 84
(du/dt)
up to 200 Hz 537 173 84 537 174 84 537 175 84
EMC accessories
software
PC data line 1.8 m 537 237 84
sories
Optional modules
RS 232 module CM - 232 537 723 84
RS 485 module CM - 485 537 724 84
Further accessories
Tab. 374
21471644/220808
205
22.5 Size 5 DIC - 4 - 045 to 060
Dedrive Compact DIC - 4 - 045 060 Remark

frequency inverter Part no. 537 881 84 537 882 84
Part
Line filter 380 V to 480 V up to 100 m Part no. 537 891 84 537 892 84
radio interference sup‐ motor cable.
pression level B
Type FGF 310 0702
R Ohm 15,4
P kW 3,5
Operating figure % 14,3 12,9 PBr rated / Pgen
Part no. 537 632 84

Type 3RU1126-4BB1
A 14 – 20 For braking resistor
Overload relay
Setting A 15,0 item 4
Part no. 537 249 84

up to 60 Hz ----- -----
Output filters
Part no. up to 87 Hz 537 158 84 537 159 84
(du/dt)
up to 200 Hz 537 175 84 537 176 84
EMC accessories
Assembly kit highly conductive clips Part no. In preparation
software
PC data line 1.8 m 537 237 84
KP CMK switchgear cabinet fitting accesso‐ 537 869 84
ries
Optional modules
RS 232 module CM - 232 537 723 84
RS 485 module CM - 485 537 724 84
Further accessories
Tab. 375
21471644/220808
206
22.6 Size 6 DIC - 4 - 075 to 110

Part
3 fuse links Type D – in A (slow) 80 100 125
Fuse element 894 317 44 894 318 44 894 319 44
Part no.
Switch-isolator 891 791 44
Line reactor 380 V to 480 V 537 194 84 537 195 84 537 196 84
Line filter 380 V to 480 V up to 100 m Part no. 537 893 84 537 894 84 537 894 84
radio interference sup‐ motor cable.
pression level B
Type FGFG 311 1002 FGFKQU 312
2004
R Ohm 8,2 8,0
for travel applications P kW 5,0 10,0
Operating figure % 15,0 12,3 20,2 PBr rated / Pgen
Part no. 537 816 84 538 776 84

Type 3RU1136-4EB1 3RU1136-4FB1
A 22 – 32 28 – 40 For braking resis‐
Overload relay tor
Setting A 24,7 35,4 item 4
Part no. 537 252 84 537 253 84
up to 60 Hz ----- ----- -----
Output filters
Part no. up to 87 Hz 537 160 84 537 161 84 537 162 84
(du/dt)
up to 200 Hz 537 177 84 537 178 84 537 179 84
EMC accessories
Assembly kit highly conductive clips Part no. In preparation
software
PC data line 1.8 m 537 237 84
sories
Optional modules
RS 232 module CM - 232 537 723 84
RS 485 module CM - 485 537 724 84
Further accessories
Tab. 376
21471644/220808
207
22.7 Braking resistors
22.7.1 Assignment and electrical data
22.7.1.1 Resistors for standard travel applications
Braking resistor
Dedrive Rmin Part no. Type RBr Prated Electrical connection
Compact [Ohm] [Ohm] (±5%) [kW]
DIC - 4 - xxx Operating figure7)
[%]
002 462 537 728 84 PWR R 200 8) 470 0,2 9) 1m PTFE cable without
30 limit stop; 1.5 mm2; (Flu‐
orpolymer- insulated sin‐
003 300 537 729 84 PWR R 200 8) 330 0,2 9) gle-core non-sheathed
20 cable according to UL 62
and 63)
004 220 537 730 84 PWR R 200 8) 220 0,2 9)
15
006 148 537 731 84 PWR R 400 8) 150 0,4 9)
20
007 110 537 732 84 PWR R 400 8) 120 0,4 9)
15
009 92 537 733 84 PWR R 600 8) 100 0,6 9)
17
014 58 537 734 84 PWR R 600 8) 68 0,6 9)
12
017 48 537 735 84 FZG 500x65-56 10) 56 0,8 11) Ceramic flat terminals
13 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
025 32 537 736 84 FZZG 400x65-33 10) 33 1,2 11)

12
032 24 537 737 84 FZZG 500x65-27 10) 27 1,6 11)
12
040 24 537 738 84 FZZG 600x65-27 10) 27 2,0 11)
12
045 15 534 632 84 FGF 310 0702-15,4 15,4 3,5 11)
10) 17
060 3,5 11)
13
075 7,5 537 816 84 FGFG 311 1002-8,2 8,2 5,0
15
090 5,0
12,3
110 538 776 84 FGFKQU 312 2004-8 8,0 10,0
20,2
Tab. 377
7) Operating figure P
Br rated/PGen; The operating figure states the ratio of the continuous output of the resistor and the possible regenerative continuous
output (PFU * mechanical efficiency 0.9) an. This value is only used for estimation. For a detailed dimensioning of the resistor please refer to the
21471644/220808
drive calculation.
8) Type of enclosure IP 55
9) Overload capability 10 x P
rated at 4% CDF120 sec
10) Type of enclosure IP 20
208 11) Overload capability 9.5 x P

rated at 6% CDF120 sec
22.7.1.2 Resistors for special travel applications
Braking resistor
[%]
002 462 537 852 84 FZG 400x65 – 470 470 0,5
74
003 300 0,5
51
004 220 537 853 84 FZG 600x65 – 220 220 1,0
74
006 148 1,0
51 Ceramic flat terminals
007 110 537 854 84 FZZG 500x65 – 120 120 1,6 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
74
009 92 537 855 84 FZZG 600x65 – 100 100 2,0
56
014 58 537 856 84 FZDG 500x65 – 100 100 2,4
68
017 48 537 857 84 FZDG 600x65 – 68 68 3,0
50
025 32 537 858 84 FGFG 311 1002 – 33 33 5,0
50
032 24 537 859 84 FGFG 312 1402 - 33 33 7,0
62
040 24 537 860 84 FGFG 312 1602 - 27 27 8,0 Ceramic flat terminals
50 2.5 - 10.0 mm2
045 15 534 636 84 FGF 312 2202 - 15 15 10,5
53
060 534 637 84 FGF 314 3202 - 15 15 15
55
075 7,5 538 782 84 FGFKQU 313 3204-8 8,0 16,0
48,0
090 534 648 84 FGF 314 4202-7.5 7,5 20,0
49,3
110 537 839 84 FA 322 4802-8 8,0 24,0
48,5
Tab. 378
Overload capability 9.5 x Prated at 6% CDF120 sec
Type of enclosure IP 20
21471644/220808

drive calculation. 209
22.7.1.3 Resistors for lifting applications
Braking resistor
[%]
002 462 537 773 84 FZG 600x65 – 470 470 1,0
148
003 300 1,0
101
004 220 537 774 84 FZZG 500x65 – 220 220 1,6
148
006 148 537 775 84 FZZG 600x65 – 220 220 2,0 Ceramic flat terminals
101 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
007 110 537 776 84 FZDG 600x65 – 120 120 3,0
137
009 92 535 975 84 FZZG 800x85 – 100 100 3,7
103
014 58 537 778 84 FGFG 311 1202 – 68 68 6,0
136
017 48 537 848 84 FGFG 311 1402 – 56 56 7,0 Ceramic flat terminals
100 2.5 - 10.0 mm2
025 32 537 849 84 FGFG 312 2002 – 33 33 10,0
101
032 24 537 850 84 FGFG 313 2802 – 28 28 14,0
123
040 24 537 851 84 FGFG 313 3402 – 27 27 17,0
100
045 15 535 968 84 FA 323 5002 - 15 15 25,0 Stud terminal M6
126
060 25,0
93
075 7,5 538 789 84 FAQU 323 6404 - 8 8,0 32,0
94,8
090 538 791 84 FAQU 324 8004 - 8 8,0 40,0
98,7
110 537 846 84 FAQ 334 0804 - 8 8,0 54,0
111
Tab. 379
Overload capability 9.5 x Prated at 6% CDF120 sec
Type of enclosure IP 20
21471644/220808

210 drive calculation.
22.7.2 Mechanical data and dimensions
22.7.2.1 Compact resistors type PWR
27,4
36
36
d=5,4
A
B
43203444_xml.eps
Fig. 111 Compact resistors type PWR
Compact resistors type PWR

Part no. Type Weight A B Type of enclosure Cable length
[g] [mm] [mm] [mm]
537 728 84 PWR R 200
537 729 84 PWR R 200 208 94 105
537 730 84 PWR R 200
537 731 84 PWR R 400 IP 55 1000
400 189 200
537 732 84 PWR R 400
537 733 84 PWR R 600
635 309 320
537 734 84 PWR R 600
Tab. 380
21471644/220808
211
22.7.2.2 Cemented tube resistors type FZ.G
L 55
H
K
U U 10 M
R R O
H
U
R
1
43203544_xml.eps
Fig. 112
1 Rating plate
2 PG 13.5 cable dia.8 – 14 mm
Finish:
Cement-coated fixed resistors wired to two connections (porcelain terminal), with cover and terminal box of galvan‐
ized steel and perforated sheet.
Type of enclosure: IP 20 (requires uninterrupted mounting plate).
Permissible mounting position: on horizontal surfaces or on vertical surfaces (terminal box below)
21471644/220808
212
Cemented tube resistors type FZ.G
Part no. Type Weight Dimensions [mm]
[kg] H K M O R U
535 975 84 FZZG 800x85 – 100 13 145 830 890 230 190
537 735 84 FZG 500x65 – 56 2,8 526 586 92 64
537 736 84 FZZG 400x65 – 33 4,3 426 486 185 150
537 737 84 FZZG 500x65 – 27 5,2 526 486 185 150
537 738 84 FZZG 600x65 – 27 6,2 626 686 185 150
537 773 84 FZG 600x65 – 470 3,4 626 686 92 64
537 774 84 FZZG 500x65 – 220 5,2 526 586 185 150
537 775 84 FZZG 600x65 – 220 6,2 6.5x12 626 686 185 150
120
573 776 84 FZDG 600x65 – 120 8,8 626 686 275 240
537 852 84 FZG 400x65 – 470 2,3 426 486 92 64
537 853 84 FZG 600x65 – 220 3,4 626 686 92 64
537 854 84 FZZG 500x65 – 120 5,2 526 586 185 150
537 855 84 FZZG 600x65 – 100 6,2 626 686 185 150
537 856 84 FZDG 500x65 – 100 7,5 526 586 275 240
537 857 84 FZDG 600x65 – 68 8,8 626 686 275 240
Tab. 381
22.7.2.3 Steel-grid resistors type FGF...
490 C
270
260
**
o 10,5 A
380 B
1
43203644_xml.eps
Fig. 113
1 PG 13.5 cable dia.8 – 14 mm

**) for FGFG 312, FGF 313
Finish:
Steel-grid resistors wired on 2-pole flat-terminal (fitted in terminal box) = FK terminal, with cover and terminal box of
galvanized steel and perforated sheet
Type of enclosure: IP 20 (requires uninterrupted mounting plate).
Permissible mounting position: on horizontal surfaces or on vertical surfaces (terminal box below, perforated sheet
above and below)
21471644/220808
213
Steel-grid resistors type FGF...
Part no. Type Weight Dimensions
[kg] A B C
534 632 84 FGF 310 0702 – 15.4 9 270 295 330
534 636 84 FGF 312 2202 – 15 21 570 595 630
534 637 84 FGF 314 2302 – 15 32 970 995 1030
534 648 84 FGF 314 4202 – 7.5 43 970 995 1030
537 778 84 FGFG 311 1202 – 68 12 370 395 430
537 816 84 FGFG 311 1002 – 8.2 13 370 395 430
537 848 84 FGFG 311 1402 – 56 13 370 395 430
537 849 84 FGFG 312 2002 – 33 18 570 595 630
537 850 84 FGFG 313 2802 – 28 29 770 765 830
537 851 84 FGFG 313 3402 – 27 33 770 765 830
537 858 84 FGFG 311 1002 – 33 11 370 395 430
537 859 84 FGFG 312 1402 – 33 13 570 595 630
537 860 84 FGFG 312 1602 – 27 16 570 595 630
538 776 84 FGFKQU 312 2004 - 8 22 570 595 655
538 782 84 FGFKQU 313 3204 - 8 33 770 795 855
Tab. 382
22.7.2.4 Steel-grid resistors type FA...
490 l
h
10,5 L2
380
43203744_xml.eps
Fig. 114
1 Terminals
Finish:
Steel-grid resistors wired to two connections (stud terminals fitted in the front of the unit), with cover of galvanized
steel and perforated sheet
21471644/220808
Type of enclosure: IP 20
Permissible mounting position: free standing
214
Steel-grid resistors type FA...
Part no. Type Weight Dimensions
[kg] h l L2
535 968 84 FA 323 5002 – 15 71 710 795 770
537 839 84 FA 322 4802 – 8 56 710 595 570
537 846 84 FAQ 334 0804 – 8 126 960 995 970
538 789 84 FAQU 323 6404 – 8 80 710 795 770
538 791 84 FAQU 324 8004 – 8 93 710 995 970
Tab. 383
22.7.3 Overload relay for the braking resistor
Braking resistor Overload relay

Part no. Part no. Type Setting range Setting value
[A] [A]
534 632 84 537 249 84 3RU1126-4BB1 14 - 20 15,1
534 636 84 537 252 84 3RU1136-4EB1 22 - 32 26,5
534 637 84 537 253 84 3RU1136-4FB1 28 - 40 31,6
534 648 84 537 256 84 3RU1146-4JB1 45 - 63 51,6
535 968 84 537 254 84 3RU1136-4GB1 36 - 45 40,8
535 975 84 537 245 84 3RU1116-1HB1 5,5 - 8,0 6,1
537 728 84 537 751 84 3RU1116-0HB1 0,55 - 0,8 0,7
537 729 84 0,8
537 239 84 3RU1116-0JB1 0,7 - 1,0
537 730 84 1,0
537 731 84 1,6
537 240 84 3RU1116-1BB1 1,4 - 2,0
537 732 84 1,8
537 733 84 2,4
537 241 84 3RU1116-1DB1 2,2 - 3,2
537 734 84 3,0
537 735 84 537 243 84 3RU1116-1FB1 3,5 - 5,0 3,8
537 736 84 537 245 84 3RU1116-1HB1 5,5 - 8,0 6,0
537 737 84 7,7
537 246 84 3RU1116-1JB1 7,0 - 10,0
537 738 84 8,6
537 773 84 537 240 84 3RU1116-1BB1 1,4 - 2,0 1,5
537 774 84 2,7
537 241 84 3RU1116-1DB1 2,2 - 3,2
537 775 84 3,0
537 776 84 537 243 84 3RU1116-1FB1 3,5 - 5,0 5,0
537 778 84 537 246 84 3RU1116-1JB1 7,0 –10,0 9,4
537 816 84 537 252 84 3RU1136-4EB1 22 - 32 24,7
537 839 84 537 256 84 3RU1146-4JB1 45 - 63 54,8
537 846 8414) 537 258 84 3RU1146-4LB1 70 - 90 82,2
537 848 84 537 248 84 3RU1126-4AB1 11 - 16 11,2

537 849 84 537 249 84 3RU1126-4BB1 14 - 20 17,4
537 850 84 22,4
537 252 84 3RU1136-4EB1 22 - 32
537 851 84 25,0
537 852 84 537 239 84 3RU1116-0JB1 0,7 - 1,0 1,0
537 853 84 537 241 84 3RU1116-1DB1 2,2 - 3,2 2,2
537 854 84 3,7
537 855 84 537 243 84 3RU1116-1FB1 3,5 - 5,0 4,5
21471644/220808
537 856 84 4,9
14) Braking resistors are equipped with thermal contacts which can be used as an alternative to an overload relay. 215
Braking resistor Overload relay
Part no. Part no. Type Setting range Setting value
[A] [A]
537 857 84 537 245 84 3RU1116-1HB1 5,5 - 8,0 6,6
537 858 84 537 248 84 3RU1126-4AB1 11 - 16 12,3
537 859 84 14,6
537 249 84 3RU1126-4BB1 14 - 20
537 860 84 17,2
538 776 8414) 537 253 84 3RU1136-4FB1 28 - 40 35,4
538 782 8414) 537 255 84 3RU1136-4HB1 40 - 50 44,7
538 789 8414) 537 257 84 3RU1146-4KB1 57 - 75 63,2
538 791 8414) 537 257 84 3RU1146-4KB1 57 - 75 70,7

Tab. 384
For the overload realys type 3RU11... all three bimetal strips must be connected!
22.8 Line reactors and line filters
22.8.1 Assignment
22.8.1.1 General
Depending on the external components used, the following limit values for cable-bound interference transmission
are maintained.
Please note for the assignment:

● Further information ⇒ "Line reactor electrical data", Page 220
● Typically modulation frequencies of 2 and 4 Hz are used.
● ND = line reactor; NF = line filter
● It may be necessary to use the line reactor for protecting the link 15) as well as for maintaining the EMC limit value
16)
21471644/220808
14) Braking resistors are equipped with thermal contacts which can be used as an alternative to an overload relay.
15) Use of the line reactor for protecting the link
216 16) Use of the line reactor for maintaining the EMC limit value
22.8.1.2 Limit value class B
Limit value class B is reached by means of the following components.
Components for motor cable length

Dedrive Compact Modulation fre‐ CDF to 10m 10 to 25m 25 to 50m 50 to 100m
DIC-4-xxx quency
[kHz] [%] Part no. Part no. Part no. Part no.
002 2...16 ≤100 ND 537,739 84 16) NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
≤60 ND 537,739 84 16) NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
003 2...12 ND 537,739 84 15) ND 537,739 84 15)

>60 ND 537,739 84
004 NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
16 ≤100 ND 537,739 84 16) NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
006 2...16 ≤100 ND 537,740 84 16) NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
≤60 ND 537,741 84 16) NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
007 2...12 ND 537,741 84 15) ND 537,741 84 15)

009 >60 ND 537 741 84
NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
16 ≤100 ND 537 741 84 NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
014 2...16 ≤100 ND 537,742 84 16) NF 537,749 84 NF 537,749 84 No measurements

available
≤60 ND 537,743 84 16) NF 537,749 84 NF 537,749 84
2...12 ND 537,743 84 15) ND 537,743 84 15)

017 >60 ND 537,743 84
NF 537,749 84 NF 537,749 84
16 ≤100 ND 537,743 84 16) NF 537,749 84 NF 537,749 84
025 2...16 ≤100 NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84

≤60 NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
2...12 ND 537,745 84 15) ND 537,745 84 15) ND 537,745 84 15)

032 >60
NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
16 ≤100 NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
ND 537,753 84 15) ND 537,753 84 15) ND 537,753 84 15)

040 2...16 ≤100
NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
045 2...8 ≤100 NF 537,891 84
≤60 NF 537,892 84
060 2...8 ND 537,193 84 15) --- --- ---

>60
NF 537,892 84
075 2...8 ≤100 NF 537,893 84
≤60 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
090 2...8 ND 537,195 84 15) ND 537,195 84 15) ND 537,195 84 15) ND 537,195 84 15)
>60
NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
≤60 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
110 2...8 ND 537 196 84 15) ND 537 196 84 15) ND 537 196 84 15) ND 537 196 84 15)
>60
NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
Tab. 385
21471644/220808
16) Use of the line reactor for maintaining the EMC limit value
15) Use of the line reactor for protecting the link 217
22.8.1.3 Limit value class A group 1
Limit value class A group 1 is reached by means of the following components.

DIC-4-xxx quency
2...8 ≤100 --- --- NF 537,748 84
002
12...16 ≤100 --- NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
≤60 --- --- NF 537,748 84
2...8 ND 537,739 84 17) ND 537,739 84 17) ND 537,739 84
>60
NF 537,748 84
003 ≤60 --- NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
004
12 ND 537,739 84 17) ND 537,739 84 17) ND 537,739 84
>60
NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
16 ≤100 --- ND 537,739 84 NF 537,748 84
2 ≤100 --- --- NF 537,748 84
006
4...16 ≤100 --- NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
≤60 --- --- NF 537,748 84
2 ND 537,741 84 17) ND 537,741 84 17) ND 537 741 84
>60
NF 537,748 84
007
≤60 --- --- NF 537,748 84
009
4...12 ND 537,741 84 17) ND 537 741 84 NF 537,748 84
>60
NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
16 ≤100 --- NF 537,748 84 NF 537,748 84
No measurements
2 ≤100 --- --- --- available
014 4...8 ≤100 --- --- NF 537,749 84

12...16 ≤100 NF 537,749 84 NF 537,749 84 NF 537,749 84
≤60 --- --- NF 537,749 84
2...8 ND 537 743 84 1) ND 537,743 84 17) ND 537,743 84 17)

>60
NF 537,749 84
017 ≤60 NF 537,749 84
12 ND 537,743 84 17) ND 537,743 84 17) ND 537,743 84
>60
NF 537,749 84
16 ≤100 NF 537,749 84 NF 537,749 84 NF 537,749 84
025 2...16 ≤100 NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
≤60 NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
2...12 ND 537,745 84 17) ND 537,745 84 17) ND 537,745 84 17)

032 >60
NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
16 ≤100 NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
≤60 NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
040 2...16 ND 537,753 84 17) ND 537,753 84 17) ND 537,753 84 17)

>60
NF 537,747 84 NF 537,750 84 NF 537,750 84
045 2...8 ≤100 NF 537,891 84 NF 537,891 84 NF 537,891 84 NF 537,891 84
≤60 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84
060 2...8 ND 537,193 84 17) ND 537,193 84 17) ND 537,193 84 17) ND 537,193 84 17)
>60
NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84
21471644/220808
075 2...8 ≤100 NF 537,893 84 NF 537,893 84 NF 537,893 84 NF 537,893 84
218 17) Use of the line reactor for protecting the link
DIC-4-xxx quency
≤60 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
090 2...8 ND 537,195 84 17) ND 537,195 84 17) ND 537,195 84 17) ND 537,195 84 17)
>60
NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
≤60 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
110 2...8 ND 537 196 84 17) ND 537 196 84 17) ND 537 196 84 17) ND 537 196 84 17)
>60
NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
Tab. 386
22.8.1.4 Limit value class A group 2
Limit value class A group 2 is reached by means of the following components.

DIC-4-xxx quency
2...4 ≤100 --- --- ND 537,739 84 18)
002
8...16 ≤100 --- --- NF 537,748 84
≤60 --- --- ND 537,739 84 18)
2...4
>60 ND 537,739 84 19) ND 537,739 84 19) ND 537,739 84
003 ≤60 --- --- NF 537,748 84

004
8...12 ND 537,739 84
>60 ND 537,739 84 19) ND 537,739 84 19)
NF 537,748 84
16 ≤100 --- --- NF 537,748 84
2...4 ≤100 --- --- ND 537,740 84 18)
006
8...16 ≤100 --- --- NF 537,748 84
≤60 --- --- ND 537,741 84 18)
2...4 No measurements
>60 ND 537,741 84 19) ND 537,741 84 19) ND 537 741 84
available
007 ≤60 --- --- NF 537,748 84
009
8...12 ND 537,741 84 19)
>60 ND 537,741 84 19) ND 537,741 84 19)
NF 537,748 84
16 ≤100 --- --- NF 537,748 84
014 2...16 ≤100 --- --- ---
≤60 --- --- ---
2...12
017 >60 ND 537,743 84 19) ND 537,743 84 19) ND 537,743 84 19)
16 ≤100 --- --- ---
025 2...16 ≤100 ND 537,744 84 18) ND 537,744 84 18) ND 537,744 84 18)
032 2...16 ≤100 ND 537,745 84 18) ND 537,745 84 18) ND 537,745 84 18)
040 2...16 ≤100 ND 537,753 84 18) ND 537,753 84 18) ND 537,753 84 18)

045 2...8 ≤100 NF 537,891 84 NF 537,891 84 NF 537,891 84 NF 537,891 84
≤60 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84
060 2...8 ND 537,193 84 19) ND 537,193 84 19) ND 537,193 84 19) ND 537,193 84 19)
>60
NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84 NF 537,892 84
075 2...8 ≤100 NF 537,893 84 NF 537,893 84 NF 537,893 84 NF 537,893 84
21471644/220808
17) Use of the line reactor for protecting the link

18) Use of the line reactor for maintaining the EMC limit value
19) Use of the line reactor for protecting the link 219
DIC-4-xxx quency
≤60 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
090 2...8 ND 537,195 84 19) ND 537,195 84 19) ND 537,195 84 19) ND 537,195 84 19)
>60
NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
≤60 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
110 2...8 ND 537 196 84 19) ND 537 196 84 19) ND 537 196 84 19) ND 537 196 84 19)
>60
NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84 NF 537 894 84
Tab. 387
22.8.1.5 Comparison of the limit values
EN 61800-3 EMC EN 55011

1st environment (residential), general availability Class B
1st environment (residential), limited availability Class A Group 1
2nd environment (industrial), general availability Class A Group 2
2nd environment (industrial), limited availability Class A Group 2
Tab. 388
22.8.2 Line reactor technical data
22.8.2.1 Line reactor electrical data
Input voltage: 3 AC 50/6 0Hz + 10%; 380 V to 480 V +10% -15%
Ambient temperature: 45 °C
Type of enclosure: IP00
IN L Uk Ploss
Part no. Code no. Type
[A] [mH] [%] [W]
537 739 84 184 420 004 DK 302/4 4,00 7,32 4 20
537 740 84 184 420 006 DK 303/6 6,00 4,88 4 25
537 741 84 184 420 008 DK 304/8 8,00 3,66 4 30
537 742 84 184 420 015 DK 306/15 15,00 1,95 3,7 45
537 743 84 184 420 018 DK 307/18 18,00 1,63 4 70
537 744 84 184 420 025 DK 307/25 25,00 1,17 4 70
537 745 84 184 420 034 DK 307/34 34,00 0,86 4 85
537 753 84 184 420 050 DK 922/50 50,00 0,59 3,6 100
537 193 84 184 420 060 DK 921/60 60,00 0,49 4 100
537 194 84 184 420 075 DK 922/80 75,0 0,37 3,7 110
537 195 84 184 420 090 DK 923/90 90,0 0,32 4 120
537 196 84 184 429 115 DK 927/115 115,0 0,25 4 140
Tab. 389
21471644/220808
220 19) Use of the line reactor for protecting the link
22.8.2.2 Mechanical data and dimensions of line reactors
PE U1 U2 V1 V2 W1 W2
c
d
n2
n1
a b
43203844_xml.eps
Fig. 115 Mechanical data and dimensions of line reactors
Dimensions in mm Weight in Connection

Part no.
a b c n1 n2 d kg mm 2
Nm PE
537 193 84 190 110 220 58 170 8 9,0 2,5 - 35 2,5 - 5,0 M5
537 194 84 190 120 250 68 170 8 12,0 25 - 50 3,0 - 6,0 M6
537 195 84 190 130 250 78 170 8 12,0 25 - 50 3,0 - 6,0 M6
537 196 84 210 140 280 82 180 8 14,0 50 - 95 6,0 - 12,0 M6
537 739 84 80 65 95 37 55 4 0,8 0,75 - 2,5 1,0 - 1,2 4 mm2/M4
537 740 84 100 65 115 39 60 4 1,0 0,75 - 2,5 1,0 - 1,2 4 mm2/M4
537 741 84 100 75 115 48 60 4 1,5 0,75 - 2,5 1,0 - 1,2 4 mm2/M4
537 742 84 125 85 135 55 100 5 3,0 0,75 - 4,0 1,5 - 1,8 4 mm2/M4
537 743 84 155 90 135 57 130 8 4,0 0,75 - 4,0 1,5 - 1,8 4 mm2/M4
537 744 84 155 100 160 57 130 8 4,0 0,75 - 10 4,0 - 4,5 4 mm2/M4
537 745 84 155 100 190 57 130 8 4,5 2,5 - 16 2,0 - 4,0 M5
537 753 84 190 105 210 68 170 8 4,5 2,5 - 16 2,0 - 4,0 M5
Tab. 390
22.8.3 Line filter technical data
22.8.3.1 Electrical data
Input voltage: 3 AC 50/60 Hz + 10%; 380 V to 480 V +10% -15%
IN Ploss
[A] [W]
21471644/220808
537 747 84 185 609 040 40 35

537 748 84 185 661 008 8 3,2
537 749 84 185 601 018 18 20
221
IN Ploss
[A] [W]
537 750 84 185 601 040 40 35
537 891 84 185 691 055 FN 3258-55-34 60 26
537 892 84 185 691 075 FN 3258-75-34 82 32
537 893 84 185 691 100 FN 3258-100-35 109 35
537 894 84 185 691 130 FN 3258-130-35 142 43
Tab. 391
22.8.3.2 Mechanical data and dimensions of line filters
Dimensions of line filters 537 747 84, 537 749 84 and 537 750 84
z
y
U1 V1W1
6,3
1
315
300
270
4 x M6
65
U2 V2 W2
M6
2
43203944_xml.eps
Fig. 116 Dimensions of line filters 537 747 84, 537 749 84 and 537 750 84
21471644/220808
222
1 Line connection
2 View of the front side
Connections
Dimensions in [mm] 20) Weight
Part no. Input terminals output
x y z kg mm 21)
2 Nm PE 22) mm2 21)
537 747 84 60 90 125 0,5 - 16 2,0 – 2,3 16
537 749 84 35 76 100 3,5 0,2 - 6 1,5 – 1,8 M6 4
537 750 84 60 90 125 0,5 - 16 2,0 – 2,3 16
Tab. 392
● Line filters 537 747 84 , 537 749 84 and 537 750 84 can be used as base below the Dedrive Compact.
● When the line filters are fitted as base, the total mounting depth is increased (inverter depth + line filter depth)!

mounting panel.
Dimensions of line filter 537 748 84
2
200
160
3 4 6
50
33
2
PE
62
17,5 M6
10,4
1
45
30
5,5
240
280
315
340
351
43204044_xml.eps
Fig. 117 Dimensions of line filter 537 748 84
1 Line connection 2 Load connection; flexible 1.5 mm2 with lettering L1,
L2, L3
21471644/220808
20) Other dimensions see drawing

21) 3 x flexible lead; length 300 mm with ferrules
22) Threaded pin 223
3 Screening braid
4 Lettering
Connections
Weight
Part no. Input (terminals) Output (cable)
kg mm2 Nm PE mm2
537 748 84 1,5 4 0,5 M4 1,5
Tab. 393
● Line filters 537 748 84 can be used a base below the Dedrive Compact.
● When the line filters are fitted as base, the total mounting depth is increased (inverter depth + line filter depth)!
A fixing strap is included in the line filter scope of supply. It must be fitted to the upper side of the Dedrive Compact,
if the line filter is used as a base.
43204144_xml.eps
Fig. 118

mounting panel.
21471644/220808
224
Dimensions of line filters 537 891 84, 537 892 84, 537 893 84 and 537 894 84
D I
C
L
J
H
A
B
G
F
E
43204244_xml.eps
Fig. 119 Dimensions of line filters 537 891 84, 537 892 84, 537 893 84 and 537 894 84
Part no. Dimensions in [mm] Weight Connec‐

in [kg] tions
A B C D E F G H I J K L mm Nm
537 891 250 85 90 220 235 60 5,4 1 39 M6 42,5 26,5 2,0 25 4,0
84
537 892 270 85 135 240 255 60 6,5 1,5 39 M6 40 70,5 2,7 25 4,0
84
537 893 270 90 150 240 255 65 6,5 1,5 45 M10 45 64 4,3 50 7,0
84
537 894 270 90 150 240 255 65 6,5 1,5 45 M10 45 64 4,5 50 7,0
84
Tab. 394
22.9 Output filters (du/dt)
22.9.1 Assignment and electrical data
Input voltage: 400 V / 500 V
Modulation frequency: 2-4 kHz
Output filter Electrical values

Dedrive Com‐ IN L fmax uk Ploss
pact DIC - 4 -
xxx Part no. Code no. 400V / 500V
A mH Hz % W
21471644/220808
002 537 757 84 182 421 002 3/* 2,2 60 0,90 15

537 758 84 182 422 002 2,1 / * 2,3 200 0,66 15
225
Output filter Electrical values
Dedrive Com‐ IN L fmax uk Ploss
pact DIC - 4 -
xxx Part no. Code no. 400V / 500V
A mH Hz % W
003 / 004 537 759 84 182 421 004 4/* 1,2 60 0,65 15
537 760 84 182 422 004 4/* ?? 200 ?? ??
006 537 763 84 182 421 005 5,5 / * 0,87 60 0,65 15
537 764 84 182 422 005 5,5 / * 0,87 200 0,65 25
007 537 765 84 182 421 008 8/* 0,8 60 0,87 20
537 766 84 182 422 008 8/* 0,8 200 0,87 30
009 537 767 84 182 421 010 10 / * 0,65 60 0,88 20
537 768 84 182 422 010 10 / * 0,65 200 0,88 40
014 537 154 84 182 624 014 14 / 11 0,6 87 1,14 40
537 171 84 182 622 014 14 / 11 0,6 200 1,14 50
017 537 155 84 182 624 018 18 / 14 0,45 87 1,10 40
537 172 84 182 622 018 18 / 14 0,5 200 1,22 70
025 537 156 84 182 624 025 25 / 20 0,34 87 1,16 70
537 173 84 182 622 025 25 / 20 0,35 200 1,19 90
032 537 157 84 182 624 034 34 / 27 0,28 87 1,30 70
537 174 84 182 622 034 34 / 27 0,25 200 1,16 100
040 / 045 537 158 84 182 624 045 45 / 36 0,22 87 1,35 100
537 175 84 182 622 045 45 / 36 0,2 200 1,22 110
060 537 159 84 182 624 060 60 / 48 87 110
537 176 84 182 622 060 60 / 48 200 120
075 537 160 84 182 624 075 75 / 60 87 110
537 177 84 182 622 075 75 / 60 200 150
090 537 161 84 182 624 090 90 / 72 87 140
537 178 84 182 622 090 90 / 72 200 170
110 537 162 84 182 624 115 115 / 92 87 140
537 179 84 182 622 115 115 / 92 200 190
Tab. 395
* Only 400 V operation!

21471644/220808
226
22.9.2 Mechanical data and dimensions
a b
43204344_xml.eps
Fig. 120 Dimensions of output filters 537 757 84 ... 537 760 84, 537 763 84, 537 765 84 and 537 767 84
1 Mounting on a top-hat rail
Dimensions Fastening Connection
Part no. a b c Snap-on de‐ Weight Phase PE Mtighten

vice for top-
mm mm mm hat rail kg mm2 mm2 Nm
537 757 84 130 90 90 TS 35; 1,0 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2

7.5 mm
537 758 84 130 90 90 TS 35; 1,0 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2
7.5 mm
537 759 84 130 90 90 TS 35; 1,0 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2
7.5 mm
537 760 00 130 90 90 TS 35; 1,0 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2
7.5 mm
537 763 84 130 90 90 TS 35; 1,0 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2
7.5 mm
537 765 84 130 90 90 TS 35; 1,0 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2
7.5 mm
537 767 84 130 90 90 TS 35; 1,0 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2
7.5 mm
Tab. 396
21471644/220808
227
U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2
PE
n2 n1
a b
43204444_xml.eps
Fig. 121 Dimensions of output filters 537 154 84 ... 537 162 84, 537 171 84 ...537 179 84 , 537 764 84, 537 766 84 and 537 768 84
Dimensions Mounting dimensions Connection
Part no. a b c n2 n1 d Weight Phase PE Mtighten
mm mm mm mm mm mm kg mm 2
mm 2
Nm
537 154 84 125 100 190 100 45 5 3,0 0,5-6 0,2-4 0,8-1,0
537 155 84 125 100 190 100 45 5 3,0 0,5-6 0,2-4 0,8-1,0
537 156 84 155 110 220 130 57 8 4,3 2,5-16 0,5-10 1,2-1,4
537 157 84 155 110 220 130 57 8 4,3 2,5-16 0,5-10 1,2-1,4
537 158 84 190 110 255 70 58 8 9,0 2,5-35 M5 2,5-5,0
537 159 84 190 140 260 170 68 8 10 2,5-35 M5 3,2-3,7
537 160 84 190 140 260 170 68 8 10 2,5-35 M5 3,2-3,7
537 161 84 210 160 280 170 82 8 14 25-50 M6 3,2-3,7
537 162 84 210 160 280 180 82 8 14 16-70 M6 6,0-7,0
537 171 84 125 110 190 100 55 5 3,0 0,5-6 0,2-4 0,8-1,0
537 172 84 155 110 220 130 57 8 4,3 0,5-10 0,2-4 1,2-1,4
537 173 84 155 120 220 130 72 8 7,0 2,5-16 0,2-4 1,2-1,4
537 174 84 190 110 255 170 58 8 9,0 2,5-16 M5 1,2-1,4
537 175 84 190 125 255 170 68 8 10 2,5-35 M5 2,5-5,0
537 176 84 190 140 260 170 68 8 12 2,5-35 M5 3,2-3,7
537 177 84 190 140 260 170 68 8 15 25-50 M5 3,2-3,7
537 178 84 210 160 280 180 82 8 16 25-50 M6 3,2-3,7
537 179 84 210 160 280 180 82 8 20 16-70 M6 6,0-7,0
21471644/220808
537 764 84 100 110 170 60 38 4 1,0 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2
228
Dimensions Mounting dimensions Connection
Part no. a b c n2 n1 d Weight Phase PE Mtighten
mm mm mm mm mm mm kg mm2 mm2 Nm
537 766 84 100 110 170 60 48 4 1,2 0,75-2,5 0,2-1,5 1,0-1,2
537 768 84 125 120 195 100 45 5 2,5 0,75-2,5 0,2-2,5 1,0-1,2
Tab. 397
22.9.3 Motor cable lengths
⇒ "Motor connection", Page 39

21471644/220808
229
23 Project engineering
23.1 General
Dedrive Compact frequency inverters are suitable for use with cylindrical and conical rotor motors.
For the maximum currents of the frequency inverters and deratings which may become necesary, please refer to
the tables and diagrams in section ⇒ "Technical data", Page 20.
23.2 Selecting the motor according to the drive requirement

● Determine the required torque for the drive and select the motor(s) from the motor lists. Remember that the
maximum acceleration and deceleration torque should generally be limited to 1.6 times the rated torque when
asynchronous motors are used with the frequency inverter. Torque and current increases are approximately
proportional up to this value. If higher torques are required, the increase of the current which determines the
inverter size may be disproportionately high.
● Determine whether the motors are to be used on the frequency inverter up to the motor rated frequency, e.g. 50
Hz (frequency for rated speed) or at a higher frequency. Note: Higher frequency provides
● greater speed control range, therefore
● better positioning accuracy
● possibly more power.
● Consider the following when selecting the motor:
● Pay attention to suitability of the motor for inverter operation (winding inter-phase insulation, fit output filters
and thermal protection, if required).
● Motor voltage ≤ inverter output voltage ≤ inverter input voltage
● Motors with 4 and 6 poles are most suitable for frequency-inverter feed.
● The field-oriented regulation without encoders is suitable for travel drives with one or several motors in the range
above ± 3 Hz.
● The field-oriented regulation may be used for hoist or travel drives with cylindrical rotor motors and speed feedback
from 0 Hz onwards.
● The V/f characteristic process is suitable for travel drives with one or several motors (without speed feedback) in
the range above ± 3 Hz.
21471644/220808
230
23.3 Speed range of the selected motor
Determine the planned motor speed range.
The following applies for constant torque:
It must be possible to vary the motor voltage in direct proportion to the frequency, even when the frequency is boosted
beyond the rated point up to the transition frequency. This transition frequency (change-over to field-weakening
operation) is therefore determined by the maximum available line voltage.
Consider the maximum permissible voltage and speed of the motor.
fmax = maximum possible frequency
UAC fmot = rated motor frequency

f max = .f
UMot Mot
Umot = rated motor voltage
43204544_xml.eps UAC = line voltage

Fig. 122
The following examples show how the maximum frequency for motors can be determined.
Example 1
Line voltage 400 V 400 V

Connection Star Delta
Motor data see type plate 400 V / 6.2 A / 50 Hz 230 V / 10.7 A / 50 Hz
fmax = (400 V / 400 V) ·50 Hz = 50 Hz (400 V / 230 V) ·50 Hz = 87 Hz
Tab. 398
Example 2

fmax = (500 V / 400 V) ·50 Hz = 62.5 Hz (500 V / 230 V) ·50 Hz = 108 Hz
Tab. 399
Example 3 Special motor

fmax = (400 V / 230 V) ·50 Hz = 87 Hz (400 V / 133 V) ·50 Hz = 150 Hz
Tab. 400
21471644/220808
231
23.4 Field weakening operation
The motor can be operated at speeds grater than the transition speed, this is generally referred to as field weakening
operation.
Reduced torque
Field weakening is used to operate the motor over an extended speed range with as constant an output as possible.
Field weakening operation occurs when the frequency alone is increased without exceeding the max. inverter output
voltage. The magnetic flux and torque decrease at an approximately inversely proportional ratio to the increase in
the frequency; however, the breakdown torque, a further characteristic of asynchronous motors, decreases accord‐
ing to a square-law function. This results in a limitation of the possible frequency increase and/or reduced output,
since the torque must remain smaller than the breakdown torque to ensure safe operation.
If field weakening is to be used for hoist applications, the ProHub function must be used, ⇒ "ProHub function",
Page 116.
The maximum possible frequency in the field weakening range is limited by the following influencing factors:
● Mechanical features, such as
● Motor
● Gearboxes
● Brake
● Installation design, etc.
● Maximum inverter output frequencies:
● 200 Hz at 2 kHz modulation frequency,
● 300 Hz at ≥ 4 kHz modulation frequency
● Motor characteristic values
For design reasons, Demag sliding-rotor motors are suitable for field weakening operation only under certain con‐
ditions.
Please refer to your Demag drive specialists for the conditions.
23.5 Static torque for speed values of approx. "0 rpm"

Operation of the motor at speed values of approx. "0 rpm" when fed by the Dedrive frequency inverter is only possible
with field-oriented regulation and encoder feedback.
If the motor is operated at speeds below the rated speed and, in particular, when the motor shaft is at standstill, the
cooling effect of the fan connected to the rotor is reduced. Therefore, the application must be checked to determine
whether a fan is needed when the motor is operated below the rated speed over long periods of time.
As an alternative to forced-air cooling, the on-time of the motor can be reduced or the motor power rating must be
increased.
21471644/220808
232
24 Block wiring diagram
24.1 Circuit diagram
8
PWM +
PWM -
7
GND
X210B: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ANA 1
MFI
+ 24V
0V
+ 10V
MFO1
S1 OUT
X210B: 2 3 4 5 6 7
GND
3
S6 IND
2
X10:1
9
X210A: 1
4
_ 3,3k0hm
S3 IND
3 4 5
X210B: 2 3 4 5 6 7
S2 IND S5 IND
X210A: 1 2 6 7
6
S1 IND S4 IND
T1
F2
K1
K2
R>
+ 24 V 180 mA GND
X210A: 1
+ 24 V
Rb1 Rb2
R1
F2
PE
W2
W1
W
PE
PE
PE
PE
W1
T1
W1
W2
L3
L3
V1
V2
V
V1
5
M
3~
V1
V2
L2
L2
U1
U2
U2
U1
L1
X1: L1
X2: U
U1
K2 2
K1
F1
Z1
Z2
L1
3
1
43204644_xml.eps
Fig. 123
1 Brake control 8 PWM module DEMAG-DSE/DST

2 Motor contactor only for KB motors 9 Relays
3 Brake (option) Normally open: 240 V AC / 5 A; 24 V DC / 5 A
4 Rotary encoder (option) (ohmic)
21471644/220808
5 Line connection Normally closed: 240 V AC / 3 A; 24 V DC / 1 A

(ohmic)
6 Analog reference value
Response time: approx. 40 ms
7 PWM analog inverter 233
24.2 Pulse generator connection to the Dedrive Compact DIC-4-xxx
24.2.1 General
The Dedrive Compact offers several possibilities for evaluating a rotary encoder.
● Evaluation in the basic unit
In the basic unit 2 channels (A and B channel) with a signal level of 24 V can be evaluated. The encoder channels
are connected to the digital inputs.
● Evaluation with EM-ENC-02 extension module
The EM-ENC-02 extension module can be used for evaluating 2 channels with inverted signals (A+ , A- and B+ ,
B- channel) with a signal level of 24 V or 5 V.
24.2.2 Selection of the pulse generator and interface electronics
24.2.2.1 General
Demag Cranes & Components offers different pulse generators depending on the type of motor and mounting.
Different electronic interface modules are available for each pulse generator.
The following sections give an overview of the possible applications of the pulse encoders and interfaces on the
Dedrive Compact.
24.2.2.2 EG integral pulse generator with 30 pulses per revolution
Application:
● Conical rotor motors KBx, KDF 63, KMF, SBx
● Cylindrical rotor motors KLA, KLF
Available interfaces:
Protective electronics S1
Power supply: UB = 5.5 to 30 V DC
Current consumption: IB= 50 mA (at UB=24 V)
Signal level: Ulevel = ~UB
Evaluation on the DIC basic unit (rotary encoder 1): See ⇒ "S1 protective electronics on the Dedrive Compact", Page 237
Evaluation on the DIC with EM-ENC-02 (rotary encoder): Level rotary encoder 2 495 :
2 - Unipolar with resistors ⇒ "S1 protective electronics on the Dedrive
Compact", Page 237
Tab. 401
Electronics S31:
Power supply: UB = 24 V DC
Signal level: Ulevel = 5 V
Evaluation on the DIC basic unit (rotary encoder 1): Not possible
Evaluation on the DIC with EM-ENC-02 (rotary encoder 2): Level rotary encoder 2 495 :
0 - Push-pull
Tab. 402
24.2.2.3 EGS integral pulse generator with 30 pulses per revolution
Application:
● Cylindrical rotor motors Zxx
EGS 1 interface:
21471644/220808
Current consumption: IB= 70 mA
Signal level: Ulevel = 5 V - RS 422 (TTL)

234
EGS 1 interface:
0 - Push-pull
Tab. 403
EGS 2 interface:
Power supply: UB = 10 to 30 V DC
0 - Push-pull
Tab. 404
EGS 3 interface:
Signal level: Uhigh >= UB-3 V; Ulow <= 2 V
Evaluation on the DIC basic unit (rotary encoder 1): Only signal A and B
2 - Unipolar
Tab. 405
24.2.2.4 AG external pulse generator with 1024 pulses per revolution
Application:
● External fitting to motors
AG 1 interface:
Current consumption: IB= 100 mA
Manufacturer's code: Hengstler: .41DD

Wachendorff: -I05-
0 - Push-pull
Tab. 406
AG 2 interface:
Manufacturer's code: Hengstler: .41RD

Wachendorff: -245-
0 - Push-pull
Tab. 407
AG 3 interface:
21471644/220808
Signal level: Uhigh >= UB-3V; Ulow <= 2 V
235
AG 3 interface:
Manufacturer's code: Hengstler: .41ID
Wachendorff: -I24-
Evaluation on the DIC basic unit (rotary encoder 1): Only signal A and B
2 - Unipolar
Tab. 408
24.2.3 Electrical connection/terminal assignment
Basic unit terminal assignment

Terminal Connection Electrical data Explanation/Use
1 Voltage output 24 V, Imax = 180 mA
Supply voltage
2 Ground / GND 0V
6 Digital input S4IND Rotary encoder channel B
7 Digital input S5IND Rotary encoder channel A
Tab. 409
See also ⇒ "Control terminals", Page 45
Terminal assignment EM-ENC-02

Terminal Connection Electrical data Explanation/Use
1 EM-ENC A+ Rotary encoder channel A
2 EM-ENC A- Rotary encoder channel A inverted
3 EM-ENC B+ Rotary encoder channel B
4 EM-ENC B- Rotary encoder channel B inverted
5 Voltage output 5V, Imax = 200 mA
Supply voltage
6 Ground / GND 0V
Tab. 410
See also EM-ENC-02 extension module operating instructions
21471644/220808
236
24.2.4 S1 protective electronics on the Dedrive Compact
3 4
X210A
1 2 1 / +24V
3 +24V
3
2 7 / S5IND
Impulsspur A
2
1 Impulsspur B
6 / S4IND
1
GND GND 2 / GND

GND
43204744_xml.eps
Fig. 124 Connection diagram integral pulse generator with protective electronics S1 on the Dedrive Compact
1 Pulse generator connector socket 3 Pull-up resistors 1.2 kOhm

2 Cable socket protective electronics S1 4 Dedrive Compact
When connecting the integral pulse generator to the digital input of the Dedrive Compact via protective electronics
S1 (pulse output => open collector switching against GND), a pull-up resistor of 1.2 kOhm must be connected
between +24 V and the digital input.
21471644/220808
237
238
21471644/220808
Reproduction in whole or in part only with prior consent of Demag Cranes & Components GmbH.
Not liable for errors or omissions. Subject to change.

Application Guidelines / Operating Instructions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Application Guidelines / Operating Instructions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Application guidelines / Operating instructions

Dedrive Compact frequency inverters (0.75 to 55 kW)

220808 en 21471644 720 IS 922

Demag Cranes & Components GmbH

5.4 Line connection ......................................................................................................................................................... 35

8 Programming parameters with the Parcom Compact software................................................................................. 71

11.6 Positioning ................................................................................................................................................................. 84

13.5.3 Block diagram.......................................................................................................................................................... 107

14.4.3 Reference value reached ........................................................................................................................................ 131

16.5.3 Torque controller ..................................................................................................................................................... 156

17 Special functions ..................................................................................................................................................... 162

22.2 Size 2 DIC - 4 - 006 to 009 ...................................................................................................................................... 203

gelesen und verstanden haben.

0.3 Customer service

0.4 Liability for Defects

Wearing parts are not subject to liability for defects.

1.1 Symbols/signal words

Operating hazard for the installation

1.2 Appropriate use

The user is responsible for compliance with EMC directive 89/336/EEC.

1.4 Safety instructions

Non-compliance with the safety instructions

Electric shock, live components

Control, power supply and motor leads must be laid separately.

Electric shock, live components

Commissioning the frequency inverter

1.5 Transportation and storage

1.6 Handling and installing

1.7 Connection of the electrical equipment

2.2 DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency inverters

Fig. 1 Scope of delivery for DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency inverters

A Frequency inverter F Terminal strip X2 (Phoenix ZEC 1.5/...ST7.5)

D Standard fasteners for mounting on a wall panel H CD-ROM documentation

E Brief operating instructions

Fig. 2 Scope of delivery for DIC4-014 to 040 frequency inverters

A Frequency inverter D Brief operating instructions

Fig. 3 Scope of delivery for DIC-4-045 to 110 frequency inverters

A Frequency inverter D Brief operating instructions

3.1 DIC-4-002 to 009 frequency inverters

Line current 1) 3ph/PE I A 2,4 2,8 2) 3,3 2) 5,8 6,4 2) 7,8 2)

Storage temperature TL °C -25 ... 55

Transport temperature TT °C -25 ... 70

Rel. humidity - % 15 ... 85, non-condensing

Frequency inverter Modulation frequency

1) Mains current with a relative line impedance of 1% (see section 5)

Line current 1) 3ph/PE I A 14,2 14,5 2) 26 28,2 2) 35,6 2)

Storage temperature TL °C -25 ... 55

Transport temperature TT °C -25 ... 70

Rel. humidity - % 15 ... 85, non-condensing

Frequency inverter Modulation frequency

025 25.0 A 25.0 A 25.0 A 21.0 A 17.0 A

040 40.0 A2) 38.3 A 2) 3) 35.0 A 2) 3) 29.4 A 2) 3) 23.8 A 2) 3)

1) Mains current with a relative line impedance of 1% (see section 5)

Line current 1) 3ph/PE I A 52 58 2) 72 86 2) 105 2)

Storage temperature TL °C -25 ... 55

Transport temperature TT °C -25 ... 70

Rel. humidity - % 15 ... 85, non-condensing

Frequency inverter current code Modulation frequency

1) Mains current with a relative line impedance of 1% (see section 5)

3.4.2 Site altitude

Fig. 6 Derating; 2.5%/K above 40 °C; Tmax = 55 °C

3.4.4 Line voltage

Fig. 7 Derating; 0.22%/V above 400 V; Tmax = 480 V